JP6653803B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a torso game machine (slot machine).

  In gaming tables such as pachinko machines, the game area of the game board is provided with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall, prize holes where game balls can be won, start ports, variable prize holes, etc. General. When a game ball wins, a bonus is given to the player such as paying out a prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In addition, there has been known such a game console having operation means.

JP 2008-200302 A

However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in operation means.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game console having a characteristic operation unit.

A game console of the present invention that solves the above object,
A first operation means;
Second operating means;
A third operating means,
A gaming table with
In a state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of changing the position of the operation surface,
The third operation means is an operation means including a plurality of operation units,
It is possible to perform multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect,
The first production is a judge production about a jackpot,
The first effect is an effect including an effect operation of the movable means,
The first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In a certain state where the effect operation in the first effect is being performed , the second operating means vibrates,
In the first effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
The first effect is not a notice effect on the second operation means,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect,
The first production mode and the third production mode are different modes,
The third effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means does not vibrate,
In the third effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
If both the third effect and the first effect is performed in one variation rather name
One of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect including an effect operation of the movable means,
The fourth effect may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means,
It is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a characteristic in operation means.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit main process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. 10B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9D is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure which shows an example of a button effect in steps. FIG. 2 is a diagram for describing operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 in detail. FIG. 2 is a diagram for describing an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operating means A and the effect involving the operating means B. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operation means. It is a figure showing step by step an example about an effect involving operation means A (chance button 136). FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 14 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where an effect involving the operating means A (chance button 136) is executed after a weak SP reach effect and a big hit is made. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 16 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where it loses while an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a strong SP reach effect. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 19 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means B (transmissive unit 191) is executed after a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is achieved. FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 21 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A starts vibrating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing, at a stage, an example in which a chance button 136 as an operation unit A is operated after an operation of a transmission unit 191 as an operation unit B. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating, in stages, an example of a case where the operation timing of the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 24. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a transmission unit 191 that is an operation unit B vibrates when a housing vibrates. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where a scene in which an enemy role has won after a strong SP reach effect is displayed once, but a resurrection effect causes a big hit. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 28 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing an example of the 3rd production in steps. It is a figure showing stepwise another example of an announcement effect started according to operation of penetration part 191. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which involved the pseudo run in steps. It is a figure showing step by step an example of other productions involving a pseudo run. It is a figure showing step by step an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the swing fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 36 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of the 4th production and the 5th production in steps. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating, in stages, an example in which the button B is operated later than the example illustrated in FIG. 39. It is a figure for further explaining the relation between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is the figure which showed three examples of the promotion effect. It is a figure showing two other examples about a promotion effect. It is a figure for explaining a general timer notice. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example etc. which may display timer notice display T according to a button operation. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the timing of a back button operation, and the timing of hold increase. It is a figure showing two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method including timer notice display T. It is a figure which shows the example when a timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by countdown of remaining time. It is a figure showing other examples of a timer notice. It is a figure showing an example where timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from decorative symbol display device 208. It is a figure which shows step-by-step the state of the fluctuation | variation display of the decoration symbol in which animation of a hold icon is performed. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a simultaneous change of a hold icon during a design stop. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when a reservation increase occurs during a symbol stop. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when two reservations increase during a symbol change. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when two reservations increase during symbol stop. It is a figure for explaining a winning order change. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when reservation is increased in winning order change. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of a hold | maintenance increasing during hold | maintenance display in a winning order change, and it becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which a simultaneous change effect is not performed according to the kind of displayed hold icon, or is performed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change effect at the time of holding full in a winning order change. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine which can apply the present invention from the front side (the player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the other pachinko machine 100 applicable to this invention from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol And (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the contents of a success / failure judgment table. It is a figure explaining the contents of a special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decoration design display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 78 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of an effect in another case following FIG. 78 (q). (A) is a figure explaining a display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon It is a figure explaining an example of digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after change. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect centering on decoration design display 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 83 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 82. FIG. 84 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 83. FIG. 85 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 84. FIG. 85 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 85. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect centering on decoration design display 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 94. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 95. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery while displaying the notice icon in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows step-by-step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 104. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure which shows step-by-step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase effect of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of production using a movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows step-by-step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which can be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of other productions of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating a step-by-step example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 125. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of other productions of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 127. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step another example of an effect concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and tutorial display. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory view showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of a reservation change notice effect as a pre-read notice effect by a hold icon applicable to an embodiment. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a step-by-step example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 139. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. FIG. 140 shows a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 140 shows another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of the symbol change display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step about another example of an expansion effect of a suspended display frame. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the notice icon digestion production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of other productions of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production applicable to this embodiment.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a ball-and-ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention is applicable will be described in detail. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that recirculates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as external structures, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a firing device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store. The main body 104 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertical rectangular game machine base body that is rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge 112 and is called an inner frame. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is formed in a frame shape so that the inner side thereof can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at an opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting unit. In the present specification, a lamp that uses an LED as a light source is also called a lamp, and a lamp that emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube, is called a lamp. A device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at a lower portion. Further, the transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission unit 191 of the transmission unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is at the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a lock function and is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for striking the game area 124 of the game 200, a chance button 136 for changing the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by operation of the player, and a chance button 136 are released. It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button, and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is at an initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can perform an advancing / retreating operation. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and a firing rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and an unillustrated hitting the game ball with the tip of the firing rod. And a firing hammer. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game ball flowing down into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through the outlet 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. Pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that forms a main control section 300 that performs a control process of the entire game, and control relating to effects based on processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 that performs the processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that forms the control unit 500, an payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to paying out game balls, and an error release switch that releases an error by operation of a game clerk A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with a 168, and a firing base constituting a firing control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to firing of game balls A launch board case 176 that houses the 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 that turns on and off the power by a game clerk and RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 including a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed game board. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which a game ball can roll. In the generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by a player's operation, so that a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special figure starting port 232, which will be described later, One special figure starting port 230 can be divided. Specifically, the game balls that roll in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 by disposing the game nail 238 and the like in the game area 124 are the second game balls. A game ball that is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 232, and conversely, the game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure starting port 232 is provided, 1 It is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 having a right-handed game board, but can be widely applied to pachinko machines having a general game board.

  At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as “Public symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “Special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display) here. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and here is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are constituted by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced effect. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of the general figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held, and here, the general number changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games (details will be described later). (For example, four) can be reserved. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. Turns on when the state is changed to the probability state, and turns off when the state is changed from the high state to the low state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are provided on the gaming board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when the general winning port 226 is won). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as consideration for winning may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to as "ball". Ball (game ball) ".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. Are arranged. For this reason, it is expected that the game ball will enter when the normal figure starting port 228 is hit right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to set a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball and the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  Only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the ordinary figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and is expected to enter by hitting right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid is provided, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tuy). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty of winning the second special figure starting port 232. In other words, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the player wins the general figure changing game and the general figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Is possible (a winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable starting area is smaller than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning ports. A central variable winning port 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning port) provided at the center of the gaming board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and is hit by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening, and door members 2341 and 351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 keeps a closed state until a big hit game in the case of a big hit in a non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between an open state and a closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains the closed state until the jackpot game in the case of a big hit in the power support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, a closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, an open state) in which a game ball can be more easily won than the first opening / closing state. State) is a variable prize winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states to the other, and when the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won in the non-electric support state. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state when the special figure changing game is won, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 is provided for a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. To open and close. In any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state. Even if the opening is slightly open, it is sufficient if the entering of game balls is impossible or difficult. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are set as winning balls. Discharge to 126. Both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the center variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, in the electric support state, Hitting is an advantageous way for the player, and in the non-electric support state, left-handing is an advantageous way for the player.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and sets the firing rod 146. Then, the shot hammer 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strikes the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, and the like, and has a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a center variable winning opening 234, a right variable). The prize port 235) or the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232) is won, or no winning port or starting port is won, or the universal drawing starting port 228 is set. It only reaches the outlet 240 by passing through.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. A warping device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed on the front side of the effect device 206 in a region where the game ball can roll. On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a door) are provided. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warping device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and a ball passing through the center of the stage 244 is a first special figure starting port 230. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move right and left, respectively, with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the respective inner ends, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the respective inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is the displayed decorative pattern. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 behind the lattice hole to be visible, or cover the sash part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the hole of the lattice may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 at the rear may be made completely invisible. Is also good.

  The above-mentioned chance button 136 capable of executing the forward / backward movement and the transparent portion 191 rotatable in the front-back direction are also a kind of the effect movable body.

  Further, as the effect movable body, there are provided a crest actor 247 (see FIG. 14 and the like), not shown here, and a pair of union actors 248 (see FIG. 22 and the like) which unite with the crest actor 247. The crest role object 247 corresponds to an example of a first effect movable body, and the combined effect material 248 corresponds to an example of a second effect movable body. The crest role object 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative design display device 208. When the crest role object 247 starts operation, it falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined objects 248 are arranged at initial positions on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. When the combined role object 248 starts its operation, the left and right sides advance forward from the initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of union members 248 sandwich the crest member 247 from each of the left and right sides, and unite with the crest member. Regardless of the family crest role object 247 or the pair of combined role objects 248, in a state where each is at the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the overlapped display screen than the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and an effect mainly produced in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. , A second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a command transmitted by the main controller 300. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout of the game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and the power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, respectively, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be formed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are controlled by control means (for example, the main control unit (300), the first sub-control unit (400), and the second sub-control unit (500)). )), One of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is the first control means, One combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be considered as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and a temporary data 308, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality in program processing. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random number value generation circuits. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, a winning opening, a variable winning opening, and a door opening sensor such as a front frame door opening sensor and an inner frame opening sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a bottom plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random number value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 21 And a driving circuit 326 for performing the display control of each of the above, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reserve lamp 216, a first special-purpose reserve lamp 218, a second special-purpose reserve lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control and a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the center variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like are provided. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at predetermined time intervals is obtained, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. The random number mode has two more methods. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derives the calculation result as a random number. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 obtains an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the obtained value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a random number seed, or determines the start position of reading a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the random number generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generating circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generating circuit 318 also determines the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to provide a pachinko machine to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown). The game information of the machine 100 (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both are capable of two-way communication. On the other hand, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. Is connected.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a driving circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, a shield device sensor 430 and a chance A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from an operation key unit sensor 425 that detects an operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 or the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Reads data etc. and displays it using the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates an image for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates a control program and data for controlling the entirety of the second sub-control unit 500, and data for image display. A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 is used to perform drive control of various movable bodies (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing / retreating operation, a transmissive unit 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, a family crest role 247, and a united role 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248, and a sensor circuit that outputs detection signals from the various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518 are connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542, A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. However, the second sub-controller 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-controller 400 may control the various movable members 136, 191, 247, 248, or any of them. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 is also performed by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a lending ball. Is detected, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 transmits a door open command to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  For the door open command, the detection signal of the door open sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay base. Thus, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 supplying the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitors). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630 with each other. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main controller 300 may be configured such that a predetermined voltage is directly supplied from the power supply controller 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be configured to be directly supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the like) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 via other control units (the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600, and the like) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

  Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the power supply control unit 660 to supply the predetermined voltage earlier than all or one or more of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. You may. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to directly receive the predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a gaming machine installation branch, a 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a 24 V voltage, and a 24 V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12 V is further reduced to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V) is used. ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main controller 300. The DC current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12 V falls below a predetermined value (in this example, 9 V). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line that connects the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which the DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Is equivalent to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24 V AC current as it is, or converts it to a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  In addition, start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from power supply control unit 660 reaches a voltage value at which CPU 304 can operate when power is turned on. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error or a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the operation originally designed due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike or an illegal action. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described above correspond to an example of the predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure immediately after the power is cut off, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a power failure voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out. Is executed. In this reset processing, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be performed is a system reset operation. There are two types of reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, an extension process is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, also when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps. FIG. 5A shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and a ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” in which all seven segments are turned on and one central segment is turned on. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “variable display of special figure 2” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is repeatedly turned on. Do. These “variable display of special figure 1” and “variable display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of symbol variable display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 starts. , The second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of the "variable display of the special figure 1" to the stop design mode of the special figure 1 is stopped and the finalized display is completed, or the special figure is started after the "variable display of the special figure 2" is started. The process from stop display of the stop symbol mode 2 to completion of the finalized display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure J” as the stop symbols in the symbol change display. In FIG. 5A, a white portion in the figure indicates a location of a segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates a location of a segment to be turned on.

  "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a special jackpot game is a jackpot is made by random selection of hardware random numbers, and the determination of whether or not a special jackpot is made by random selection of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. After the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, a state that shifts to the time saving state is referred to as a general high probability state, and a state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a general low probability state. The "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state, and the "Special figure B" which is a 15R jackpot symbol is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are patterns in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that “special figure C” is 2R as compared with “special figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that “special figure D” is 2R as compared with “special figure B” which is 15R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The "special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol called suddenly normal, and is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. Each of these "special figure E" and "special figure F" is 2R and is in a state where it does not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, and each is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the big hit without the 2R time saving. That is, the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different. By providing "G", "special figure H" and "special figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, "Tokushi I" is a first miss symbol, and "Tokuji J" is a second miss symbol, in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a symbol other than the "special symbol A" is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns here, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10." That the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, that is, the first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are provided on condition that the second ignition sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special figure ignition port 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c To perform “decorative display of decorative symbols”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed for each symbol display area (scroll display). Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of “special figure B”, a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special figure A”, a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3” or “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7”) ) Etc. are stopped and displayed.

  Also, a 2R jackpot called “Tokuzu E” which is called a hidden probability change, a 2R jackpot called “Tokuzu F” which is suddenly normal, a first small hit of “Tokuzu G”, and “Tokuzu H” When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called "sudden probability change" of "Tokuzu C" or the 2R jackpot called "sudden time saving of" Tokuzu D "," decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 " Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. indicate.

FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of stop and display modes for the ordinary figure, namely, "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, and "Picture B", which is a lost symbol. On the basis of the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol display device 210 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs “Picture change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game, “standard figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the general figure change game, “standard figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5C as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special counter for generating a big hit special figure determination random number counter, a special big hit special figure determination random number counter, Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of the number determination random number counter is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the number of reservations, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special figure determination at the time of big hit, the random number value for special figure determination at the time of small hit, and the special figure determination at the time of loss for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Each of the random number for use, the result of prior determination of a special figure, the result of preliminary determination of a special figure, the result of determination of a specific figure, the result of determining a special figure, and the result of determining a special figure timer are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure holding storage unit divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas where the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be held is separately provided for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 It is prepared. The reservation storage unit of the special map 1 includes a random number value for determining the special map 1 big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the small hit, and the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the loss. Are set as one set, and these four random numbers are stored for each area in a set in a winning order (reservation order). In addition, the hold storage unit of the special map 2 stores a random number value for determining the special map 2 big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the small hit, and The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area in a winning order (reservation order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6A according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, and various types of data stored in the RAM 308. Initial setting of variables, operation permission to the WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this processing is referred to as WDT processing). Subsequent to the WDT processing, in the initialization processing in step S101, whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the power management section 660 When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to the WDT process. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to the initial state. Perform setting 2. It should be noted that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a value for determining a period for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from one output port to the sub control unit 400, a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt inhibition, a basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the loss special figure determining random number counter are respectively provided. Update the value generation counter. After the end of the basic random number initial value updating process, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, an effect random number update process is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for determining a timer number for each of a special figure and a general figure. Each of these counters has a timer number determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number for use. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After the effect random number updating process is completed, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S103 and S105 except during the execution of the timer interrupt processing started every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically updated (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control timer interrupt). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, it is determined that a prize has been won if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before last time, previous detection signal present, present detection signal present) In the case of a match with the general winning opening 226, the center variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the start port 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is no winning in the general winning opening 226. Is determined, and the following processes associated with winning in the general winning opening 226 are performed. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update processing (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99. In the subsequent basic random number update processing (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determining random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set to the big hit special figure 1 determining random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, and the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is measured. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbols on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined prize production time, predetermined open time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when there is a winning in the winning opening 226, 234, 235 or the starting opening 230, 232, 228, the winning provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the ball count storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball count storage area is set.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination processing, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has a prize, and the number of reserved special figure changing games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If so, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, the big hit determination random number and various special figure determination random numbers are stored. The random number for jackpot determination is a value obtained by processing a value obtained from the random number storage register of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determining random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 for performing random number processing corresponds to an example of a start information deriving unit. The various random numbers (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The special map reservation storage unit stores start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 as a predetermined upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to an example of a start information storage unit that can store the start information. At this time, various random number values (start information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a hold storage unit of a special figure. The information storage unit may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of the special map may be used as the start information storage unit. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number of the special figure stored in the RAM 308, and increases the reserved number of the special figure by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  Further, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228 and the number of suspended general-purpose change games is less than a predetermined number (for example, two), the general-purpose winning random at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for generating a numerical value is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for the special figure, as a general-purpose winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination processing, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to enter the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the center variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. When a winning (ball entry) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the central variable The winning reception information indicating whether or not there is a winning (entering a ball) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  If the number of reservations is equal to or more than the predetermined number, regardless of the start information of the special figure or the start information of the ordinary figure, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

  When this winning determination processing (step S209) ends, the prefetch processing is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased from the previously executed prefetching process. In other words, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of reservations up to now (the number of reservations at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of reservations). The number of reservations at the time of executing the prefetching process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the number of old reservations to determine whether the number of reservations is increasing. If the number of suspensions has not increased, the prefetching process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value in the special figure 1 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read or the special figure in the special figure 2 holding storage unit is stored. FIG. 2 The amount of increase in the random number value for jackpot determination is read in advance. In this case, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the pre-reading here means that the start information is read before the determination of the success / failure (final lottery). ) Is sometimes used to mean reading.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state where the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low and a special figure high probability state that is relatively high. Being in the special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a probability change flag is prepared. When the probability variation graph is set to ON, the state is a special figure high probability state (probability variation is in progress), and when the probability variation graph is set to OFF, the state is a special figure low probability state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a hit / fail judgment table used in the prefetching process. The randomness range is defined in the special / non-acceptance determination table separately for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number is determined in advance. It is determined which of the random number ranges in the application table belongs. That is, referring to the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure is preliminarily determined to be "big hit", and otherwise, the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure is preliminarily determined to be "losing". In the special figure related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6 (b)) described later, the special / non-performing judgment of the special figure changing game is performed again by using the same / non-permitted judgment table having the same content as the predetermined / non-performed table. The determination result here is a result of the preliminary determination.

  If the result of the preliminary determination is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the special hit at the time of big hit 1 in the holding storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or the random number value in the holding storage unit of the special figure 2 is read. The random number value for big hit special figure 2 determination is read in advance. If the result of the preliminary determination is "small hit", the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the small hit in the special figure 1 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or the special figure 2 is held and stored. First, the random number value for determining the special map 2 at the time of the small hit in the section is read. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of loss in the special figure 1 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or the random number value in the special figure 2 holding storage unit is stored. The random number value for losing the special figure 2 is pre-read. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure preliminary determination table used in the prefetching process. The special figure pre-judgment table defines the random number ranges corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. According to which random number range the figure determining random number belongs to, a special figure pre-judgment result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the determination result of the special figure here is also a result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in a special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information are executed before the success / failure determination (final lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of a first start information prefetching unit, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value and various The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of a second start information prefetching unit. In addition, the main control unit 300 that performs a preliminary determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random number and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of a first preliminary determination unit, and the special figure 2 big hit determination The main control unit 300 that performs the preliminary determination based on the random number value and various special figure 2 determining random number values corresponds to an example of a second preliminary determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a temporary read-ahead information storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each reservation and a temporary read-ahead information storage unit for special figure 2 similarly divided into areas for each reservation. Have been. Information indicating the special figure pre-judgment result (information indicating the special figure and also referred to as prefetch information hereinafter) is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of reservations has not increased, the pre-reading information “no reservation” is stored in the corresponding pre-servation area of the pre-reading information temporary storage unit. In the pre-reading process, when the big hit is being played, and when the current control state is the electric power support state (the time-saving flag is on), the pre-reading of the start information of the special figure 1 and the preliminary determination are performed. In these cases, the "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the pre-read start information of the special figure 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To memorize. That is, based on the fact that the ball has entered the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 whose state is a fixed starting area) in which the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided, during the big hit game and during the electric support. The preliminary determination based on the start information thus performed is not performed, and the notification of the preliminary determination result (prefetch notice) is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is ensured. It should be noted that, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-determination and the notification of the result (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. Notification (prefetch notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B, the general-purpose-related processing is performed following the winning determination processing in step S209 (step S211). In this general figure related processing, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general figure state is performed as the general figure state updating processing. For example, in the process in the middle of the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the ON / OFF drive control for repeating the ON and OFF of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the hit symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol Lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED included in the general-purpose display device 210 is performed so as to be in one of the display modes of (general-purpose B illustrated in FIG. 5C). Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general map-related process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the lost symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the hit symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure changing game is notified to the player.

  In addition, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on. When the ordinary figure hit flag is on, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the setting area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the blade member 2321 in the open state. And the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in a closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general-state state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on. When the general-figure losing flag is ON, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating.

  Subsequently, in the general figure related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is inactive) and the general figure holding state is held. When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general figure variable game is determined to be a win or a non-prize by random number lottery based on the random number random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not a win is to be made. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the general-purpose timer random number value described above is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are determined based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. From among the above, one time for displaying the fuji figure on the fuji display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in the fuji fluctuating time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the fuji figure fluctuating display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in a general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related processing (step S213) is performed following the ordinary figure related processing of step S211 described above. In the special figure related processing, first, the special figure state update processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed, and then the special figure state update processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update) is performed. Process). The special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following eight processings according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state updating process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off. Lighting / light-off drive control that repeats light-off is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process is terminated.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure related lottery processing described later will be described. The 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off based on the result of the special figure determination (stop symbol form of the special figure), and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 displays the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), the 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), the 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and the suddenly shortened time symbol symbol (special symbol C). (D), Hidden Probable Design (T Special Figure E), Sudden Normal Design (T Special Figure F), First Small Winning Design (T Special Figure G), Second Small Winning Design (T Special Figure H), First Lost Design (T Special Figure) One of the symbols of FIG. I) and the first losing symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. Further, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, when a value is set in the power support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times saved, and the subtraction result is 1 to 0. In this case, the time saving flag is turned off unless the special figure probability is fluctuating. Further, the time reduction flag is also turned off during a big hit game (during a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-electric support state (first approach rate control state) in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (in the special game state).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a symbol for stopping the variable display is provided. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  In addition, a big hit flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the big hit flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. While the special figure 2 is in operation in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed is awaited. For this purpose, information indicating a winning effect period is set in a storage area of a special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) of game balls are detected in the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 235 in an open state is output to an opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 2351 and information indicating the opening period is set in a storage area of a door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. I do. In addition, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening release setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 235 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. The information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state updating process that is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) by repeating the opening / closing control of the door member and starts at the timing when the control is completed, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect waiting period is indicated in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is displayed. Set information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the opening / closing state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit gaming state (during the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. The opening / closing pattern of the door members 2341 and 235 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 reads the opening / closing pattern corresponding to the determination of the special figure fluctuating game from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probable change flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the certainty change flag among the certainty change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the time-saving flag among the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to ON, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is stored. Set the number of electric support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting area) (entry rate), is changed to the first entry rate control state. This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-power support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the losing flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update processing in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the processing is shifted to the next processing without doing anything.

  When the special figure 2 state update processing is completed, the special figure 1 state update processing is performed. In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing described above ends, a special figure related lottery processing is performed next. In the special figure-related lottery processing, first, the processing for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery processing) is performed, and thereafter, the processing for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery processing) is performed. As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the prize determination processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing started at a predetermined timing. In step S209), when starting information is obtained based on a game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and starting information is obtained based on a game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are simultaneously established, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game does not start to change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuating game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and a prize to the second special figure start port 232 is given. The notification of the result of the lottery based on the drawing is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the starting information of the special figure 1 and the special figure When the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored in a state where only the start information of the special figure 1 among the start information of the special figure 2 remains, it is based on the newly stored start information of the special figure 2. The notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special figure 1 which has been stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery unit (acceptance determination unit).

  In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, a lottery (judgement) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and displayed is determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined contact determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether the second special map display device 214 is performing the special map change display or the stop display, and if any of the displays is being performed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is performed. Return, if not in any display, determine whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, main control unit timer interrupt processing If it is set during the non-operation of the special figure, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been satisfied, and it is determined whether a predetermined validity determination condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether or not the number of held special figure 2 variable games is greater than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt process. If the hold number is 1 or more, the predetermined acceptance / rejection determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined acceptance / rejection determination condition is satisfied, a set of random numbers (special figure 2 big hit determination random number value), which is the start information stored most recently, is stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , The random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the big hit, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the small hit, and the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the loss, and the starting information (random number) still stored in the holding storage unit. Is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, the start information stored most recently is taken out from the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, and if the start information is further stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, the N-th oldest start information is stored in the hold figure of the special figure 2. This means that the start information is set as the (N-1) -th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, 1 is subtracted from the reserved number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random number values (special figure 2 big hit determination random number value, big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, small hit special figure 2 determination random number value, The main control unit 300 that performs a process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a hit / fail decision table. The contents of the hit / fail judgment table are the same as the contents of the hit / fail judgment table described above. In this hit / fail judgment processing, the random number value for the special figure 2 big hit determination is stored in the hit / fail judgment table according to the control state (the special figure low probability state, the special figure high probability state) with reference to the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308. "Big hit", "small hit", or "losing" is derived as a result of the success / failure determination based on which of the random number ranges belongs to. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to a hit / fail determination (lottery). Here, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that performs the hit / fail determination processing is a lottery means (hit / fail determination means). Corresponds to an example. The “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific result determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special figure symbol determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In the special figure symbol determination process, if the hit / fail determination result is “big hit”, the special figure 2 at the time of the big hit belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table, The special figure determination result is determined to be one of “Special figure A” to “Special figure F”. When the result of the hit determination is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for the special figure 2 at the time of the small hit belongs to. It is determined to be "Special figure G" or "Special figure H". Further, when the result of the determination is “losing”, the special figure determination result is set to “special” based on which random number range in the special figure determining table the random number value for losing special figure 2 belongs to. Figure I "or" Special Figure J ". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special figure symbol determination processing corresponds to an example of symbol determination means.

  In the variable time determination process following the special figure symbol determination processing, the variable display period in the variable figure stop display of the special figure is determined. In this variation time determination processing, a timer number determination random number is obtained from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The timing of obtaining the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of obtaining the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212 starts changing symbols to when displaying a stop symbol representing the result of the pass / fail judgment, that is, when the special figure is displayed on the variable display. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), but may be the fluctuation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period becomes 2 seconds, which is a very short special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 shows that the special figure fluctuation stop period becomes 5 seconds, and the reduced special figure fluctuation time Represents Note that what is determined by the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timer 1 to the timer 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 208 is set to the normal reach. Normal reach means that a decorative symbol in which two symbol display areas (for example, the right and left symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal to each other is stopped (strictly, temporarily stopped) (first stop and second stop are performed). ), A state in which the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed. This is a state in which a predetermined combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed if the symbol (the symbol equal to the symbol) is stopped (third stop or final stop). The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time will be 40 seconds, the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time will be 60 seconds, and the timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time will be 80 seconds. When the timers are determined by the timers 5 to 7, the reach pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The super-reach is one in which the staging effect is improved by further adding a special variable display and the like to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes 120 seconds. When determined by the timer 8, the special pattern is selected as the decorative pattern change pattern in the decorative pattern display device 208. The special variation includes a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, a special full rotation reach, and the like, and when determined by the timer 8, the decoration pattern variation pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208 selects the full rotation reach. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that another timer is selected, and this full revolution reach corresponds to the premium reach.

  Note that, when simply referred to as “reach”, it means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is performed after the result of the right / wrong determination in the special figure-related processing is that the result of the right / wrong determination (the main lottery) becomes a specific right / wrong determination result (a predetermined result with a high degree of advantage of the player). This is an announcement effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not to reach is determined after performing the determination.

  In the variable time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined based on which of the random number ranges corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table specifies the timer number in accordance with the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations in FIG. The timer number may be determined based on this.

  The timer number indicating the special figure fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special figure lottery-related processing is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination processing S209), a special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers that are one or a plurality of pieces of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected on the basis of or based on a predetermined random number random determination, and here, the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table. In determining the timer number, a lottery using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining a timer number) may be performed, or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . Further, a timer selection table may be selected in the special figure lottery-related processing, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

  When the variable time determination processing is completed, other processing is performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery processing ends.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related processing, a special figure 1 related lottery processing is performed. Each process performed in the special drawing 1 related lottery process is the same as the process described in the above special drawing 2 related lottery process, in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  As described above, the special figure-related processing (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol change start command, symbol change stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds designation command, winning opening opening command, winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is the symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time-saving flag and a probability change flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the information includes a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like. In the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command, In the case of the command for specifying the number of rounds per hit, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds per hit, and the like are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of a prize in the second special figure starting port 232, and prize in the central variable winning port 234. And whether there is a winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  Also, in the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission processing, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, information indicating a timer number, information indicating a timer number, Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game is set. In the above-described general command rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (a special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are set. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission processing, the command data includes information indicating the result of determining the special figure, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure changing game or the second special figure changing game which is reserved, and the like. Is set. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to the big hit game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission processing, the command data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information, information indicating the number of reserved first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like are set. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the end effect control command causes the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image informing the player of the end of the big hit, and the big hit game Ends. The end effect start command referred to here corresponds to the big hit game end command. In the above-mentioned general command special winning opening release setting transmission processing, information indicating the number of rounds per hit stored in the RAM 308, the current round number, information indicating the control state, and the like are set as command data of the special winning opening opening command. . In the above-described general command winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the reserved first special figure variable game are stored as the command data of the winning opening closing command. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In addition, in this step S215, a general command special figure reservation increasing process is also performed. In this general command special figure suspension increase processing, the special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure reservation increase command, the control state Is set, and information (pre-judgment pre-judgment result) indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 which has been pre-judged is set.

  Further, in this step S215, a general command ordinary drawing hold increase processing is also performed. In the general command general-purpose hold increase process, information indicating a control state and the like are set in the command data of the general-purpose hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general figure change start command indicating that the general figure change display has started (performed) as a general figure related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 sends to the first sub-control unit 400 a universal figure variation stop command indicating that the variation display of the universal figure has stopped (performed), or the pair of blade members 2321 has started opening (performed). A power-chu opening command or a power-chu closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 has closed (performed) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the winning rounds are completed, based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In the command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set) in bit 7 and power-on information in bit 6. (If ON, this indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate The number of payout requests is shown.

  Next, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is monitored. If an error or a lower plate full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the center variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the ordinary symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before returning, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are stored in the original registers. Settings and interrupt permission settings. Also, before returning, it is monitored whether the low-voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the power supply is shut off), it returns to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for performing the operation is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a power-off process such as initialization of an input / output port is performed, and thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process. Is also good.

<Process of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect described below involving the operating means is also controlled by the effect control processing. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the symbol variation time is received, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect involving the operating means according to the length of the variation time in this effect control process. When determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. The image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313 according to the effect data read out here, and the movable body control is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 by the control according to the effect data read out here. A command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described below.

  In step S311, by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428, it is determined whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination, when the operation of pressing the chance button 136 is detected, the processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the operation of pressing the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. When the operation is valid, processing for preparing effect data corresponding to an operation accepting effect described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command (for example, a control command related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, this The setting for outputting the control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt triggers the timer interrupt processing to a predetermined time. Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and the effect random number value is updated.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. Thereby, the one-frame image stored in the display area not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S605; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 on the basis of the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 executes information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434 based on the end of rendering of the image. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S611; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal has been input. Wait for is entered. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Process of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in S701. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for a timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. CPU 504 of second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed. In step S711, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable body control process is performed, and thereafter, the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control process, various kinds of movable bodies (chance button 136 capable of executing forward / backward movement, transmission part 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, family crest role object 247, combined role When a control command related to the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248 is performed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (for example, once every 2 ms). Run with

  In step S901 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt process, an effect random number value update process and the like are performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9: is a figure which shows an example of a button effect step by step. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of the alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following drawings unless otherwise specified). Note that the time interval between the alphabet and the like written in parentheses and the alphabet and the like written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , An interval different from the equal interval may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the center of the effect display area 208d, and a right side of the variable icon display area 208e is a reserved icon display area 208f. Is provided. A frame image indicating the position of the fluctuating icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuating icon display area 208e. Although this frame-shaped image is always displayed, when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuating icon is not displayed in the fluctuating icon display area, or when the fluctuating icon is displayed, the reach effect is not performed). May be displayed only when it is not turned on). Note that only one of the fluctuating icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9A, four holding icons h1 to h4 are displayed. These four holding icons h1 to h4 are all displayed with black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the holding icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special figure change display or the start of the special figure pass / fail determination is on hold, and the number of hold icons displayed is basically the number of the special figure change game. This is the same as the number of reservations. However, there may be a timing at which the number of displayed holding icons does not represent the number of holdings before and after the time of holding. The hold icons include a hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and a hold icon of Toku-zu 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to provide a display area for each of the two icons. In addition, the holding icon can provide a pre-reading notice as to whether or not the holding is appropriate depending on the display mode. The animation related to the hold icon is, for example, an increase animation executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, the order of the hold changes due to the previous hold being consumed, and the hold is changed. The movement animation executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left side), the change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-reading result, and the hold are exhausted. Animation executed when the hold icon is erased, and evacuation animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority special map is saved when the priority special figure is increased in the priority changer. Etc. In addition to the above-described animation, a standby animation that is executed independently during a period other than the time during which the animation is being executed (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease of a hold or a change of a hold icon) and that can be executed in duplicate with the animation There is. An example of the standby animation is an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repetition animation of an animation of a fixed length). Note that the animations of increasing, moving, changing, deleting, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One change icon can be displayed in the change icon display area 208e. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9B, a star-shaped change icon c is displayed. The change icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the reservation is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or the change icon is expressed as moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The change icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the change icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. The change icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuating icon is capable of giving an advance notice of the feasibility of the fluctuating (the fluctuating notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the feasibility result of the fluctuating is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be regarded as an icon relating to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before, a same timing as, or a timing after the timing at which the result of the change is notified.

  As the animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon that is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and has the oldest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is exhausted. And a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the change icon. These animations may be executed in combination at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuating icon includes a standby animation that is executed during the execution of the special figure fluctuating game, an erasing animation that is executed when the special figure fluctuating game ends and the fluctuating icon is deleted, Change animation that is executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed simultaneously in combination with each other. Further, the waiting animation of the changing icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the moving animation or the changing animation.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and a fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a circular display, and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the big hit symbol is being stopped (fixed display), and white indicates that the losing symbol is being stopped (fixed display). It represents that.

  Further, FIG. 9 shows, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol reserve lamp 218, and a second special symbol reserve lamp 220. ing.

  In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 has a white display indicating a white lighting state or a light-off state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and a hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be a lighting state other than red. Although “lit” is used here, it may be “blinking” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of a castle town. If the background image is a castle town background image, the pachinko machine 100 is in a castle town mode among a plurality of effect modes prepared. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) the stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative design display device 208 has “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped display. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons that are the holding display of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the first special figure display device 212 has started to display a special figure in a fluctuating pattern, and the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 has also started displaying a fancy pattern in a fancy pattern. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed, and a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This is because, out of the four holding icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 11A, the holding icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes the changing icon, and the changing icon is displayed from the holding icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9C, a reach effect has been started. Up to now, the decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with a numeral of 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 3) a display of an arrow 136b and a character display of “press” as a promotion display for prompting the user, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. One is displayed as one set. Note that the remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is received. Also, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 illuminated in red is switched to illumination in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation validity period, a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9G, the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then, as shown in FIG. I have. The character "Super Reach A" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (h), indicating that the super reach A effect is being performed. In this example, the castle town background is displayed from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the castle town background. Further, when the effect display of the super reach A is started, all of the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 and the frame-shaped image indicating the position of the change icon c and the change icon display area 208e are continuously displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the change icon c and the frame image may also be erased to make them invisible. The super reach A is not a super reach that is determined to be a big hit, and just because it has developed into a super reach A does not always mean a big hit. In addition, even when a display of “CHANCE” that is expected to develop into a super reach is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the loss design is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. In some cases. The display of “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ′) showing another example subsequent to FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (depressed), “Depressed” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (h ′), the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is not displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 without developing into super reach. Have been. In addition, even if the display of "sorry" is made, there is a case where a big hit is caused by the reversal effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but an operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state of the pachinko machine 100 within the operation valid period is a state in which, when the chance button 136 is operated, execution of a new effect such as cut-in notice is started (operation valid state). However, control may be performed such that the operation of the chance button 136 is not always received but is received only during the reception period.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for describing in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advancing and retreating operation, and a transmitting portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which both the chance button 136 and the transmission unit 191 are at their initial positions, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmissive portion 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or off. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Note that the chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the pushed position.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission unit 191 has been rotated from an initial position about a drive shaft (not shown) provided below and inclined forward from the initial position. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft that extends in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10B, it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. In addition, as a strong vibration having a large amplitude of vibration, the transmission part 191 may rotate in small increments in the front-rear direction. Even when the transmission unit 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 can be turned on or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or a production sound. The state (second state) of the transmission unit 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) at the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate the transmission unit 191 by hand to push the transmission unit 191 toward the initial position, and the transmission unit 191 corresponds to an example of an operation unit. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or a production sound. Note that the transmission section 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which the chance button 136 has begun to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 3D shows a state in which the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in a plurality of stages. The chance button 136 that has advanced (projected) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction in the advanced (projected) state. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 advanced (projected) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 may be configured to automatically retreat toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  Note that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain set state. For example, the function may be realized by setting by the effect customizing function by the player or by setting of a switch on the game clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be no vibration at all, or only some vibrations.

  FIG. 11 is a view for explaining an effect involving the operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operating means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although there is a difference that the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, both may be operation means of the same size, May be operation means that can be operated together, or operation means that cannot be operated together. Note that any one of a plurality of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, only a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Is also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transmission unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with another operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmissive portion 191) is greater than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Is highly expected. The function A is provided with both, but the function B is provided only with the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation unit B is inferior in the number of functions to the operation unit A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation unit A, but the operation unit B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function of performing strong vibration.

  The number of functions may be the same between the operation unit A and the operation unit B.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the crest role object 247 and the combined role object 248 is “movable body”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122 and the like. , LED and various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and the vibration data of the operation means A are displayed as “Vibe”. "..." in the figure indicates omission of data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in No. 1 is "E0", and this "E0" indicates that there is no vibration. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” indicates that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 are effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A vibrating before the operation is operated. And the production after operation is started according to each of these production data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in No. 3 is "E2", and this "E2" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated after the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 are effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. No. 2 data and effect No. 2 The data of No. 3 may be called even when the operation unit B (the transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because, in some cases, the effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used as effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 or the effect No. 2 The effect according to the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" in the data of No. 3 is started, and the operating means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, the production No. The data of No. 2 includes data (E1) for causing the operation means A to vibrate before the operation of the operation means A, and the other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operation of the operation means A, but the data of the operation means B By the operation of the production No. When the data of No. 2 is read out, the data of “vibe” is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, the production No. 2 data and production No. 2 The data of "Liquid Crystal" is at least different from the data of "Liquid Crystal" such as "A1" and "A2" when the data of "Liquid Crystal" of "A1" is used after the operating means B is operated. Is the production No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The effect data on the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, The effect according to the effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operating means B vibrates according to the data of "vibe". However, the effect data relating to the operation means B may or may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing execution timings for an effect involving the operating means A and an effect involving the operating means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from left to right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, “operation unit B-related effects”, which are started in accordance with the operation of the operation unit B (the transparent unit 191), and the operation unit B is operated in order from the top. When this is done, the operation unit B-related effect is started, the “operation unit B operation effective state”, the “operation unit B operation” indicating that the operation unit B has been operated, and the operation unit A (chance button 136). "Operation unit A-related effect" started according to the operation, "Operation unit A operation effective state" in which operation unit A-related effect is started when operation unit A is operated, and operation unit A is operated "Operating means A operation" is shown. The “operation unit B-related effect” includes an effect in which the operation unit B itself vibrates, an effect display, a sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. Further, the “operation unit A-related effect” includes an effect in which the operation unit A itself vibrates, an effect display, a sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the “operation unit A-related effect” may indicate only that the operation unit A itself vibrates. During the “operation unit B operation valid state”, there may be a case where a message prompting to operate the operation unit B is performed, and in some cases, the notification is not performed. There is a case where notification for prompting operation of the means A (operation promotion notification) is performed, and a case where notification is not performed. If such notification is performed, the player can know that the operation is effective, but if not performed, each operation means is a so-called back button.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 12A, the operation unit B is not operated during the operation unit B operation enabled state, but the operation unit B-related effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation unit B operation enabled state. As described above, the “operation unit B-related effect” may be started even if the operation unit B is not operated. The “operation unit B-related effect” may be an effect that is always started even when the operation unit B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation unit B-related effect” may be changed depending on whether or not the operation unit B is operated. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without passing through the "operation means A operation effective state" and without operating the operation means A. . As described above, the “operation unit A-related effect” may be started even if the operation unit A is not operated. The “operation unit A-related effect” may also be an effect that always starts even if the operation unit A is not operated. The content of the “operation unit A-related effect” may be changed depending on whether or not the operation unit A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution time of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start at the same time and end at the same time.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 12B, during the operation unit B operation valid state, the operation unit B is operated, and when the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation valid state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B-related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without passing through the "operation means A operation effective state" and without operating the operation means A. Have been. Also in this example, the execution period of the effect related to the operation means B is the same as the execution period of the effect related to the operation means A. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start at the same time and end at the same time.

  Also in the example illustrated in FIG. 12C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation valid state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B-related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without passing through the "operation means A operation effective state" and without operating the operation means A. Have been. In the example illustrated in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation unit B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation unit A-related effect. For example, the vibration of the operation unit B (the transmitting unit 191) The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of operation means A ends first, and the vibration of operation means B ends after the vibration of operation means A ends.

  Note that the start timings may be the same, and the execution period of the effect related to the operation means A may be longer than the execution period of the effect related to the operation means B. Alternatively, the start times are different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and thereafter, the operation means B-related effect ends. You may. Conversely, even if the operation means A-related effect starts first, then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. The end time may be the same, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. Alternatively, on the contrary, the operation unit A-related effect may start first, and then the operation unit B-related effect may start, and the operation unit A-related effect and the operation unit B-related effect may end together. .

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the effect related to the operation unit B is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the effect related to the operation unit B is enabled. In a mode in which the operation is performed until the first time elapses from the start of the state, it may be configured such that the earlier the operating means B is operated, the longer the execution time of the effect related to the operating means B. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing relating to the effect involving the operation means. Arrows in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C indicate a vibration period of the operation unit A.

  The example illustrated in FIG. 13A is an example in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a swing display of three decorative symbols as a variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation display. Eventually, the swing fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is finally displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13A, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the three decorative symbols is displayed because the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined. Is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), before notification of a result relating to the profit of the player, such as a finalized display, the effect such as vibration of the operating means A is ended, so that the player can concentrate on reporting the result relating to the profit. I have to.

  The example illustrated in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game. When the operation unit B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation unit B (the transmission unit 191) is being performed, the operation unit A ( At the same time as the vibration of the chance button 136) is started, a judge effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The judge in the judge effect here is a judge that is linked to whether or not to shift to the probable change state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 informs the player that he or she will aim for a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the notification. Eventually, the next round starts, and it is notified again that the player is aiming for a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening).

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so that the specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period of the notification is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the round in which the specific winning opening is to be aimed is limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the state changes to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, the round in which the specific winning opening is to be aimed is an important round leading to the player's profit, and before the start of the round leading to the player's profit, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended, and the player You can concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (c) is an example of a pseudo continuous production during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol ends, and the vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol ends. Then, the next pseudo-variation display is started, the number of pseudo-runs becomes the n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in the n-th pseudo-variation display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation unit B is shortened. The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time as the end of the shortened pseudo symbol design stop display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including the above description, the operation means A can be vibrated at least during a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is performed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating in at least a part of a period during which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being performed. For example, the vibration may end at the same time as the completion of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even after the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation unit A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation unit B is operated or the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit A. The final judge effect is a judge that determines whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display during the display of the decorative pattern, or a judge that indicates the end of the reach effect (reach effect at the final stage, such as strong SP reach). There. In this example above,
The period during which the operation unit A is vibrating is a period in which the operation of the operation unit A is treated as valid, and when the operation unit A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation unit A is delayed, the period L1 between the start timing of the vibration of the operation unit A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation unit A vibrates becomes longer. Even if the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a fixed period.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means B, and the vibration of the operating means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, a period during which the operation means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. In addition, while the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation of the operation unit B. As in the case of the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judge effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing stepwise an example relating to an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136), and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The description of the items described in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 9 will be omitted. In each of FIGS. 14A and 14B, besides the chance button 136 as the operation means A, a transparent portion 191 as the operation means B is also shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 as the operation means A shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmitting portion 191 as the operation means B is also in the initial position at any stage.

  In FIG. 14A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (decision display) a stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative design display device 208 has “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped display. Four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14A are turned on, and four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special figure 1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 14 (b), the special-figure design variable display is started on the first special-figure display device 212, and the decorative design display device 208 is also starting to display the fancy design. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Also, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14B are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed, and the fluctuating icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14C, a reach effect has been started. Up to now, the decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with a numeral of 3. .

  Here, as in FIG. 9, an example is shown in which a button effect is started when a reach effect is started. The button effect here is a kind of judge effect, and is a notice effect for judging whether or not to develop into super reach. Note that the button effect may be an effect of judging the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14D, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red to urge the button to be pressed. Also, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and A set of three characters, a character display of "PUSH" and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid, is displayed. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. This initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of the second notification. Note that the initial position display 136X may be used without including all of the three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "PUSH". For example, an initial position display 136X that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

  FIG. 14E shows the operation validity period, and the chance button 136 as the operating means A is operated at the timing shown in FIG. When operated, the chance button 136 switches from being lit in red to being lit in white, or being turned off.

  When the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation validity period, the family crest role object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 14F). The crest role object 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, covers a part of the variable icon display area 208e, and also covers a part of the variable icon c. The fall of the family crest role object 247 is a sign of the judgment result of developing into super reach, and as shown in FIG. 14 (g), the super design effect is started on the decorative design display device 208, and the background image changes. . Since the chance button 136 is turned off at the initial position after being operated within the operation validity period, it does not vibrate.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 14H, the family crest role object 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the sliding door. In the super-reach production, the first super-reach production with a relatively low probability of a big hit (weak SP reach production) and the second with a relatively high probability of a big success in the current symbol variation display (A strong SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the sliding door corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Judge production is also performed in this weak SP reach production. The judge production here is a production to judge whether it will be a big hit or not, and it is equivalent to the final judge production, and if the princess character appears from the inside of the sliding door, the pattern variation display currently being performed It is a sign of the judge result that it is determined that a big hit will be made. In FIG. 14 (i), an effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed. Although it is not clear in the diagram of FIG. 14 (j), in FIG. 14 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1 like a cloud, and in FIG. e1 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and a character display of "Rescue the princess" is displayed on the upper right. The character display "Rescue the princess" may be displayed from the timing of FIG. The shade behind something described in the description of FIG. 11 (j) is the shade of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 14 (i) and (j) corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is started from FIG. 14 (k) in which the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although started, it can be seen from FIG. 14 (i) that the final judge effect has been started.

  FIG. 14 (l) shows the operation validity period. At the timing shown in FIG. 14 (l), the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated again, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (m) subsequent to FIG. 14 (l), no one is in the open fusuma, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. . During the execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is located at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  Even if the chance button 136 as the operation means A is not operated within the operation validity period, the judgment result of the last judge may be displayed, and the chance button 136 is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. The final judgment result may be displayed even when an operation means different from the above (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following examples). This may be the same as the effect of judging whether or not to develop to the previous super reach, or may be limited to the effect of judging whether or not to develop to super reach, It may be limited to the final judge production that is a direct judge for the jackpot.

  When the final judge effect ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts swinging variable display of the three decorative symbols as a variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” is displayed in a swinging manner.

  Eventually, when the design change display of the special figure is completed on the first special figure display device 212 and the display is finalized, the decorative design is also finally displayed. On the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. "-Decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is definitely displayed.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where a production involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a weak SP reach production and a big hit is made, and FIG. 17 is an example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of step by step.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 16D, the button effect has been started in the reach state. The button production here is also a production to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red, and an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation validity period, in this example, as shown in FIG. On the front side, a judge result that the crest object 247 falls and develops into a super reach is reported.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 16 (h), the crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the sliding door, and the weak SP reach effect is started. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 16 (i), an effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed, and in FIG. 16 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1. . After the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red, and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 performs the advance operation (projection operation) while vibrating. Note that the vibration may be started after the protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position exactly intermediate between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the intermediate position. At the timing of FIG. 16 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and a chance button 138 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in a state where it has advanced to the middle position is displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simulated button image 136a1, arrow display 136b, and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. This intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of the second notification. The intermediate position display 136Y does not have to include all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, an intermediate position display 136Y that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate even after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid becomes zero or the chance button 136 is pressed. The advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time during the weak SP reach effect, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. And at the same time, or after that. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of examples of the entry start timing of the chance button 136 listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, The type may be applied. In addition, the timing of the advance operation completion (stop) of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as the weak SP reach effect is being produced, and may be simultaneously with the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification, or after that. Is also good. In addition, the start of vibration of the chance button 136 does not need to coincide with the start of advance of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advance. If it is later, for example, the vibration may be started simultaneously with the completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136 or after that. Further, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if pushed a little, or may continue the vibration until the chance button 136 is pushed to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 16 (i) and (j) also corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect starts from FIG. 16 (k) in which the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen from FIG. 16 (i) that the final judge effect has been started, from the point in time when the chance button 136 has begun to advance, it can be seen that the final judge effect has been started, and the chance button 136 can be seen. It can be seen that the final judge effect has started from the point at which has reached the intermediate position.

  FIG. 16 (l) is within the operation validity period. At the timing of FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136 that has advanced (projected) to the intermediate position, which is the operating means A, is pushed down to the initial position and the final judge is operated. The judge result of the production is displayed. In FIG. 17 (m) following FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136 is in the initial position, does not vibrate, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a princess character GC behind the sliding door. In this case, the judge's result will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of the second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect that is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A. The announcement effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time as the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, or the second condition (for example, (The first time elapsed after the start of the weak SP reach effect) may be started.

  The effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display, or lighting or blinking of an LED. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plural) effects of a plurality of types of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured as such, or may be configured so that the chance button 136 always vibrates.

  In this example, the chance button 136 is advanced, but the mode may be such that the chance button 136 stays at the initial position and vibrates, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  When the final judge effect is completed, the decoration symbol display device 208 swings and displays “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3”, as shown in FIG. As shown in ()), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and a big hit is achieved. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 15 from the fluctuation display to the confirmation display, the background screen has no pattern, but in the case of a big hit, the background screen is where the lords gather. In the case of a big hit, a promotion effect of a type of a big hit (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without a probability change to a big hit with a positive change) may be performed during the swing fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17.

  The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 18 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 16 and 17. Hereinafter, differences from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 16 and 17 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 18 is an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 16D to 16G). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (i), an effect display e1 is displayed, and in FIG. 18 (j), the effect display e1 shows a faint shadow. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is illuminated in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. After the vehicle has advanced to the maximum advance position, it may stop after returning to the initial position by the first amount. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (k), a button image 136a2 imitating the chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in a state where the button has advanced to the maximum advance position, and an arrow are displayed. 136b and the remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification maximum advance position display 136Z. This maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of the second notification. Note that the maximum advance position display 136Z does not have to include all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the maximum advance position display 136Z that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

  In the maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification, since the button image 136a2 is large, a part of the character display “Rescue the princess” is hidden. Since the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the case where only the intermediate position has been advanced or the case where the chance button 136 does not advance at all and remains at the initial position. .

  FIG. 18 (l) is within the operation validity period. At the timing of FIG. 18 (l), the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) to the maximum advance position, which is the operating means A, is pushed down to the initial position and the final operation is performed. The judge's judge result is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (m), a princess character GC is displayed at the back of the sliding door, and the judgment result here is determined to be a big hit. In FIG. 18 (m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 vibrating at the maximum advance position vibrates even during the pushing operation and after returning to the initial position, and continues to vibrate. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by the pushing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may temporarily suspend the vibration if pressed slightly, and may resume the vibration after returning to the initial position, or may suspend the vibration simultaneously with returning to the initial position. May be resumed. Further, regardless of whether the chance button 136 has advanced (projected) or not, and regardless of the advance amount of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period during which the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears (all Period, or only a partial period such as the beginning), the chance button 136 vibrates. In the example shown in FIG. 18 described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates in the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  In this example as well, the chance button 136 is advanced, but the mode may be such that the chance button 136 stays at the initial position and vibrates, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

  Further, the display mode of the princess character GC in the notice effect may be changed according to the type of the big hit and the degree of expectation of the big hit with the probability change. For example, when the degree of expectation of the jackpot with probability change is high, the display mode (second display mode) in which the fan is spread and dancing is possible.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a loss occurs while a performance involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after the strong SP reach performance, and FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 19 in a stepwise manner.

  The following description focuses on differences from the examples described so far, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 19D, the button effect has been started in the reach state. The button production here is also a production to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red, and an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation validity period, in this example also, as shown in FIG. On the front side, a judge result that the crest object 247 falls and develops into a super reach is reported.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the crest role object 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the hero's lord and the enemy. The background image of the duel scene corresponds to the background image of the strong SP reach effect. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production to determine whether or not a big hit will be performed, and if the hero's lord wins, the judge result that it is determined that the big change will be a big hit with the current symbol change display become. As shown in FIG. 19 (i), a flash-like effect display e2 overlaps the display where the lord and the enemy are cut off. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains at the initial position. In FIG. 19 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 does not vibrate. The effect display e2 in FIGS. 19 (i) and (j) also corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is started from FIG. 19 (k) in which the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although started, it can be seen from FIG. 19 (i) that the final judge effect has been started.

  FIG. 19 (l) is within the operation validity period. At the timing of FIG. 19 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. The scene where the enemy has won is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (m), and the judgment result here is highly likely to be lost. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 20 (m) is off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  When the final judge effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 20 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” are displayed in a swinging and fluctuating manner on a plain background screen, as shown in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 20 (o), the combination of the loss "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and the loss occurs.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which an effect involving the operation means B (transmissive unit 191) is executed after a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is made, and FIG. 22 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example step by step.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 19 and 20 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  After the judge effect (FIGS. 21 (d) to (g)) of whether or not to develop into super reach, in FIG. 21 (h), a strong SP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 includes: The background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 21 (i), a flash-like effect display e2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 21, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the transmission section 191 as the operation means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down to the player side. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transmission unit rotation image 191a imitating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission unit 191 is rotated forward, and a transmission unit An arrow display 191b suggesting that the 191 is to be pushed in, a character display of “push-in”, and a remaining period meter display 191c indicating the remaining period for receiving the operation of the transmission unit 191 are displayed as one set. . Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display of “push-in” are collectively referred to as a transmission part display 191X of operation promotion notification. This transmission part display 191X is equivalent to an example of a first notification. Note that the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “press” may not be entirely included, but may be the transmission portion display 191X. For example, the transmission unit display 191X that does not include the remaining period meter display 191c may be used. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the transmission unit display 191X, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward after the transmission unit display 191X is displayed. Even if the transmissive portion display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. In addition, the transmitting portion 191 that has turned forward does not vibrate, but may vibrate. The effect display e2 in FIG. 21 (i) and FIG. 21 (j) also corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is started from FIG. 21 (k) in which the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge effect has started from the time when the effect display e2 starts to be started, and that the final judge effect has started from the time when the transmission unit 191 has rotated forward. .

  FIG. 21 (l) shows the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 21 (l), the transmitting unit 191 as the operating means B is pushed down to the initial position. In this example, when the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 22 (m) following FIG. 21 (l), the family crest role object 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative design display device 208. As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of united roles 248 advances from the left and right toward the crest unit 247, and as shown in FIG. 22 (n), the pair of united units 248 sandwiches the crest unit 247 from each of the left and right sides. Combine with family crest. The fact that the transmitting portion 191 that is the operating means B has turned forward itself may be an effect that suggests a big hit, or an effect that suggests that the fall of the family crest role object 247 results in a big hit. Or an effect that suggests that the combination of the pair of combination objects 248 with the family crest combination object 247 will be a big hit. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of examples of effects that suggest a big hit listed here may be applied, or a plurality of examples may be applied, All types may be applied. After that, first, the pair of united objects 248 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (o), then the family crest object 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed in a state where there is no obstacle, and a scene where the lord has won is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In this scene in which the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed, the variation display of the decorative pattern reduced and displayed in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. However, it may be a combination of jackpots of decorative symbols (for example, “333”), that is, the combination of jackpots of decorative symbols is displayed in a small size together with the display of the final judge result. Ri, then, may have a structure in which a combination of the jackpot is displayed large decorative pattern.

  The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 22 (q) is off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  When the final judge effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 22 (r), “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 3” fluctuates on the background screen where the lords are gathering, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and a big hit is achieved.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 described above, the crest actor 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIGS. 21 (f) to (g)). Even in the final judge effect, the crest role 247 operates (FIGS. 22 (m) to (o)), but before the start of the final judge effect, the operation of the crest role 247 is not performed. The operation may be performed only in the judge effect.

  In this example, there is a scene where the transmissive part 191 is operated (FIGS. 21 (j) to (l)). However, instead of the transmissive part 191, other chances such as a second chance button 137 described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A starts vibrating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 23 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 23 is an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). After the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 23 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position as shown in FIG. 23 (l). Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 starts arbitrarily vibrating (see FIG. 23 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts vibrating at the same time as the start of the final judge effect, and ends the oscillation before the result of the judge of the final judge effect is displayed (see FIG. 23 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period of FIG. 23 (m) to FIG. 23 (p) which is a part of the execution period of the final judge effect, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 23 (q), there is a case where vibration does not occur and attention can be paid to the judgment result. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect is completed. In this case, the vibration of the chance button 136 is always the entire execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judge effect is completed. In a state where the vibration continues after the final judge effect is completed, the initial position of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display 136X may or may not be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is vibrating as part of the final judge effect.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 23 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 23 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and a preview effect that is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the vibrating chance button 136 is not operated, but if the vibrating chance button 136 is operated during execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued, and In response to the operation, first, the crest role object 247 and the union role object 248 return to the initial position, and then, the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the faster the judgment result can be seen. When the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the same judge effect as shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) is not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the chance button 136 (second operation means) is vibrating during the execution of the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. (M) and the effect (second effect) shown in FIG. 18 (m) are not started. Also, the effects (second effects) shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) are configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effects (first effects) described with reference to FIG. It is a production.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing, at a stage, an example in which after operating the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A is also operated. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 24 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG. 23, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 24 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at relatively early timing (FIG. 24 (l)). That is, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission promotion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  In this example, after the transmission unit 191 has been pressed to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation unit A is pressed. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts vibrating in response to an operation of the transmission unit 191 and directly starts vibrating in response to a pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when a predetermined maximum vibration time elapses after starting to vibrate, the vibration ends even if the button is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate (see FIG. 24 (r <b> 1)) even if the final judge effect ends and the swing fluctuation display is started, but the swing fluctuation display is started. After a while, the vibration reaches the maximum time, and the vibration ends even if it is pressed (see FIG. 24 (r2)). The maximum vibration time corresponds to six frames in FIGS. 24 (m) to (r1). The swing fluctuation display continues for a while thereafter (FIGS. 24 (r3) to (r4)), and the first time (3 in FIGS. 24 (r2) to (r4)) after the chance button 136 stops vibrating. After the continuation of the time corresponding to the frame), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed as shown in FIG. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the swing fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIGS. 24 (r1) to 24 (r4).

  In the example in FIG. 24, it can be seen that the final judge effect has been started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest role object 247 falls. When the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 24 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating, in stages, an example in a case where the timing of operating the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 24. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 25 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG. 24, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 25 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In the example shown in FIG. 25, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at a timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission promotion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about ／. That is, the transmission unit 191 is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 24 (see FIG. 25 (12)). As a result, as compared to the example shown in FIG. 24, the start of the final judge effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is shifted backward, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration maximum time elapses is also one. It shifts behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the longest vibration corresponds to the six frames in FIGS. 25 (m) to (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing in FIG. 25 (r1). The fluctuation display is continued for a second time (a time corresponding to two frames from FIG. 25 (r2) to FIG. 25 (r3)) after the chance button 136 stops vibrating, and then shown in FIG. 25 (s). As shown, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and a big hit is achieved. As described above, the swing fluctuation display has a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 24, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 25, the fluctuation display is shown in FIGS. 25 (r1) to (r3). ) Is performed over a period corresponding to three frames, and the execution period of the swing fluctuation display is shortened by the delay of the operation timing of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B vibrates when the housing vibrates. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 26 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on differences from the example shown in FIG. 24, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 26 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (k), the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates at a second position (forward tilt position) rotated forward from an initial position (first position). I have. Even if the transmission part 191 does not vibrate, the transmission part 191 vibrates due to the vibration of the housing to which the transmission part 191 is directly or indirectly attached. The housing here is the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmission unit 190. In this example, the operation of the transmission unit 191 can be prompted by the vibration of the transmission unit 191 in addition to the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 26 (k), and in FIG. The part 191 is pushed down to the initial position. When the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing ends. This time, when the chance button 136 as the operating means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

  Note that the vibration of the housing, and thus the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may start when the transmission unit 191 reaches the forward inclined position from the initial position, or the transmission unit 191 starts rotating forward from the initial position. The transmission may be started from the time when the transmission unit 191 is not operated even after the transmission of the first time after the transmission unit 191 reaches the forward inclined position. In addition, the vibration of the housing, and thus the vibration of the transmission section 191 ends when the transmission section 191 is pushed to the initial position, or may end when the transmission section 191 is pushed even slightly from the forward inclined position, or may end at the initial position. Even if it is pushed, the vibration may be continued for the first vibration period after starting the vibration or returning to the initial position, and there may be a period of vibrating together with the chance button 136.

  Further, like the transmission unit 191 of this example, the chance button 136 as the operation means A can be mounted on the housing (for example, directly or indirectly) even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate. Alternatively, the door 108 with the ball storage dish may vibrate by vibrating.

  Further, the transmission section 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-back direction or the horizontal direction.

  FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), FIGS. 25 (m) to (q), and FIGS. 26 (m) to (q) 17) is different from the judge effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) described above. A different effect mode means that the background screen is different, the characters appearing are different, or the colors of the displayed characters are different.

  23 to 26, the transmission unit 191 is operated. However, instead of the transmission unit 191, another operation unit such as a second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be an example.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. FIG. 27 shows another example on each of the left side and the right side.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21G). The state of FIG. 27A is the same as the state of FIG. 19K. The initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position.

  FIG. 27A shows the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 27A, the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 19, the judgment result of the final judge effect is not immediately displayed, and the crest role object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. And the background image changes. Further, in this example, as the crest role object 247 falls, the transmitting portion 191 that is the operating means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position (see FIG. 27C). Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (D), the crest role object 247 is sandwiched between the pair of union role objects 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of union role objects 248 and the crest role object 247 are united and the transparent portion is formed. 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27E, the transmission unit 191 rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position with the pair of combined objects 248 returned to the initial position and the crest object 247 remaining. Further, as shown in FIG. 27F, the crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmission unit 191 returns to the initial position from the forward inclined position.

  As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 27, at the same time when the final judge effect is started, the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B repeatedly rotates between the initial position and the forward inclined position. I do. This strong vibration can be seen as being performed as part of the final judge production, or it can be seen as a different production from the final judge production.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). The state shown in FIG. 27A is the same as the state shown in FIG. 24K. The transparent part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transparent part 191 as the operating means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. are doing. Note that the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 27 (i) shows the operation valid period of the transmission unit 191. However, in FIG. 27 (i), not the transmission unit 191 but the chance button 136 which is turned off at the initial position is operated.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, as in the example on the left side of FIG. 27 where the transmission unit 191 is operated, the final judge effect is executed, and the transmission unit 191 is moved to the initial position, the forward inclined position, and the like. A strong vibration that repeats the rotation between is performed. That is, the transmission unit 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position in FIG. 27 (e), rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position in FIG. 27 (e), and starts from the forward inclined position in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in FIG. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 27 (i), the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which a scene in which an enemy has won after a strong SP reach production is displayed once, but a big hit is made by the resurrection production, and FIG. 29 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example step by step.

  The example shown in FIG. 28 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, and after performing judge effects (FIGS. 28 (d) to (g)) as to whether or not to develop into a super reach, FIG. , A strong SP reach effect is started, and in FIG. 7I, an effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed.

  Also in FIG. 28 (j), in a state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and FIG. At the timing of, the effect display e2 disappears, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 is still positioned at the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 28 (l), the transmitting unit 191 is pressed. In FIG. 29 (α) following FIG. 28 (l), a scene in which the enemy role similar to that in FIG. 20 (m) has been won, which is considered to be the judge result of the final judge effect, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in 29 (β), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” is once started.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (γ), an indication is displayed when the resurrection effect starts, and the resurrection effect is executed from FIG. 29 (m) to FIG. 29 (p). The resurrection effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIG. 22 (m) to FIG. 22 (p). In front of the decorative pattern display device 208, a crest role object 247 and a pair of union role objects 248 are provided. Appears.

  When the resurrection effect ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (r), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is immediately started, and as shown in FIG. In the illustrated decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is definitely displayed.

  In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 29 (α), which is considered to be the judge result of the final judge effect, is a false display. In addition, neither the chance button 136 as the operation means A nor the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B vibrates, but whether true or false, the display of the duel result (display of the judge result of the final judge effect) is not displayed. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit at the displayed timing or at a timing thereafter, if the chance button 136 and / or the transmission part 191 vibrate, a big hit will be given to an advanced player. Is confirmed, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, the judgment result (true result) of the final judge effect may be notified by using the vibration of the chance button 136 and / or the vibration of the transmission unit 191.

  Also in this example, there was a scene (FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l)) in which the transmissive portion 191 was operated. However, instead of the transmissive portion 191, another chance button 137 described later or the like is used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of the third effect in a stepwise manner. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 30 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 14 and the like.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30C, a reach effect has been started, and in this example as well, when the reach effect is started, an effect involving an operation which is a type of button effect is started. The production involving this operation is also a kind of judge production, and it is a notice production that judges whether or not to develop into super reach. In FIG. 30 (d), as an effect involving the operation, the transmitting unit 191 as the operating means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the transmitting unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. The transmissive portion display 191X 'shown in FIG. 4D is slightly different from the transmissive portion display 191X described above, but has the same function. The chance button 136, which is the operation means A, does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the transmission unit 191 is pushed in during the operation valid period of the transmission unit 191. In FIG. 30 (f), a family crest role object 247 is provided in front of the decorative design display device 208. Falling. Also, while the background image is a plain background image in FIG. 14 (f) and the like, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (f) displays an effect display e3 with a shadow. Note that part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the crest role object 247. Again, the fall of the family crest object 247 is a sign of a judge's result of developing into super reach, and then developing into super reach. The effect of FIG. 30 (f) described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect that is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191.

  Also in this example, there was a scene where the transmission unit 191 was operated (FIGS. 30D to 30E). However, instead of the transmission unit 191, other chance buttons 137 and the like described later are used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the announcement effect started according to the operation of the transmission unit 191. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 31 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG.

  The example shown in FIG. 31 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21F). The judge effect of whether or not to develop into super reach ends in FIG. 31 (g), and the super reach effect starts from FIG. 31 (h '). This super reach production is different from the strong SP reach production described above and the weak SP reach production, and is the production selected by the production lottery. However, the remaining portion meter display 191c of the transmission portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification remains at least 1/2 of the transmission portion 191 rotated to the forward inclined position shown in FIGS. 21 (j) to (k). 23, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 is executed, and when the operation is performed at a timing of less than 1/2, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is executed. Is also good. That is, even if it is configured that one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is started in accordance with the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B. Good.

  31 (h ') displays a background image in which the hero's palace is chasing a bad merchant, and in FIG. 31 (i'), a flash-like effect display e2 is displayed. You. Even if the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (j ′), the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B has been rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and is displayed on the effect display e2 at the timing of FIG. 31 (k ′). Instead, a transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. FIG. 31 (l ') shows the operation within the operation validity period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position.

  A final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, and in FIG. 31 (m ′), the streets of the castle town are different from the background image shown in FIG. 22 (m), and the crest role object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative design display device 208 as in FIG. Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (n ′), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, the crest role object 247 is sandwiched by the pair of union objects 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and The crest role object 247 is united. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (o ′), the pair of combined roles 248 returns to the initial position, and the crest role 247 remains in front of the background image of the castle town. As shown in (p ′), the crest role object 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative design display device 208 in which the background image of the castle town is displayed, and there is no obstruction to the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. In this state, the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (q ') displays a scene in which the lord has caught a bad merchant, and the judge result here is determined to be a big hit. During the execution period of the final judge effect of FIGS. 31 (m ′) to (q ′), which corresponds to an example of the third effect, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position. . FIGS. 31 (m ′) to (q ′) show the final judge effect in the form of FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), and FIG. 25 (m). 26 (m) and 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), the final judge effects are not executed at the same time. Also, unlike the mode of the judge effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m), the judge effect is not executed at the same time.

  Further, in FIGS. 31 (m ′) to (q ′), the chance button 136 which is turned off at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is not operated. This is not a so-called back button. Note that an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

  Also in this example, there was a scene (FIG. 31 (j ′) to FIG. 31 (l ′)) in which the transmission unit 191 was operated. However, instead of the transmission unit 191, a second chance button 137 described later or the like was used. Other operation means may be operated.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described above. FIG. 32 shows another example on each of the left side and the right side.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 32 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 21D to 21J). In this example, an LED lamp 139 is provided near the chance button 136. The LED lamp 139 is a different light emitting means from the chance button lamp 138.

  In FIG. 32A, similarly to FIG. 24K, etc., the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification, and the transparent portion 191 as the operating means B rotates to the forward inclined position. Moving. Further, in FIG. 32A, the chance button 136 as the operation means A does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judge effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 32A, the final judge effect is started in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, the crest role 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image changes. Until immediately before the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191 is performed, the chance button 136 that is the operation unit A remains off at the initial position without vibrating, but after the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191 is performed, The chance button 136 starts vibrating when operated. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution of the final judge effect. The vibration of the chance button 136 may be ended at the same time as the end of the final judge effect, or may be ended before the end of the final judge effect. Even if the chance button 136 starts to vibrate, the chance button lamp 138 is still off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 also turns on or blinks. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (c), the final judge effect has been completed, and the swing symbol display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judge effect ends, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, also here, the LED lamp 139 is lit or blinking. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In this example, there is also a scene in which the transmission unit 191 is operated (FIG. 32A). However, instead of the transmission unit 191, other operation means such as a second chance button 137 described later are operated. It may be.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 32 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 32A, instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 illuminated in red and imitating the vibrating chance button 136 is included. The initial position display 136X 'is displayed. The real chance button 136 also lights up in red and vibrates. In addition, even if the button image 136a imitating the non-vibrating chance button 136 is displayed, the real chance button 136 may be vibrating.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. 32. In FIG. 33, four examples are shown on the left side, and one example is also shown on the right side. The examples shown in the upper two on the left side (the example shown in FIG. 33 (a) and the example shown in FIG. 33 (A)) are also transmitted via certain effects (the effects shown in FIGS. 21 (d) to (g)). It is a production that will not be executed unless it is from the beginning.

  First, in FIG. 33A, which is the first example, the transmissive portion 191 that is the operation means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene, and the lower left corner. , A transmission unit rotation image 191a imitating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission unit 191 is rotated forward is displayed. In addition, a character display indicating that a glass button indicating the transmission unit 191 is on standby is also displayed. The transmission part rotation image 191a and the display of characters in a standby state thereafter serve as a warning display that the transmission part 191 which is a glass button is rotated to the forward inclined position. When the notice is displayed, the transmission portion 191 which is a glass button always rotates to the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 33A, which is the second example, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 33A, and the remaining period is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 by digital display. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a warning display that the transmitting unit 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position. When the remaining period by the remaining period display becomes 0.00 seconds, the transmitting unit 191 which is a glass button is moved to the forward inclined position. Always rotate until.

  In FIG. 33A, which is the third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to a first display unit, and a second display unit 209 different from the first display unit is also provided. The second display unit 209 is a liquid crystal display device having a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208 as the first display unit and movable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transmission unit 191 as the operation means B is operated in a button effect such as a final judge effect, a movable role such as a family crest role 247 and a pair of union role 248 operates, and the second display unit 209 is moved to an initial position. , The second display means 209 at least partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second display unit 209 may entirely overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may only partially overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. During the operation of the second display unit 209 or after the operation is completed, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A may vibrate, or the transmission unit 191 may vibrate. Alternatively, the second display unit 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of a third operation unit. In this case, the second display unit 209 may be a part of the decorative design display device 208. Vibration may be performed in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 33A, which is the fourth example, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33A can perform a stock display of the button images B, and here, six button images B are displayed. One button image B indicates that one button effect is executed, and in the example illustrated in FIG. 33A, the final judge effect is performed in the button effect corresponding to the third button image B, The button effect corresponding to the remaining three button images B is executed during the big hit game. The three button effects during the big hit game may be, for example, three promotion effects of the number of big hit rounds. In addition, as the button effect corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be prompted for each of the six cut-in effects.

  Note that the second display unit 209 displays a hold icon instead of the button image B, changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and changes the display mode of the button image B from the display mode of the button image B by operating the button. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also at this time, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the transmission unit 191) that receives the button operation may be vibrated.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 33, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (a) has a button image 136a4 imitating the turned off chance button 136 and an arrow display 136b as a prompting display for prompting the long press operation of the chance button 136. In addition, a character display of “Store the meter by long pressing” and a remaining period meter display 136 c indicating a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is validated are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "storing the meter by long pressing" are collectively referred to as a long-press display 136L of the operation promotion notification. The three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display "storing the meter by long pressing" may not be included, but may be a long pressing display 136L. For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a level display L1 is also displayed. The level display L1 is a display for increasing the level according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG.

  After that, the chance button 136 is operated, and the level display L1 reaches the full level before the remaining period of the operation validity period is exhausted, and the button effect is started in response to the level display L1 reaching the full level, Here, the transparent portion 191 (not shown), which is the operating means B, rotates to the forward inclined position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification as shown in FIG. Is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long press operation. However, here, even if the operation is a long press operation (single press), which is a long press operation that cannot be said to be a long press operation, it is a long press operation. Even a so-called continuous operation, in which handling or pressing for a short period is repeated quickly, is handled as a long pressing operation. Note that, even when a continuous hitting operation is required, a long pressing operation or a single pressing operation may be treated as a continuous hitting operation (the same applies to the following examples). Then, although illustration is omitted, when the transmitting unit 191 is pushed in during the operation valid period, a judge effect is started.

  Subsequently, an effect involving a so-called pseudo-run will be described. The effect involving the pseudo-run is also executed when “execute” is won by the execution possibility lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure. However, in the simulated continuous effect, the symbol variable display of the special figure for one time (ie, one start winning prize) is performed. Temporarily suspends the change display of the decorative symbol in a part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the updating of the decorative symbol is stopped, but is not confirmed, and the display is swung. After that, the re-variation display for changing and displaying all the decorative symbols again is executed one or more times. For example, in the state in which the decoration symbol is being updated (variable display) in the middle symbol display region 208b, the variation symbol display is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, and then re-displayed. The variation display may be started, or the variation display of the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in all the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then the re-variation display may be started. In addition, when the temporary stop is performed, a design or a pattern other than the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo continuous production, how many times the re-variation display is executed for one symbol change display of the special figure (ie, one start winning) is determined by lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. Is done. The pseudo continuous effect may be a jackpot notice effect (so-called normal notice effect) of the change, which gives a notice of a big hit in the symbol change display of the special figure currently being performed. It may be a reach announcement effect for giving an advance notice of developing into a super reach by the symbol variation display of the figure. Alternatively, it may be a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice of a jackpot in the special figure symbol change display started after the currently performed special figure symbol change display. In any of the announcement effects, the more the number of times of the re-variation display increases, the higher the expectation (the reliability of the announcement) increases, and the effect becomes hotter. In addition, when the first number of times (for example, four times) of the re-variation display is performed, the jackpot determination or the super reach determination may be performed. In addition, in the case of a pre-reading notice effect, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of times of re-change display increases as the symbol change table of the special figure to be noticed approaches. For example, in the case where the symbol variation table of the special figure three times later is targeted for the notice, one re-variation display is performed in the pseudo consecutive effect in the symbol variation table of the first special figure, and the second special figure is displayed. In the pseudo continuous production in the symbol fluctuation table of the above, two re-variation displays are performed, and in the pseudo continuous production in the third special pattern fluctuation table, three re-variation displays are performed, and the special figure to be notified is displayed. In the pseudo continuous production in the symbol variation table, four re-variation displays are performed.

  In the pseudo continuous production, the first pseudo continuous notification is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. Here, the first pseudo continuous notification is to notify that the pseudo continuous production is started or that the pseudo continuous production is continued. For example, one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo consecutive symbols”) of the combination of the symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first pseudo consecutive notification. I do. That is, the pseudo continuous pattern is a decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 7") shown in FIG. 5B, a combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6", or the like). (A so-called chance eye) or another pattern or picture. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol may be a symbol that has been finally stopped (third stop) in a temporary stop, may be a middle symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of examples of the pseudo-continuous pattern listed here may be applied, only a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may. Further, the first pseudo consecutive notification may be character display, lamp lighting, or sound output, which is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. Any one of multiple examples of the first pseudo-broadcast listed here may be applied, multiple examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect involving a pseudo-run in a stepwise manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 34, as shown in FIG. 34B, a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continuously displays the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission section 191 as the operation means B rotates to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 34C shows the operation valid period, in which the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position. Then, in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191, the transmission unit display 191X disappears as shown in FIG. 34D, and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b this time, The chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the chance button 136 starts vibrating at the initial position. In FIG. 34 (d), the pseudo consecutive effect is started, and a part of the pseudo consecutive symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 34D is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous symbol N whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 34D. As a result, a part of the pseudo consecutive symbol N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the operation valid period. When the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears, the pseudo continuous symbol N remains, and the temporary stop is performed. There is a case where it is performed and a case where it disappears to the pseudo consecutive symbol N together with the initial position display 136X and the temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects in FIGS. 34 (d) to (f) are judge effects on whether or not the temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 34F, the pseudo temporary symbol N remains, and the first temporary stop is performed. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 34 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are displayed during the change, and the change icon c is still displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (g), the pseudo consecutive symbol N has disappeared, and the update (re-variable display) of the decorative symbol has started in all three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Note that the design change display of the special figure is still continued, and both the first special figure display device 212 and the fourth figure 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the changing state, and the change icon c is still displayed. However, the start of the re-variation display here looks as if the start of the symbol change display of the special figure was performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (g) displays characters “× 2”. Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when it is viewed as a special figure symbol display, it looks like the second special figure symbol display due to the start of the pseudo continuous production. The character "x2" is displayed in the meaning to represent. That is, the character display of “× 2” is a notification indicating the number of times related to the start of the pseudo continuous production. The character display of “× 2” corresponds to an example of the second pseudo-serial notification.

  In FIG. 34 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop has been performed in FIG. 34 (f) is continued, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transmission unit 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position and the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position, a second temporary stop judge effect is started.

  Also in this example, there was a scene where the transmissive part 191 was operated (FIGS. 34B to 34C), but instead of the transmissive part 191, another chance button 137 described later or the like is used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step an example of another effect involving a pseudo-run.

  In the example shown in FIG. 35, as shown in FIG. 35B, a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b that continuously displays the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. At the same time, the transmission section 191 as the operation means B rotates to the forward inclined position. Also, the transmission part display 191X whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b) overlaps with the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N 'whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b). As a result, in FIG. 35 (b), a part of the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N 'is also displayed.

  FIG. 35C shows the operation validity period. When the transmission unit 191 is pressed down to the initial position, a judge effect is started according to the operation of the transmission unit 191. In this judge effect, when the transmission unit 191 is operated, the transmission unit display 191X disappears, and the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N ′ changes from the gray temporary pseudo continuous symbol N ′ to the white pseudo continuous symbol N and a temporary stop is performed. Even if the transparent portion display 191X disappears, there is a case where the temporary pseudo symbol N 'does not change to the pseudo consecutive symbol N and the temporary pseudo symbol N' disappears and the temporary stop is not performed. In FIG. 35D, the first temporary stop is performed after changing to the white pseudo-continuous symbol N. The change from the temporary pseudo consecutive symbol N 'to the pseudo consecutive symbol N is a change in the display mode, but may change to a completely different symbol. Note that both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35D and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the changing display, and the changing icon c is still displayed.

  In this example, even if the transmission unit 191 is operated, that is, even if the result of the judge effect shown in FIG. 35D is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A is turned off at the initial position without vibrating. Although it remains, the chance button 136 may start vibrating at the initial position in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191, may start vibrating while moving forward, or may start moving forward. Then, it may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned on or blinking.

  It should be noted that, in this example as well, there was a scene in which the transmissive part 191 was operated (FIGS. 35B to 35C), but instead of the transmissive part 191, another chance button 137 described later or the like is used. The operating means may be operated.

  FIGS. 35 (b ') to (d') are modified examples of FIGS. 35 (b) to (d). FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′) show a stir-up effect in which the temporary stop has not yet been started and a pseudo continuous effect may be started. That is, the pseudo consecutive symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo consecutive symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 35 (b '), the chance button 136 as the operating means A is vibrating, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (c'). The vibration of the chance button 136 may be started before the state shown in FIG. In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo consecutive symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d '), and the temporary stop is performed. Conversely, the pseudo consecutive symbol N may disappear in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and in this case, the pseudo consecutive effect is not started. As described above, the effects of FIGS. 35 (b ′) to (d ′) in which the chance button 136 as the operation means A is involved are a kind of the judge effect, and correspond to an example of the second effect.

  FIGS. 35 (b ″) to (d ″) are modified examples of FIGS. 35 (b ′) to (d ′). 35 (b ') and FIG. 35 (c'), the chance button 136 as the operating means A is vibrating, but in FIGS. 35 (b ") to (d"), the chance button 136 is vibrated. Is not vibrating, and the transmission section 191 as the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a transmission portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. Further, in FIGS. 35 (b ″) to (d ″), as in FIG. 35 (b ′) and FIG. 35 (c ′), a tandem effect in which a pseudo continuous effect may be started is executed. ing. Then, the transmission portion 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191, the second pseudo consecutive symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d ″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo consecutive symbol N2 is a different symbol from the pseudo consecutive symbol N. Conversely, also here, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. Also in this example, when the judge effect is being executed and the pseudo continuous effect is started, if an operation means (transparent portion 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, the temporary operation is performed in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136. A pseudo consecutive symbol (second pseudo consecutive symbol N2) different from the pseudo consecutive symbol to be stopped temporarily stops.

  The description of the specific examples of the effects up to now has been an example of the special figure variable display, but the same applies to other than the special figure variable display.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing stepwise an example in which a big hit symbol is fixedly displayed from the swing fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. FIG. 37 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure showing step by step.

  In FIG. 36A, a swing fluctuation display of a combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” with no change in probability (normal jackpot) is performed in the central area of the background screen where the lords are gathered. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the fluctuation display. The promotion effect is a jackpot type promotion effect (probable change promotion effect). As shown in FIG. 36 (b), on the background screen where the lords are gathering, the swing fluctuation display is temporarily reduced to the upper left. At the same time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the center area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red at the initial position. Probable change promotion production here is a kind of button production and also a kind of judge production.

  FIG. 36 (c) shows that the operation is within the validity period. When the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears in response to the operation, and the fluctuation display of the combination of decorative symbols is displayed again. In this example, the probabilistic change promotion fails, and as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the non-probable jackpot (normal jackpot) of “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 4”, which is a combination of even-numbered decoration patterns Is displayed. On the other hand, if the probable change promotion is successful, the fluctuation display of the odd combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed again. You. However, whether or not a jackpot with a probability change is determined by a win / fail determination (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether the success or failure of the probability change promotion is determined in accordance with the determination of the win / fail determination (lottery) at the time of winning. The same applies to the probable change promotion effect during the jackpot game described below. After that, the display is fixedly displayed with the combination of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols displayed as the fluctuation fluctuation displayed in FIG. 36D (see FIG. 36E).

In FIG. 36 (f) following FIG. 36 (e), a big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested that a right hit is performed, and a hitting suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the number of consecutive games at the big hit is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed as "first time" on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of FIG. 36 (g), the probable change promotion effect is started again. Probable change promotion production here is also a kind of button production and also a kind of judge production. In FIG. 36 (h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red at the initial position, prompting the user to press it. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting a continuous tapping operation of the chance button 136, and "continuous tapping" And a remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period for which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "hit repeatedly" are collectively referred to as a continuous hit display 136R of operation promotion notification. It is noted that the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c may not include all of the character indications of "hitting repeatedly", but may be a hitting display 136R. For example, the continuous hit display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.
In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This level display L2 is a display in which the level is increased in accordance with the number of continuous hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG.

  After that, the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, and in FIG. With the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 36 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is turned off and the level display L2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached three levels, but has not reached the MAX level, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (J) subsequent to (i), the continuous hit display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and a character display of “defense failure” indicating failure of probable change promotion is displayed.

  Further, during the big hit game started in FIG. 36 (f), as shown in FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 36 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. In addition to the display, the character display of “press and survive” is also displayed, and the transmission section 191 as the operation means B has been rotated to the forward inclined position, and the button effect has also started. This button effect is an effect for judging whether or not a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening) can be aimed at in a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is in a winable state. Note that the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 37 (l) shows the operation valid period of the transmission unit 191 and the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position. In response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A starts to vibrate at the initial position. Note that the chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Although the chance button 136 has started to vibrate, the vibration may not be started in some cases.

  Further, in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, the effect movable body (movable role) operates. That is, the crest actor 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then a pair of union actors 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. The pair of combined role objects 248 and the family crest role material 247 are united by being sandwiched by the role items 248.

  Next, the crest role object 247 and the pair of united role objects 248 return to the initial position, and the result of the judge effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37 (n). The character display of "Successful return" indicating that a winning state can be achieved is displayed. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing of FIG. 37 (m), it may vibrate at this timing. Further, at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, a star mark with the letters GET is also displayed. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 37 (o) following FIG. 37 (n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and that the player aims at a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening). Characters are displayed. In FIG. 37 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the character display of “Aim for V”, and the game ball passes through the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in FIG. 9 (q), the letter "V" is displayed in a large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning is made in the specific winning opening V, and a bonus (for example, a transition to a certain change state after the end of the big hit game). ) Is notified. Then, the end effect of the big hit game is executed (see FIG. 37 (r)), and the big hit game ends.

  Also in this example, there was a scene where the transmission unit 191 was operated (FIGS. 37 (k) to (l)). However, instead of the transmission unit 191, another chance button 137 described later and the like are used. The operating means may be operated.

  Next, a back button effect in which the start timing changes according to the operation will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38A is a diagram conceptually showing a configuration of a pachinko machine different from pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those given above. In addition, description of items that have been described so far may be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38A has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance button described so far is referred to as a button A or a first chance button 136, and another chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as a button B or a second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position that is a straight line distance (shortest distance) from the ball launching handle 134 and is LA away from the button B (second chance button 137). Is provided at a position LB away from the ball firing handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another viewpoint, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the center position of the pachinko machine 100 in the left-right direction than the button A (second chance button 136). I have.

  The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Further, the button B (second chance button 137) is also a kind of movable means, like the first chance button 136, may be vibrable, and may further advance (project). Conversely, the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the movable means, but may not be vibrated and may not be able to advance (project). Further, the button B (second chance button 137) may or may not have a built-in chance button lamp. Further, a plurality of chance buttons, such as a third chance button, and operation means different from the chance button may be further provided.

  In each of the examples described up to FIG. 37, a button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38A can be applied instead of the transmitting unit 191 described as an example of the operation means B. Similarly, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 can be used instead of the transmission unit 191. However, since the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 does not have a vibration function, it is necessary to provide a vibration function. There is.

  The example illustrated on the right side of FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of the button effect in the pachinko machine 100 illustrated in FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmation display) a stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a broken symbol “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed.

  In FIG. 38 (b), the design change display of the special figure is started in the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration design display device 208 is also started to change the display of the decoration design. In FIG. 38 (c), the reach effect is achieved. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, a notification that the operation is valid (for example, lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138 in red) or an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) (for example, the initial position display 136X) ) Is not performed, and the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, a person who knows from the information of the slingshot magazine or the like that the operation may be in an effective state when the reach effect is started, operates the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), an image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the button A (first chance button 136) is displayed. , So-called back button.

  Not only the button A (first chance button 136), but also the button B (second chance button 137) or the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is displayed even in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. May be performed.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect in a stepwise manner.

  39, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are vertically arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 39 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) the stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative design display device 208 has a broken symbol “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), four black circle holding icons, which are the holding displays of the special figure 1, are displayed, and no changing icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 208e. .

  In FIG. 39 (b), the first special figure display device 212 has started to display the variation of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. Also, the number of the hold icons is reduced by one and three (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed, and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 39 (c), the reach effect has been started. Here, the button effect is started according to the start of the reach effect. The button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 39D has begun to light up in red. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39D has a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) that has started to light up in red, and a button B (second chance button 137). ), An arrow display 137b and a character display of “PUSH” as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display relating to the operation valid period of the button B (second chance button 137). Are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 137a, 137b, 137c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as an operation prompting button B display 137X.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 39 (e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character instead of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 39 (f)). ). When the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, it returns to a state where the button B is turned off. The effect in which the image C of the cut-in notice is displayed in response to the operation of the button B is a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fifth effect. The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character is an effect display displayed in the variation display of the decorative pattern. The button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of the third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 39D to FIG. 39E) is the third notification. This corresponds to an example of the third period.

  The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord (fifth effect) may be an effect that is not started unless the button B (the second chance button 137) is operated, but the button B (the fifth effect) may be used. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, if the period in which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, if the operation valid period of the button B elapses, the effect may be started when the period elapses, or after the elapse. The production may be started. Further, only one of the plurality of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all kinds may be applied.

  After the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. That is, the second period is a period started in association with the operation of the button B (the second chance button 137), and here, after a while after the operation of the button B (the time for one frame) Is started), and the processing is started from FIG. 39 (g). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (g) still displays the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord, and prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) to notify the operation. Is not displayed. The button A remains off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. In response to the operation of the button A here, the image G of the character “hot” is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord. The image G of the character “hot” is an image of a cut-in notice that it is determined that a big hit will be achieved in the currently performed symbol variation display, and will be an indication of the judge result of the final judge effect. In addition, since the effect includes the button A, the effect is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of the fourth effect started in response to the operation of the button A. The image G of the character “hot” has a different display form from the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character. In addition, the image of the cut-in notice indicating that the possibility of losing in the currently performed symbol change display is high is an image of the character “sorry”.

  The second period started from FIG. 39 (g) is the operation valid period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and the fact that the operation is valid is not performed. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display of the image G of the character “hot” (fourth effect) is an effect that is not started unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character (fifth effect) may be started even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button may be started. If is not operated, the fourth production is not started. The end timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing at which the button A is operated and the timing at which the operation valid period ends.

  In this example, the execution periods of the button effects of FIGS. 39 (d) to (g) partially overlap with the execution periods of the back button effects of FIGS. All may be duplicated. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation valid period of the back button effect overlap at least in part. Conversely, the production period after the button operation of the back button production and the operation validity period of the button production may overlap at least in part of the period.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 39. The timing of the figure number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 40 matches the timing of the figure number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 39 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about ／. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 39 (see FIG. 40 (f)). As a result, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is delayed by one frame as compared with the example shown in FIG. The start timing of the second period, which is started after the elapse of the time, is also shifted by one frame later. In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button A is operated following the operation of the button B as shown in FIG. 40G, but the second period is started at the timing of FIG. The operation of the button A here is accepted, but is not treated as valid. Even if the player operates the button A at the timing of FIG. 40 (g), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all. Therefore, the player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 40 (h). . In response to the second operation, the image G of the character “hot” is cut-in and the fourth effect is started.

  As described above, the start timing of the second period (FIG. 39 (g) corresponding to an example of the first period) in the example of FIG. 39 is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 39 (b)). ) After four frames (corresponding to an example of the first time), while the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 40 (FIG. 40 corresponding to an example of the second time) (H)) is after five frames (corresponding to an example of the second time) have elapsed from the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 40 (b)), and the start timing of the second period is Variable (undefined).

  Note that both the example of FIG. 39 and the example of FIG. 40 are examples of effects involving the operation of the two types of chance buttons, but these effects are performed by operating means ( For example, it may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transmission unit 191 or the third chance button.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137).

  FIG. 41 shows two examples. In the example shown above, the chance button lamp of the button A (first chance button 136) is lit in red and the button B (second chance button) is lit. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts an operation. In this example, the button A has a function of vibrating (first function), and the button B has a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 41A, only the button A of the buttons A and B is operated. When the button A is operated, it performs the first function and starts vibrating. Note that the no-operation button B remains lit.

  In FIG. 41B, only the button B is operated among the buttons A and B. When the button B is operated, it performs a second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, in response to the operation of the button B, the non-operated button A exhibits the first function and starts to vibrate. In this example, the function (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (here, the operation of button B). Also, in this example, even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

  In the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 41, both the button A136 and the button B137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a function of vibrating (first function) and a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 41A, only the button A among the buttons A and B is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits the first function and starts to vibrate, and also exhibits the second function and starts to rotate. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. Note that the no-operation button B remains lit.

  In FIG. 41B, only the button B is operated among the buttons A and B. Even when the button B is operated, the button B remains lit, and neither vibration nor rotation is started. On the other hand, in response to the operation of the button B, the non-operated button A exhibits the first function and starts to vibrate. In this example, only one of the functions (the first function) of the plurality of functions of the other (the button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (the operation of the button B here). Also, in this example, the button A136 vibrates even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed.

  Next, an example of an icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking a promotion effect as an example.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing three examples of the promotion effect.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, during the variation display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 42A, the promotion effect starts at the same time as the reach effect starts, or after the reach effect starts. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, a display AT (first display) of a noteworthy item appears in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the display AT of noticeable items shown in FIG. 42A, it is informed that attention is paid to the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In other words, the display state of the currently displayed decorative pattern in the reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed to notify the user of interest. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, “decoration 7” is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the high-speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is displayed. A symbol combination in which three same even-numbered decorative patterns are arranged ("decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is a regular jackpot pattern combination without a certainty change, whereas a symbol combination in which the same odd numbered three decorative patterns are arranged Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with certainty change, it is likely that the promotion with certainty change will succeed here. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, both the target of interest in the display AT of the item of interest and the one that has changed thereafter match in the decorative pattern. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (a)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) match. In an effect in which a symbol such as a decorative symbol is changed, a configuration may be adopted in which the advance notice display on the symbol always matches the actual change display.

  In the display AT of the noteworthy items, the display state of the decorative pattern currently in the reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed. The state (“7 ↓ 7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the effect.

  In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, in the display AT of a notable item in the promotion effect, it is informed that attention is paid to the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons. The four icons displayed in the display AT of the noteworthy items are icons corresponding to the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are not displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a type of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of a notable item shown in FIG. 42 (b), it is informed that attention is paid to the rightmost fourth holding icon h4 among the four holding icons displayed. In the display AT of the noticeable item shown in FIG. 42 (b), four holding icons are displayed, but no change icons are displayed. On the other hand, only three black circles (default display modes) of the reserved icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the black circles (the default The change icon c in the display mode) is displayed. Further, in the display AT of a notable item shown in FIG. 42 (b), the display mode of the notable fourth hold icon h4 is the display mode of hatching (the first display mode and the display mode of the prefetch notice). Is changing. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and only three black circles of the holding icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed. However, in the fluctuating icon display area 208e, fluctuating icons c in a hatched display mode (normal notice display mode) are displayed. The display mode of this hatching is the same as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display AT of the item of interest in FIG. 42 (b). The target (fourth hold icon h4) and the one that has changed thereafter (the change icon c) are different. That is, in FIG. 42 (b), a change icon c is actually changed in advance in FIG. 42 (c) while a notice that the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) changes is given. different. In addition, the variable icon itself is not displayed in the display AT of the noticeable item in FIG. 42B, while the fourth icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is inconsistently not displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42B) and the actual change display (FIG. 42C) do not match. In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth holding icon h4) in the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual fluctuation shown in FIG. The icon c corresponds to an example of the second icon. The display AT of a noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 42C corresponds to an example of the second display. In FIG. 42 (d), the variation display of the decorative pattern is completed, and the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is definitely displayed. In the variable icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the variable icon c has changed from the hatched display mode to the black circle display mode. In addition, there is no winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the fourth holding icon h4 is not displayed.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the display AT (FIG. 42 (B)) of a notable item of the promotion effect is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, and one of the four displayed icons is displayed. It is informed that attention is paid to the rightmost icon (fourth holding icon h4). The icon to be noted (fourth holding icon h4) is displayed in a hatched display mode (first display mode). This hatched display mode (first display mode) is a display mode of a look-ahead notice in which the reliability of a jackpot is relatively low. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons h1 to h4 in a default display mode and a change icon c in the same default display mode are displayed. In this example, the number of pending icons is the same between the display AT of a notable item of the promotion effect and the actual reserved icon display area 208f. In FIG. 42 (C), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and only three holding icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 has changed to the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). The display mode of the face of the lord (second display mode) is a display mode of a look-ahead notice with a relatively high jackpot reliability. In this example, not only the target of attention (fourth holding icon h4) in the display AT of the matter to be noted and the one that has changed thereafter (the first holding icon h1) are different, but the contents of the change are also indicated by hatching. The first display mode is different from the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). Note that a fluctuating icon c having a default display mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 42 (C ′) is a modified example of FIG. 42 (C), and shows a state where the display AT of the noticeable item shown in FIG. 42 (B) has disappeared. FIG. (D ') is a view showing the state of the decorative symbol at the time of stop display, following FIG. (C'). The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 42C and 42D is not different from the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. The display state of the variable icon in the variable icon display area 208e shown in FIGS. 42 (C ′) and (D ′) is not different from the display state of the variable icon in the variable icon display area 208e shown in FIG. FIG. 42 (E ′) following FIG. 42 (D ′) shows a state in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 has been exhausted and a new variable display of the decorative symbol has started. FIG. When a new floating display of the decorative symbol is started, a moving animation of the shift display of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon which was the first hold icon h1 moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Is displayed as a change icon c. The hold icon, which has been the second hold icon h2, is displayed as the first hold icon h1. The hold icon is displayed at the same time as the start of the movement animation, during the movement animation, or simultaneously with the end of the movement animation. After the end of the moving animation, the display mode changes to the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the example described so far, and the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) started after the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) in which the display AT of the item to be noted is made. In the second symbol variation display), the promotion display is executed. The first hold icon h1 that has been changed to the display mode of the lord's face may be displayed in that display mode during the execution of the second symbol change display (for example, during the execution of the reach effect), or the display mode may be changed. Or may disappear when the super reach effect is executed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 42 also corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (B)) does not match the actual change display (FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ')).

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth holding icon h4) in the display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and is shown in FIG. The actual first hold icon h1 shown in “)” corresponds to an example of the second icon. The display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 42C and 42E is an example of the second display. Is equivalent to

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing two other examples of the promotion effect.

  In the example on the left side of FIG. 43, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed above the hold icon. This mini-icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and a notice of an effect to be executed in the symbol change display that is started when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is exhausted, and about the big hit in the symbol change display. This indicates a pre-reading notice or the like. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, a mini icon of A is displayed on the leftmost first holding icon h1 of the three holding icons displayed. Two mAs are stacked. For example, the mini-icon mA of A display is for announcing that pseudo continuous production is started once. In the display AT of a noteworthy item shown in FIG. 43B, one C-display mini icon displayed above the leftmost icon (first hold icon h1) of the four displayed icons It has been reported that attention is paid to mC. The mini icon mA of C display is, for example, a look-ahead notice that suggests that a big hit is confirmed. In FIG. 43 (C), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and in the decorative design display device 208, the mini icon mA of A display and the C display of C display are displayed on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini icon has changed from the A display mini icon mA to the C display mini icon mC, but the lower mini icon has not changed and the A display mini icon has changed. The icon remains at mA. As a result, while the number of pseudo-runs is reduced from two to one, it is foretold that the symbol variation display, which is determined to be a big hit, will be announced, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the target of attention in the display AT of the matter to be noted is a mini-icon in which only one is displayed, whereas in the subsequent display, two mini-icons are displayed. There is a change between the first-stage mini-icon (C-display mini-icon mC), which was the target of attention in the display AT of the noticeable matter, and the first-stage mini-icon (A-display mini-icon mA) displayed thereafter. The content is also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 43, the mini icon mC of C display in the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the mini icon of A display in the first row shown in FIG. The icon mA corresponds to an example of the second icon. The display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 43C corresponds to an example of the second display.

  In the example on the right side of FIG. 43, the promotion effect selected from the three types of promotion effects is executed in the reach state. The three types of promotion effects referred to here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to (c), the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to (d), and FIG. 42 (A). (C) or FIG. 42 (A) to FIG. 42 (C ′) to FIG. 42 (E ′). In addition, all of a plurality of types of effects for which one effect is selected (here, three types of promoted effects) are displayed in advance as shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C. )) And the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be the same type of effect, or a prior notice display (FIG. 42 (a) to FIG. 42 (d)) 42 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be a non-matching type of effect, or both a matching type of effect and a mismatching type of effect are included. Is also good.

  In FIG. 43 (b), a display AT1 of a notable item marked “promotion chance A” as the promotion effect A, and a display AT2 of a notable item marked “promotion chance B” as the promotion effect B are shown. A display AT3 of a noteworthy item marked “promotion chance C” is displayed as the promotion effect C, and any one of the promotion effects is selected and executed by internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed by operating the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137).

  In the above description, the promotion effect has been described as an example. However, the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.

  Next, a timer notice for starting notification by a button effect will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram for describing a general timer notice.

  44, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation surface of the button B (the second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 and the like is circular, but the operation surface of the button B here is a square. Button B is referred to as button B (operation button 137 '), but is not limited to the shape of the operation surface, and may be named a chance button.

  In FIG. 44 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (decision display) a stop symbol, and the decorative design display device 208 has a broken symbol. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped display. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons, which are the holding displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 44 (b), the special-figure design display device 212 has started to display the variation of the special symbol, and the decoration-design display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decorative design. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Also, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44B are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed, and the fluctuating icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (c), a reach effect has been started. Up to now, the decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with a numeral of 3. .

  The first sub control unit 400 receives a special figure symbol change start command or a special figure hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The symbol change start command includes information indicating the change time of the symbol change display to be started. Further, even when the information indicating the fluctuation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the fluctuation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. When the main control unit 300 prefetches up to the fluctuating time, the information indicating the prefetched fluctuating time is included in the special figure hold increase command. Is included, and the first sub control unit 400 can know the variation time from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol. When the fluctuation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or longer), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for execution of a timer notice.

  If the lottery for the execution of the timer notice has been won (if the result of the lottery is an execution result), the timer notice is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display indicating the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is also a kind of a notice effect indicating that a new effect is started. The new effect referred to here may be a notice effect of a jackpot or an effect effect of whether or not a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect) is started. Note that the announcement performance of the jackpot includes a normal announcement effect for giving an announcement of a big hit with the currently-designed symbol variation display and a look-ahead advance announcement effect for giving an announcement of the big hit with the next and subsequent symbol variation displays. The display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display. In this example, the display is a numerical display. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of examples of the display indicating the remaining time enumerated here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be displayed. May be applied. In FIG. 44 (d), a timer notice display T is displayed on the left of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and it is notified that the remaining time until the start of a new effect is 30:00 seconds. The remaining time displayed here is counted down as time elapses, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (f), a lord character is displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. Note that the fluctuating icon c in a black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e in FIG. Further, a timer notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (character display of the lord) is at the end of the timer notice. It is a production. However, the first effect display (character display of the lord) can also be viewed as the start effect of a new effect for which the start is notified by the timer notice. In particular, the timing at which the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the moment when it reaches 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing of FIG. Alternatively, the timer notice has ended at 0:00 seconds, but the timer notice display T may be displayed for a certain period of time even when a new effect is started.

  In (g) of FIG. 44 following (f) of FIG. 44, although the timer notice display T disappears, the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A normal notice effect has been started as a new effect announced by the timer notice. In this normal announcement effect, the change icon c, which was the default display mode until then, changes to the display mode of the princess's face, and there is a possibility that it will hit the symbol change display that is currently continuing in the reach state Has foretold.

  In FIG. 44 (h), the first effect display (character display of the lord) also disappears, and the changing icon c of the display mode of the princess face continues to be displayed in the changing icon display area 208e. continuing. After that, it develops into super-reach production, and the change icon c disappears together with the hold icon (disappears), resulting in a big hit or a loss, and further, a loss without developing into a super-reach production. I do. In addition, even if it develops into a super-reach effect, the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face may be kept visible without disappearing.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example in which a timer notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the lottery of the execution of the timer notice is won, the internal counting by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or before the start of the symbol variation display, but in the example shown in FIG. 45, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display, An internal count is started. The count value is set in the counter timer before the start, and is counted by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be a time longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. FIG. 45 simulates the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal counting is started from FIG.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received (operation valid state) at the same time as or immediately after the start of the internal counting. However, even if the operation is shifted to the operation valid state, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the operation promotion notification of the button A (for example, the initial position display 136X) is also performed. The player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed according to the operation. In the example illustrated in FIG. 45, the button A (the first chance button 136) is operated a while after the reach effect has started (see FIG. 45C). The display of the timer notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 44, but is irrelevant in this example. The button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Note that the timer notice display T is not displayed when the button B (the operation button 137 ') is operated, but may be displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e), a timer notice display T is displayed, and it is notified that the remaining time until the start of a new effect is 20:00 seconds. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed immediately, so that the player starts the countdown of the remaining time by operating the button A. Although it looks like, the countdown of the remaining time is started internally before the button operation.

  In this example, the button A (the first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button. However, the operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the button A may be performed. The operation ends when is operated. Therefore, if a certain period is provided between the time when the button A (the first chance button 136) is operated and the time when the timer notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is not issued within that period. Will not be done.

  Further, since the timer notice display T is displayed in response to the operation of the button A, the length of the remaining time at which the display is started differs depending on the timing of the operation of the button A. That is, as shown in FIG. 45A, if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the display of the timer notice display T starts from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, even if the button A is operated after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 becomes equal to or less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), the timer notice display is performed. T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A is not operated. You may. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, the transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  Since FIG. 45 (f) and subsequent figures are the same as FIG. 44 (e) and subsequent figures, the description is omitted, but since the button A (first chance button 136) is the back button, the beginner does not press the button A. In some cases, the remaining time elapses. Even in this case, after the remaining time has elapsed, the display mode of the variable icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess face without performing the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord). In the same manner as in the case where the operation has been performed, after the first effect display (the main character display N1) is displayed, the display mode of the change icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess face.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the timing of the back button operation and the timing of the increase in hold.

  When the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 46 (b), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the internal counting is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display here. That is, when the symbol variation display is started, the execution of the timer notice has been determined, and the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is in an effective state.

  In FIG. 46C, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. In the state where the timer notice display T is displayed (the remaining time is 5:00 seconds), one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is increased by one. As shown in FIG. 46 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. Each of these three holding icons h1 to h3 has a black circle display mode (default display mode).

  Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 46 (f)), and as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the fluctuating icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, the three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this example, a new effect to be started from now on, that is, a new effect whose start is to be notified by the timer notice is indicated on the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord), and the pre-read notice is provided. It is notified that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice is also determined in a controlly deciding stage of the execution of the button notice. Therefore, if the second hold of the special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol variation display one time before the currently performed symbol variation display, the target of the prefetch notice is control-wise. The prize money (here, the third hold) after the execution of the timer notice is determined to be the second hold cannot be the target of the prefetch notice, but from the player's point of view, before the start of the new effect It seems that all the three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed in have the possibility of being subject to the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 of the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from the black circle display mode (default display mode) to the lord's face display mode. (Preview notice display mode), and the prefetch notice effect has been started as a new effect notified by the timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord) continues to be displayed until the symbol change display currently being performed ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (c ′), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, and When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after the timing of FIG. 46 (d), which is increased by one (see FIG. 46 (e ')), the button operation is performed after the hold is increased. For this reason, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which had increased before the button operation, would also be the target of the prefetch notice, but even before the button operation, the hold increase after the execution of the timer notice was decided In control, it is impossible for the third hold to be the target of the prefetch notice. In this example as well, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  During the execution of the symbol change display one time before the currently performed symbol change display, if the first hold is also increased together with the second hold of the special figure 1, the first hold icon h1 is displayed. There is a possibility that the display mode changes to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. In this case, it is not known in advance whether the pre-reading advance notice target is the first hold, the second hold, or both. .

  In addition, if the control of determining the prefetching advance notice target according to the operation of the button A is adopted, the number of the prefetching advance notice objects changes according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to the prefetching advance notice, but with the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (e '), the first hold to the third hold are performed. Becomes the target of the pre-reading notice, and the target that can be expected differs depending on the timing of the button operation.

  Further, the determination of the prefetch notice target may be performed immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing stepwise two examples of the button effect.

  The example on the left side of FIG. 47 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the reach state is shown from FIG. 47 (a) to FIG. 47 (d), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (b) has a button imitating the chance button 136 which is turned off at the initial position. An image 136a4, an arrow display 136b and a character display of "press" as a promotion display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "press" are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of operation promotion notification. In FIG. 47C, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated in a state where the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. The symbol display device 208 displays an image C1 of the cut-in notice in which a chance is displayed.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 47 is an example in which the start of the timer notice is awaited. FIGS. 47 (A) to 47 (C) are the same as FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c), and therefore description thereof is omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer notice is not executed in the currently performed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure holding increase command when each of the three holdings held here is held, from the information representing the pre-read stop symbol included in each command, the respective fluctuation time is calculated. If any of these three holds has a change time longer than the first time, the timer notice is stored until the hold is exhausted and the symbol change display is started. Keep it. As shown in FIG. 47C, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice is not started in the currently performed symbol change display, but after this, the timer notice is not started. As a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol change display to be started, the display T 'of "waiting" is displayed at the position where the timer notice display T is displayed as shown in FIG. When the timer notice is started, the remaining time is displayed instead of "waiting".

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. 48, three examples are shown on the left side, and two examples are shown on the right side.

  First, in FIG. 48A, which is the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter, referred to as time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T by pressing the button A. (First chance button 136) It is already displayed before the operation. This time display T1 is also counted down as time elapses, but in FIG. 48A, 10:00 seconds is displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 48A is 30:00 seconds, and they do not match. At the timing shown in FIG. 48B when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the time display T1 is displayed in response to this operation. , A timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 48B, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412.

  In FIG. 48 (A) which is the second example, similarly to FIG. 48 (a) which is the first example, the time display T1 is displayed by pressing the button A (the first Chance button 136) is already displayed before the operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. In response to this operation, the timer notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer notice display T shown in FIG. 48B is the same as the counter timer 412 at 25:00 seconds. On the timer notice display T, a difference between the time of the time display T1 displayed so far and the time of the newly displayed timer notice display T is displayed. That is, at the timing of FIG. 48 (B), the time of the time display T1 which had been displayed so far should have been 5:00 seconds, whereas the remaining time displayed in the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, the difference display T2 of “+20” is made.

  In FIG. 48 (a) which is the third example, similarly to FIG. 48 (a) which is the first example, the time display T1 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T by pressing the button A (first display). Chance button 136) is already displayed before the operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing of FIG. 48A, and here is also the timing at which the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing of FIG. 48A, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the characters "LOCK" are displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues, and the character display “LOCK” is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds in the time display T1. The countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display “LOCK” disappears, the time display T1 is replaced with the timer notice display T, and thereafter, the countdown as the timer notice display T is continued. You. In this example, if the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down, and eventually reaches 0:00 seconds, and the timer notice is given. The process ends without replacing the display T.

  In FIG. 48 (α), which is the fourth example shown on the upper right, an arrow indicating the lapse of time is displayed, indicating a state in which symbol variation is being displayed. Generally, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer is, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit is. In addition, when the timer notice notifies the start of the final cut-in notice in the currently displayed symbol fluctuation display, various effects are executed as the execution time (remaining time) of the timer notice increases. Becomes possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-run. Further, after the normal reach is started, development to super reach (SP) and effect of changing the title color of the reach can be executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a chance-up production during the reach in which the expectation of the jackpot is increased. For these reasons, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed internally, but the remaining time display in the timer notice display T is initially displayed a little, and the countdown is temporarily stopped. By stopping or adding the remaining period later, the interest of the game may be improved. Further, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48 (a) is increased, the number of times the effect changes when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds is expected to increase. The entertainment of the game may be improved. Then, in the final cut-in notice, a character determined to be a big hit is made to appear. Even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds in accordance with the fact that the counter timer 412 reaches 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and a fake timer notice can be executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which false timer notice is not performed.

  In FIG. 48 (a), which is the fifth example shown in the lower right, the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here (30:00 second) is displayed. In FIG. 48 (i), the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed again. The button A corresponding to the back button is in a state where the second operation is also accepted as valid, and the timer notice display T which has been displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) is changed to the second operation. Accordingly, it is displayed in a second mode (for example, a double frame). Note that the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) until now may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the timer notice overlaps with another effect involving the countdown of the remaining time.

  FIG. 49 shows two examples. The example shown above is an example in which the timer notice overlaps with the simultaneous island production. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), "25 seconds left until the simultaneous island production" is largely displayed. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49B, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (b) displays "20 seconds left for simultaneous island production" in the same size as before. In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer announcement is 0:00 seconds and the time when the simultaneous island production is started is only 5 seconds. , The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412.

  The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 is an example in which the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49A, a mission display M is displayed on the upper right corner of the variable icon display area 208e, and it is displayed that the remaining time is 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 49 (a), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. Note that the mission display M shown in FIG. 49A shows that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, the mission display M and the timer notice display T are both displayed in a similar display mode surrounded by a single frame, so that at first glance, there is a risk of being mistakenly recognized. It also has the effect of being watched.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 50, the timer notice display is a meter display instead of a numerical display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50B, the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights in red. And encourages them to operate. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50B, a tutorial-like description about the display of a chance up meter, which is a kind of timer notice display, is provided. In FIG. 50 (c), the button A is operated in response to the red light, and a chance up meter CM is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the operation. In the chance up meter CM, the left end is the start S and the right end is the goal G, and the arrow mark moves from left to right with time. This arrow mark indicates the current time point. When the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Further, the chance up meter CM not only indicates the remaining time, but also includes various effects such as a change of a pseudo-run or a hold icon, a change effect of a reach title color, and a chance increase effect during a reach as shown in FIG. The production execution timing is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the effect may be marked, and the effect to be executed may not be displayed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights in red to urge the user to operate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. A mark JI is attached to the remaining period meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N. When the remaining period meter operates the button A when approaching the mark JI, the effect of the special mode is obtained. Be started. In FIG. 50 (A), the operation of the button A is too slow and the effect of the special mode is not started, and as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the chance is displayed. Have been. In FIG. 50A, the operation timing of the button A exactly matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50A, an image C2 of a chance and a cut-in notice displayed in gray characters is displayed. ing. The image C2 of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. 50A is different from the image C1 of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. The type of the font and the type of the background may be different, and further, an image of a character or the like may be added. In FIG. 50A, the button B (the operation button 137 ') for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. The button B here corresponds to a back button. The operation timing of the button B also matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (a), a cut-in notice image C3 of a special mode in which a princess character is displayed is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the effect is different depending on the operation timing, and the display mode of the effect is different depending on the operating means operated. It should be noted that the type of effect and the start timing may be different, without being limited to the display mode of the effect. Further, even if the operating means to be operated is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of effect, and the start timing may be different depending on whether or not the back button is used.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display unit 209 ′ with a shutter that is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. The panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the timer notice display means 209 '. In the timer advance notice display means 209 'shown in FIG. 51 (a), the shutter is closed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer notice display means 209 '.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209 'becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed not on the timer notice display means 209 'but on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the decorative symbol display device. In the fluctuating icon display area 208e of 208, the fluctuating icon c changes to a princess face display mode, and a normal notice effect has started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 'keeps displaying 0:00 seconds without closing the shutter.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (A), the same display as “waiting” shown in FIG. 47 (D) is made. "Standby" shown in FIG. 47 (D) is a display for giving a notice that the timer notice will be started in the symbol variation display to be started thereafter, but "Standby" shown in FIG. This is equivalent to a display for giving a notice that the timer notice will be started in the currently performed symbol change display. In FIG. 51 (B), the “standby” of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209 ′ opens, and the remaining time equal to the remaining time set in the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed. (In this case, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The release of “waiting” may be automatically released when the release time comes, or may be released by operating the button A or the button B again.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51A is in the reach state, and the remaining time (25:00 seconds here) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 208e. Notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer notice display means 209 ', the shutter is opened and a character display "CHANCE" is displayed. As described above, the timer notice display means 209 'can display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a) has developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead, the remaining time (here, 20:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is changed to the timer notice display means 209 ′. Will be displayed. By doing so, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the timer notice display T, while the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 51A, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also on the timer notice display means 209 '. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 'displays 24:95 seconds, and both are not shown in the counter timer 412 (not shown). Although the remaining time should be displayed, there is a very slight difference. Since this is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ', some time lag occurs in display control or the like, and this is a difference caused by this time lag. Note that a difference may be intentionally generated between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 'as part of the effect.

  Here, the timer notice display means 209 'is used, but instead of the timer notice display means 209', an operable (elevating) second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33 may be used. The second display means 209 may be operated (elevated), may not operate (elevated), may operate in addition to the elevating operation, or may perform only the elevating operation. It may be something.

  Finally, an example will be described in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons each start to change.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the animation of the hold icon is executed.

  In FIG. 52 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (decision display) a stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative design display device 208 has " "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped display. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (a) are turned on, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays three black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 52 (b) shows a state immediately after the symbol variation display of the special figure is started on the first special figure display device 212 and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decoration symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. While only two first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (b) are on, the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has three holding icons (hold icon). h1 to h3) are displayed, and no change icon is still displayed in the change icon display area 208e. This is a result of a time lag that occurs because the fluctuation has just started. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a changing display (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (c), the movement animation of the hold icon has been started. The moving animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then diagonally to the lower right. The hold icon, which was the first hold icon h1 until now, moves toward the change icon display area 208e. The holding icon that has moved and has been the second holding icon h2 has moved toward the position where the first holding icon h1 was displayed, and the holding icon that has been the third holding icon h3 has changed to the second holding icon h3. It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

  In FIG. 52D, the movement of the suspension icon is completed, and the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the suspension icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. Further, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f.

  Here, there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 increases by one, and the number of the first special figure reservation lamp 218 shown in FIG. Are lit. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an increase animation of the hold icon is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (e), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi is starting to be seen from below the display screen.

  Also in FIG. 52 (f), the increase icon of the hold icon continues, and the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed. In FIG. 52 (g), the increase of the hold icon The animation has ended, and a black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (h), the stop symbol of the losing is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a stopped display (white). are doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The change icon c is still left in 208e. In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 52 (i), the fixed stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration design display device 208 also performs “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3”. Is fixedly displayed, and the change icon c has disappeared.

  In FIG. 52 (j) to FIG. 52 (l), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is performed, and in FIG. 52 (m), the stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (n). In the example, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 2” is definitely displayed.

  52 (a) to 52 (n) described above are castle town stages, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the streets of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change is started at the same time as the start of the design change display of the special figure, and at the same time as the design change display of the next special figure 1 is started in FIG. It temporarily changes to a background image in which a princess character is displayed in the center of the toned background image. This background image does not belong to any stage and is a background image dedicated to stage change. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon, the frame of the fluctuating icon display area 208e, and the fluctuating icon c itself that have been displayed up to that point also disappear, and the fluctuating display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left. While being displayed, the fourth symbol 2081, 2082 is displayed only in the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player pays attention to the background image on the decorative symbol display device 208 with interest. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 52 (p), the background image is switched to a dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, it has been switched from the castle town stage to the darkness stage. When the stage change is completed, the display of the hold icon, the frame of the variable icon display area 208e, and the display of the variable icon c itself are also restored, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is also changed to the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right. This is performed in the symbol display area 208c. On the darkness stage, the default display mode becomes a square, and in the darkness stage, the default display mode becomes a square, and in FIG. 52 (p), a black square first hold icon h1 is displayed. , A black square variation icon c is displayed. Thus, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may change depending on the stage. Also, the decorative design and the fourth design may be changed to those according to the stage.

  The above-described stages are prepared in a plurality of stages in addition to the castle town stage and the darkness stage. Is performed, or a stage change is performed according to the number of times of symbol change display.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon during the symbol stop.

  During the change of the design of Toku-zu 1, after the end of the moving animation, there is one ball winning in the first Toku-zu start port 230, and the number of reservations of Toku-zu 1 increases by one to three. That is, here, the third reservation has increased. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 53 (b) are increased by one and turned on three times. Although not shown in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation of increasing the reserved icons described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. To h3 are displayed. The third hold that has been increased here is a target of a prefetch notice, but is displayed in a default display mode (a display mode of a black circle) during the symbol change in FIG. 53 (b). In the following figures, the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted in the drawings, but the increase animation is executed unless otherwise specified.

  In FIG. 53 (c), a stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. Is displayed in a fixed manner. During this confirmation display, the effect of the pre-reading notice of the third hold increased during the symbol change display (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) is executed. In this effect, the display mode changes along with the increased third hold icon h3 and the hold icons (first hold icon h1 and second hold icon h2) that were displayed when the third hold increased. Each of the first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 53 (d) has a black circle display mode (default display mode), but in FIG. 53 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, the effect display e4 overlaps the three hold icons h1 to h3, and the three hold icons h1 to h3 become invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), all the three hold icons h1 to h3 have changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice). Here, the change of the display mode is simultaneous and the change of the same display mode. However, the display mode may be changed one by one, or may be changed to a different display mode. The same applies to the simultaneous change described).

  In FIG. 53 (g), the symbol change display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 53 (h), the hold icon of the display mode of the lord's face has started moving animation, and FIG. In this example, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c having the same appearance as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 in the display mode of the lord's face are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period. Within one period, an effect of simultaneous change of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter, referred to as simultaneous change effect) is performed. On the other hand, if there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period immediately before FIG. 53 (a) to FIG. 53 (c)) after the end of the first period, Does not perform the simultaneous change effect during the second period during which the symbol is changing, but performs the simultaneous change effect during the period during which the fixed display is being performed (FIGS. 53 (d) to 53 (f)). Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of the simultaneous change of the holding icon when the holding increases while the symbol is stopped.

  In FIG. 54 (c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. Is displayed in a fixed manner. In addition, since the fixed display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, it is referred to as the stop display including the fixed display. During this stop display, there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is increased by one to three. That is, here also, the third reservation has increased. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 53 (f) are increased by one and turned on three. The third hold increased here is also subject to the advance notice. When the hold is increased during the stop display, the decoration icon display device 208 does not execute the animation for increasing the hold icon described with reference to FIG. That is, the execution of the increase animation has been canceled. However, only a part of the increase animation may be executed, or the whole animation may be executed.

  In FIG. 54 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the reserved icon display area 208f, and the entire reserved icon display area 208f becomes difficult to see. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 that have been displayed so far in a black circle display manner (default display manner), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. To be invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, the third hold icon h3 has increased as shown in FIG. The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the prefetch notice). In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, which have been the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode), are the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice). At the same time. In other words, all the three holding icons h1 to h3 including the increased third holding icon h3 are displayed in the manner of displaying the lord's face (the manner of displaying the prefetch notice). In FIG. 54 (g), the symbol variation display has been started, and the subsequent steps are the same as in the example of FIG. 53, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the number of holdings increases while the symbol is stopped, and a simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased holding icon is displayed. That is, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the increase in the reservation or simultaneously with the increase in the reservation.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of holds increases by two during the symbol change.

  FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c) show that the symbols are changing, and among them, at the timing of FIG. 55 (b) after the end of the moving animation, there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230. The number of reservations in FIG. 1 increases by one to three. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and this third hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice as a result of the lottery of the execution of the prefetch notice in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is increased by one and illuminated by three, and the third holding icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased and the three holding icons are displayed. h1 to h3 are displayed. At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 55 (c), there is also a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is further increased by one to four (full). That is, although the fourth hold is increased in this case, as a result of the lottery of the execution of the pre-read notice in the first sub-control unit 400, the fourth hold is not subject to the pre-read notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (c) is increased by one and illuminated by four, and the fourth holding icon h4 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased to increase the four holding icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 55 (d) to (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, a simultaneous change effect is executed as an effect of the prefetch notice of the third hold increased during the symbol change display, and an effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 55 (f). After the entire holding icon display area 208f becomes difficult to see, the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the holding icon resumes, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (g), the holding icon (first holding icon h1, second holding icon h1, second holding icon h1) already displayed when the third holding increases, together with the third holding icon h3 for the prefetch notice. The icon h2) is also changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the look-ahead notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the third hold is increased is displayed. The mode has not changed, and the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode) remains. As described above, the simultaneous change effect does not necessarily mean that all of the displayed hold icons change.

  Note that, in this example as well, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period, and when there is an increase in the hold in the first period, the first Simultaneous change production is performed during the period. On the other hand, if there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period from FIG. 55 (a) to immediately before FIG. 55 (d)) after the end of the first period, Does not perform the simultaneous change effect during the second period during which the symbol is being changed, but performs the simultaneous change effect during the period during which the display is stopped (FIGS. 55 (d) to 55 (g)).

  Further, the first half period (for example, the period before the start of the reach effect) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol is set as the first period, and the second half period until the end of the variable display (for example, the first period) The second half period following the second period) may be the second period. Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  In addition, the first period may be a period from the start of the display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, a period until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e, or from the start of the display of the variable display. It may be a period until one of a plurality of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped (a so-called first stop, or the first temporary stop in the pseudo continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of the variable display. May be a period until the state becomes a reach state. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of types of examples for the first period listed here may be applied, a plurality of types may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of simultaneous change of the holding icon when the number of holdings increases by two while the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 56 (c) to FIG. 56 (g) show that the symbols are stopped. Of these, one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. Is increased by one to three. That is, here, the third reservation has been increased, and this third reservation is a target of the prefetch notice. Although the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (f) is increased by one and turned on three times, the effect display e4 appears in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding icon The entire display area 208f is difficult to view. The animation of increasing the hold icon accompanying the increase in the third hold has been cancelled.

  Also, at the timing of FIG. 56 (g), there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is further increased by one to four (full). In other words, the fourth hold increases during execution of the simultaneous change effect that is the look-ahead notice effect, but this fourth hold is not a target of the look-ahead notice. Although the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (g) is increased by one and turned on four times, the effect icon e4 is continuously displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding is performed. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to view. The animation of increasing the hold icon associated with the increase in the fourth hold has also been canceled.

  In FIG. 56 (h), the effect display e4 disappears, and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (h), the third hold icon h3 to be pre-read notice is displayed in a manner of displaying the face of the palace (display form of the pre-read notice), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon are displayed. The icon h2 has also changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the look-ahead notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the increase of the third hold is a black circle display mode. (Default display mode). In this way, if the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as a pre-reading notice effect, but if there is a hold increase during execution of the simultaneous change effect, the hold The increase icon is excluded from the target, and the hold icons before the simultaneous change effect is executed are changed all at once. Note that while the design is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately executed when the number of special figure holds increases, but even if the fourth hold increases before the simultaneous change effect starts, the third hold is a prefetch notice. If it is a target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, if the fourth hold is the object of the prefetch notice, both the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice.

  As described above, in both FIG. 56 (f) and FIG. 56 (g), the animation of increasing the hold icon has been canceled, but the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change effect, which is the prefetch notice effect, is not held. An icon increase animation may be performed. In FIG. 56 (f ′), similarly to FIG. 56 (f), the effect display e4 appears due to the start of the simultaneous change effect due to the fact that the third hold is the target of the prefetch notice, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed. It is difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since the simultaneous change effect has started, an animation for increasing the hold icon is started. In FIG. 56 (g1 '), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi is starting to be seen from below the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase hold icon hi is displayed is located on the back side of the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase hold icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In FIG. 56 (g2 ′) following FIG. 56 (g1 ′), an increase suspension icon hi in a black circle display mode, part of which is hidden by the effect display e4, is shown.

  Note that, as an animation of increasing the hold icon accompanying the increase in the third hold, an increase hold icon hi of the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice) may appear together with the effect display e4.

  Next, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icons in the winning order changing machine will be described.

  The description so far has been about the special figure 2 priority change. That is, the description has been given of the increase in the reservation of the special figure 1 in the case where the design change of the special figure 2 is performed with priority. Note that the same applies to the reservation increase of the special figure 2.

  Here, of the prize in the first special figure starting port 230 and the prize in the second special figure starting port 232, the case of the winning order changing machine which starts the symbol change display from the earlier timing. explain.

  FIG. 57 is a view for explaining the winning order fluctuation.

  In the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57, eight holding icons including four holdings of the special figure 1 and four holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. The change icon display area 208e is provided at the lower left corner.

  In FIG. 57A, six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. Each of these six hold icons h1 to h6 has a black circle display mode (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the six hold icons h1 to h6 is the hold of the special figure 2.

  In FIG. 57 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change, and the seventh holding icon h7 is added to the holding icon display area 208f. Also in this case, an increase animation similar to the hold icon increase animation described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, but is not shown. Eventually, the symbol change ends and the symbol is stopped (FIGS. 57 (c) to 57 (d)). In this example, the loss and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon are not started in the lottery of the execution of the pre-reading notice for the seventh hold.

  Next, the reservation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first reservation icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the second special figure display device 214 starts to change the design of the special figure and displays the decorative pattern. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started, and in FIG. Is completed, and the fluctuating icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of holds increases in the winning order change.

  In FIG. 58A, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. Each of these seven hold icons h1 to h7 has a black circle display mode (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is the hold of Tokujin Figure 2. The state shown in FIG. 58A is a state after the end of the moving animation.

  In FIG. 58 (b), during the symbol change after the end of the moving animation, the hold of the special figure 2 increases, and the eighth hold icon h8 is added to the hold icon display area 208f and the hold is full. Accordingly, a full tank indication F of the hold MAX is also displayed. In this example, the lottery of the execution of the pre-reading notice for the eighth hold is won, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is executed thereafter.

  Eventually, the symbol change ends and the display is stopped (FIGS. 58C to 58D). In this example, during the stop display, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started.

  Next, the reservation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first reservation icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol change display of the special figure, and the decorative symbol display. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started, and in FIG. 58 (g), the movement of the hold icon Are completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and a change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Note that the display mode is a black circle display mode (default display mode) regardless of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 or the change icon c.

  When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the moving animation of the hold icon. Even in this simultaneous change effect, the effect display e5 appears, but as shown in FIG. 58 (h), the effect display e5 is a display that overlaps the change icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f. Yes, in addition to the seven reserved icons h1 to h7, the variable icon c is also difficult to visually recognize. Note that the effect display e5 shown in FIG. 58 (h) does not overlap the position where the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, but may overlap the position up to this position. Further, an effect display that does not overlap may be displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 58 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon becomes visible, and the change icon c becomes visible. Here, the simultaneous change effect is a look-ahead notice in which the eighth reservation at the time of the increase of the reservation (FIG. 58 (b)) is the target of the preliminary notice. It is on hold, and the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed in the first place. Therefore, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are displayed, and the display mode of all the displayed icons is changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display does not change to one type of common display mode, but changes to a plurality of types of display modes. In addition, the display mode of all the holding icons changed at once may be different.

Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. In FIG. 58 (d ′), the stop display is being performed as in FIG. 58 (d), and in FIG. 58 (e ′), as in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the previous example, the movement animation of the hold icon was started immediately thereafter, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Simultaneous change production has begun. In FIG. 58 (f ′), the effect display e5 disappears, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are displayed, and all of these displayed icons are displayed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of holdings is increased during stop display in the winning order change and the holding is full.

  The stop display is performed from FIG. 59 (a) to FIG. 59 (b). At the timing between FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. The number of holds increases by 1 and the number of holds becomes 8 (full) in Fig. 1. Regarding the hold increase during stop display, the animation of increasing the hold icon is canceled, and as shown in Fig. 59 (b), The number of the first special symbol holding lamps 218 is increased by one, and four are lit, and the eighth holding icon h8 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased. In the case where the full state is reached, the full state display F described with reference to Fig. 58 is not displayed, that is, the full state display F is displayed only while the symbol is changing. Is short, and fill-up display F takes some time As a result, the next symbol change display is started without displaying the full tank display F (see FIG. 59 (c)), and although not shown, the moving animation of the hold icon is performed. After that, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started, and the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 59 (d)). In FIG. 59 (e), the effect display e5 disappears and the seventh hold icon h7 is displayed. , The first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6 and the change icon c are redisplayed, and the display mode of all the redisplayed icons is changed.

  In addition, even if it is a short time, the full display F may be displayed during the stop display. Further, the moving animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Further, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icon may not be started unless the holding is increased during the symbol change or the holding is not full.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is performed depending on the type of the displayed hold icon.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60B, the second holding icon h2 changes to the holding icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a display mode of a look-ahead notice with the highest reliability (big hit expectation) or a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. Alternatively, a rare display mode with the lowest appearance rate may be used. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of examples of the second display mode listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be used. May be applied. Even if the hold is increased while the hold icon in such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60B, the second holding icon h2 is changed to the holding icon of the display mode (first display mode) in which it is lit. This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of a look-ahead notice with the lowest reliability (expected degree of big hit) or a display mode in which two or more are displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, a display mode having the second highest appearance rate after the default display mode may be used. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of examples of the first display mode listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be used. May be applied. When the hold is increased while the hold icon having such a display mode is displayed (see the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 60C), if the increased hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice, the simultaneous change is performed. An effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (E)).

  FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a simultaneous change effect when the holding order is full in the winning order change.

  The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) has changed to the display mode of the number-long character. The display status of the third hold icon h3 is changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, there are cases in which the first character appears in the display mode of the first character at the time of winning, or in which only the reserved icon changes to the display mode of the first character at the start of the next change. In FIG. 61 (d), the eighth holding icon h8 increases during the symbol change, and the holding is full. When the reserved full state is reached during the symbol change, the full display F is displayed from the time when the full state is reached to the stop display of the symbol change display currently being performed (FIGS. 61 (c) to 61 (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the full display F disappears when the final display is reached. Then, even if the display mode of the hold icon is changed in another effect, when the hold is full, after the animation of moving the hold icon in the next change (see FIG. 61 (g)) ends, The simultaneous change effect is started as shown in FIG. 61 (i), and as shown in FIG. 29 (j), the display mode of all the icons of the first to seventh holding icons h1 to h7 and the change icon c is changed. . In this example, the simultaneous change effect is executed in response to the full state of the hold, irrespective of the display mode of the hold icon as described with reference to FIGS. . Therefore, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is the display mode of the character with the longest number, but the display mode of the character of "heat" shown in FIG. When the reserve is full, a simultaneous change effect is executed. However, even when the hold is full, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed if the hold icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 61 (A), the display mode of all the hold icons from the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 has already been changed to the display mode of the lord's face by the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, when the reserve is full during the symbol change, the full display F is displayed. Then, even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again according to the full state of the hold (see FIG. 61 (C)). In other words, if the holding icons become full before all the holding icons whose display modes have been changed by the simultaneous change effect are consumed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again.

  The example of the winning order change machine described with reference to FIG. 58, FIG. 59, and FIG. It is an example.

  9 to 61 described above may be examples in one pachinko machine or may be examples executed in different pachinko machines.

  FIG. 62 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 62, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside a game table. That is, the game medium fired from the firing means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the firing means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, the total number of balls held, and the like) and other information is provided below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  FIG. 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing the main body 1001. In the center of the main body 1001, three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) each having a plurality of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 63) are stored. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, each symbol is printed on a band-shaped member at an appropriate interval at an appropriate number, and the band-shaped member is pasted on a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed other than the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 63) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided. It is configured such that a light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid pay line 1014. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three medals are activated and three medals are bet, five lines in which the rightward prize line and the upper right prize line are added become valid as the prize line. The number of the winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, Five lines, a down line and an upper right line, may be made effective as pay lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that notifies a player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert a medal) when the player has won a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, one when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, notifies that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the insertion of the medals can be performed electronically by the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and the insertion includes both. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In the slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process of performing a lottery to determine which of a plurality of types of roles has been won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light-emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light-emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bets, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, on the side of the operation key unit 1090, an effect button 1091 same as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is provided above the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (shown in the drawing) disposed behind the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it is sufficient if it can be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. For example, it is composed of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. In addition, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety of the display screen is configured to be visible to a player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may appear irregular. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, besides the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and the like, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means) ) And effect button 1091 (an example of a second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title or the like can protrude toward the front side. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 63 is at the initial position. When the display panel 1070 projects toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) similarly to the transmission unit 191, and is an example of an operation unit (for example, It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can be vibrated. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not be vibrated.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 157, other gaming tables (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning game machines such as slot machines) which can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 64 to 157 are used in principle only for the description with reference to FIGS. 64 to 157, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 157, the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk of a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, with a locking function via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 below the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) which can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish was opened. The door 108 with a ball storage tray includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored on the upper plate 126, a ball-pulling button 130 for discharging game balls stored on the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. The ball firing handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by operation of the player, and a production button A chance button lamp 138 that causes the exit button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the status of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a lower plate full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is provided.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds). It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed when the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 64, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 as viewed from the rear side.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when connected to a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game balls flowing into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 constituting a main control section 300 (see FIG. 67) for controlling the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub-board case 162 accommodating the first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 67) that performs the control processing related to the effect, and the payout controller 600 that performs the control processing related to the payout of the game ball ( (See FIG. 67) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by operation of a game clerk. And a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 67) for supplying power to various electric game machines. A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll.

  At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a “common symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs an effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in this embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game held (a general figure variable game described in detail later). In the present embodiment, the general figure variable game is a predetermined number. (For example, four) can be reserved.

  The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable game games (special figure variable game described in detail later) that are held. In the embodiment, it is possible to suspend a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “suspending” here means suspending the start of various determination processes (lottery process and the like) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is configured to perform notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and not to indicate the current symbol control state thereafter. I have. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state returns to the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off. Although the symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state may be any of a normal state, a time-saving state (electric support state), and a probable change state. It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In the present specification, description will be made using a word indicating a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the wording of the control state includes a concept of a so-called gaming state.

  Around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a general drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (not shown). When a prize is won, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 64 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the ball to be paid out to the player as a reward for winning may be referred to as “prize ball”, and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as “ball rental”, and “prize ball” and “ball rental” are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the general figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid is provided, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tuy). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty of winning the second special figure starting port 232. In other words, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the player wins the general figure changing game and the general figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Is possible (a winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable starting area is smaller than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the gaming board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200 on the player side. It is in a stationary state that matches the plane. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 becomes substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 keeps a closed state until a big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state is repeated. In addition, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. The variable winning opening may be any as long as the winning of the game ball can be achieved by passing or entering the game ball, and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the big hit symbol after winning the special figure change game, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Note that the ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The ball accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing its traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and receives a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. (The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), or the out port 240 without passing any of the winning ports or the starting ports, or only passing through the general figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a motion effector 224 is arranged in a region where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a door) are provided. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warping device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on the game nail 238, or the like, and a ball passing through the stage 244 enters the first special figure starting port 230. A special route 244a that facilitates the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move right and left, respectively, with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the respective inner ends, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the respective inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is the displayed decorative pattern. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 behind the lattice hole to be visible, or cover the sash part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the hole of the lattice may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 at the rear may be made completely invisible. Is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 64, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 66 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 indicating the specification of the gaming table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit incorporates two counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and a front frame door opening. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a first special figure display device 212 or a second special figure display device 214; A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general-purpose reserve lamp 216, the special-purpose 1 reserve lamp 218, the special-purpose second reserve lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc., and various types of driving for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, a blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. And store it in the register. Similarly, when receiving a signal indicating that a ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 also latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board 349. The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the game machine.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although the signal is configured to be transmitted, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246; a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246; a chance button sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136; A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the operation, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. Reads image data and the like stored in ROM 406 based on a signal from sensor circuit 428 and CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface, and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. are doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game frame lamp drive for controlling the game frame lamp 542. The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp driving circuit 530 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental game. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 has received prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls have been paid out. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. In addition, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open, and outputs an open signal. When outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 supplying the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls the control units such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500 and the discharge unit Although power of a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power path.

  Next, using FIGS. 68A to 68D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 fluctuating game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detecting sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. (Fluctuating game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats “all the seven segments lighting and one central segment lighting” “variable display of special figure 2” ( Special figure fluctuating game). When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Is elapsed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of the special figure may be performed continuously plural times.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 68 (a) shows nine types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure I". In FIG. 68 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols (“special figure A” to “special figure G”) are prepared as the special symbol stop symbols. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) big hit symbol, and is a 15R certain variable big hit pattern in which it is possible to expect a winning in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit pattern. Therefore, while it is possible to expect winning in five out of fifteen rounds, the remaining round is a real 5R probability variable jackpot symbol in which no winning is expected, and the “special figure C” is a 15R jackpot symbol. There is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and the “special figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds while it is expected to obtain a ball in one round. It is a real 4R-RUB in which it is possible to expect to obtain a ball in four rounds of the und, but not to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds. Fig. G "is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability change or hidden probability change in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a winning is expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit in a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). This is a big hit in which the player is inspired to determine whether or not a round in which it is possible to obtain a payout will continue when the third round or the ninth round) is reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure fluctuating game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. In addition, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is defined as a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to ordinary figures, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to special figures or a state related to ordinary figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the vehicle is in the power-supply state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the general figure, it is easier to win the general fluctuation game than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-purpose fluctuating game is 1/100 in the general-purpose low-probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the general-purpose high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (general figure change). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the non-electric support state (the electric chew open period is extended). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, the blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, a wing member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per prize to the normal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). By extending the power chew opening period or increasing the number of times the power chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is because a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls in a big hit game, and if the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced, a disadvantage may occur to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure change, the general figure change, the extension of the power chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the power chew is opened are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, game balls are less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is changed into a prize difficult state in which game balls are hard to enter and an easy prize state in which game balls are easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state (the normal figure high probability state) is continued until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and the “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, and after the big hit game to be performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure changing game is performed 100 times. Transition to the support state (low probability state in ordinary figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without an electric support ("Tokuzu G") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game is over. When the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  In this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hitting game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 keeps the open state for a maximum of only 0.1 second per operation. In addition, in the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) at the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (the predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If so, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 68 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing count and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning port 234 in the big hit game to which the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed and shifted. Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. 68 (b) shows six types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure f”, of which five special figures are big hits (“special figure a” to “special figure a”). E)). The "special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to obtain balls in all rounds of the round, and the "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot design, and is expected to obtain balls in eight of the 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds, and the “Tokuzu d” is a 15R jackpot design, and it is expected to obtain a ball in four of the 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a payout, and the “special figure e” is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second entrance sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting slot 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner, separately from the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of the decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying the real 5R probability variable jackpot (“special figure B”), the 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and the 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), the “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns of the same number other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 ") is stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R sure-change jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. −decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the royal pattern. A combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 1-decoration-decoration 1” or “decoration 4-decoration-decoration 4”) that is a decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”), which is the 2R big hit, is notified, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure f”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the decorative symbol variable display. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 68 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the ordinary figure. In this embodiment, there are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol, namely, a general symbol "Picture A" and a non-standard symbol "Primary symbol B". On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the general-purpose display device 210 displays all seven segments and one central segment. Performing the "floating display of the ordinary figure" (the ordinary figure fluctuating game) which repeats the lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, any one of the symbols "Picture B", which is different from the "Picture A", which is the winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 68 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as “figure display of ordinary figure”.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round decision random number, a special figure electric support decision random number, and a special figure design decision random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawing is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special maps stores a plurality of types of start information in a set in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 69 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission, setting of initial values, and the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in the WDT 314.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether or not the voltage value of the power Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. It should be noted that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port (output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). If the power supply does not return to the state before the power failure (the case where the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized) )), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 65 is turned on (indicating that an operation has been performed). Is determined, that is, whether or not the RAM clear is required. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register of 1-byte configuration whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not). When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the result of the checksum is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the (predetermined in step S115) instruction immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In the initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power restoration command, the normal return command returns to step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. Sent to one sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once about every 4 ms in the present embodiment). The unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (once) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (does not detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once about every 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including various ball detection sensors shown in FIG. It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals of the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt process is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) When the match is made with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the general figure starting port 228 Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 234, 226 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the first starting port sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting port 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing following the prize in the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the subsequent process of winning the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated. Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value are stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general winning random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round next time. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer updating process, the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation / stop display, a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end production period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning opening 234, 226 or the starting opening 230, 232, the value of the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. Read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In the winning reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information is acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here is stored as a set of start information in an empty area in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219 executed after step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 67 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicating that data is set) and the bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state updating process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting and turning off of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 are repeated. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes in addition to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 68 (c)) and the lost symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 68 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  In addition, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is on, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the setting area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the blade member 2321 in the open state. And the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general-state state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure variable game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on, as described later. When the general-figure losing flag is ON, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating. In the ordinary figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery processing, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the holding of the general figure changing game is suspended. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general-floor variation game is a winning or a non-winning by a random number lottery based on the random number winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made, and if a win is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to obtain a general-purpose timer random value from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained general-purpose timer random number value. One time for changing and displaying the figure is selected, and this changing display time is stored in the normal figure changing time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure changing display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in a general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is repeated. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R big hit flag is on, When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of the special map a, the special map b, the special map c, and the special map d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure f is on when the loss flag is on. The 7-segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), the 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and the losing symbol ( One of the symbols in the special figure f) is confirmed and displayed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings. If not, turn off the time reduction flag. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the existence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image that informs the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined prize effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. Is output in the RAM 308, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Is set to indicate the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and starts at the end of the opening / closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set to indicate the effect waiting period. Also, if the normal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the big hit game. Turns on the saved time reduction flag. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation game is shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state. Furthermore, the opening time of one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is more likely to be longer in the high-tumor state of probable than in the low-probability state of normal figure (electric tube spread). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric power spread is set is referred to as an electric support (starting opening winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable prize ports 234 are set in the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the jackpot game until the game balls enter the ball. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during the big hit increases due to the entry of the ball and the gambling property is increased, and this problem is solved.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is ON, the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) The non-operating state of the special figure 2 is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update processing) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state updating processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 this time. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is first performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special drawing 2 are not performing the variable game, and the special drawing 2 is in a non-operating state and the special drawing 2 is suspended. The process is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area, with the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more as a start condition. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 are not performing the floating game, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and the special figure 1 is suspended. Assuming that the number of variable games is one or more, the execution is performed using the first special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Also in these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable Even when the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of suspended special figure 2 variable games is one or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the reservation of special figure 1 variable games are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. The lottery is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variable game having a high degree of advantage (in this example, the special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over the special figure variable game having a low degree of advantage (in this example, the special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, there may be a case where it is easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The combination of the random number value of FIG. 2 and the random number value of the special figure 2) is acquired, and the ROM 306 is determined based on the random number value of the special figure 2 in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. A determination is made as to whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (hit / fail judgment) using the hit / fail judgment table stored in the table. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is used, and the like. A symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the result in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail judgment result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reserved number in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reservation of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority change is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started in preference to the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 priority change which is digested prior to the reservation may be used. In addition, without giving priority to any of the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage and the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, the special figure variable game related to the reservation of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be started at the opening prize. The starting opening winning order may be changed in order. In the starting opening winning order change, the upper limit of the number of reservations is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the upper-limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed in accordance with the state of one special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process and the special drawing related lottery process may be performed independently for each of the special figures 1 and 2 so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In the case where a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may display a plurality of special figure lottery results. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power restoration command, a RAM clear command, a pre-read result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, the information includes the number of the big change flag, the small hit flag, the missed flag, the special figure probability change flag, and the like. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes the device information, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the prize in the variable special prize ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of the special figures 1 and 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data includes the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the timer number selected in the 2-related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the values of various large hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above described special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as.

  In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in command data, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false notice) Prior notice information or no prior notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 subsequent to step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 subsequent to step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. And then enter the HALT state.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and preliminarily determines the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination processing, and determines the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result is stored in a prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 72A to 72C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 1 and the number of the special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, every time the special figure 1 prefetch number is reduced by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetch result of the highest rank (earliest) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted. Are processed such that the rank of the data is moved up by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 1 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch result is written in the next order of the data of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 2 and the number of the special figure 2 prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit, each time the special figure 2 prefetch number is decreased by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining data of the special figure 2 prefetch result are ranked. Are processed to be moved up one by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 2 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch result is written in the order next to the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank.

  In the special figure pre-reading process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is made, for example, by storing the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in the special figure 2. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and determines that the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303. If it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and, for example, a success / failure determination table and a special figure determination table used at the time of the success / failure determination, a special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is determined by the special figure 2 related lottery. A preliminary determination is made before the hit / fail determination processing in the processing (step S229). It should be noted that this preliminary determination process may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of determining whether or not it is correct.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the procedure moves to step S307.

  In step S307, main controller 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. Whether the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing or not is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, by storing the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, based on various flags in the RAM 308, it is determined whether or not a non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that non-electric support is not being performed (electrical support is being performed (normally high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not a non-electric support is being performed. However, it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and, for example, a success / failure determination table and a special figure determination table used at the time of the success / failure determination, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is determined by the special figure 1 related lottery. A preliminary determination is made before the hit / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this preliminary determination process may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of determining whether or not it is correct.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest empty area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In step S315, the pre-read result of the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-fetched without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. The copy is stored in the first available area. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In this embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the prefetch result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the prefetch result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the prefetch results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Also, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, prefetching is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and prefetching is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in advance. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-read result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-read notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not a non-electric support is being performed), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always performed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A illustrates an example of a state where the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 1 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to retention 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (a), "special symbol I" (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special symbol I" as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area "hold 2". (Outlier) is stored in the storage area “hold 3”, and “special figure A” (15R probability large hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 3”. (Out) is stored.

  FIG. 72B shows an example of a state where the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 2 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to reservation 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (b), “special figure f” (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 72 (b), a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 72 (c) shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), the storage area “hold 1” stores “undetermined” information instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stopped symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described stop symbol information, the result of the determination as to whether or not the information is valid, a variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined. The information can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, refer to FIG. 73 for the hit / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit / fail determination high probability table, and FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a hit / fail determination low probability table. When the special figure 1 is judged to be correct or not, the special figure high probability state is referred to in the special figure high probability table shown in FIG. 73 (a). 73 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated in the referred winning / failing determination table and the obtained random number, the winning / failing determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as the hit determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2, when the special figure high probability state is set, the special figure low probability state is referred by referring to the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 73 (a). In this case, a low-probability determination table shown in FIG. 73B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated in the referred hit / fail judgment table and the acquired random number, the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination.

  FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of order, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 73C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hit determination table and the obtained random number value. Then, the result of the special figure small hit lottery determination is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery hit / fail determination (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the hit / failure determination result, and a loss is generated with a probability of 63536/65536. The small hit is not selected when the result of lottery winning / non-performing judgment (lottery result) per special figure is special figure 2.

  Next, the stop performed on the basis of the result of the determination as to whether the drawing is determined in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 74 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (a) is referred, and the special figure 1 is determined based on the success / failure result of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, one of the special figures A to G is selected. When the result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and if the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

  When the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (b), based on the success / failure result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number, The lottery of the stop symbol of Toku-zu 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected. When the result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 75A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 75A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed. The effect control processing will be described later.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S409 to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In step S413 following step S411, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, the instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the various lamps 418, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 subsequent to step S417, a shutter control process is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interruption process (strobe interruption process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 75C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S601 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other update processing of the random number value for effect And so on.

  FIG. 75D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 stores information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input (Yes in step S709), The process proceeds to step S711. If not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many images of the scene have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 76A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S801. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. CPU 504 of second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, a lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from first sub-control unit 400 to effect movable body 224, this command is output to drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 76B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 76C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 subsequent to step S1001, an update process of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 77 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (a), the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not displayed here, a default background image described later is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) or not, and from above, a symbol change notification area for a general symbol and a symbol change notification area for a special figure 1 from above. , The symbol change notification area of the special map 2. While the symbol in the ordinary figure is stopped, the square figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the ordinary figure is changed, the square figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, a round figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is changed, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure 2 fluctuates, the triangle figure blinks or is turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position, but also has a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided.

  In the reserved icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1, a reserved icon representing reserved of Toku-zu 1 is displayed, and in the reserved icon display area 282 of Toku-zu 2, a reserved icon representing reserved of Toku-zu 2 is displayed. . The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 1 in addition to the number of lighting of Toku-zu 1 reserved lamp 218. In addition, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in the special map 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, the reserve icon on the right side is the older reserved icon, and the reserved icon is displayed vertically in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon becomes.

  In FIG. 77 (a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 77 (a), the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines in order to make it easy to see that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 77 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because In addition, in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208, the line defining the area is not actually displayed, but in FIG. Is shown by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line defining an area may be provided, or a line defining an area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure which is easier to win a prize in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special map is displayed on the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 77A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. An area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reservation icon of Toku-zu 2 is a rectangular, plain, white display mode, which differs from the display position of the reservation icon of Toku-zu 1 in addition to the display mode ( Here, the shape is also different, so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the order of the change start in the special figure display device → the start of blinking or turning off of the fourth symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the holding icon → the start of change of the decorative symbol. However, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 77 (b), the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol change is started in the first special figure display device 212, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. The pattern has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 77 (c), the movement animation of the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has been started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and the second hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

  In FIG. 77 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 77 (e), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of the decorative pattern has not been started. At the time when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be used until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 77 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 77 (g), an operation prompt notification image 136P for urging the user to press the effect button 136 within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the main character image. The change display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize from the fourth symbol 284 or the like that the special figure is changing. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 77 (h), the validity period has decreased, and in FIG. 77 (i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 77 (j), the reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, a character display of "CHANCE" is displayed on the right side of the main character image.

  In FIG. 77 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the user enters the reach state as shown in FIG. Although the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, there is a case where the reach state is not entered, but the entry may be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that is a trigger of a notice of the currently performed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 77 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, moves to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). A large image of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (n), and the duel between the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

  The reach state entry notice image 2071 may be not only a notice of entering a reach state but also an advance notice of evolving to super reach.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77.

  In FIG. 78 (p) following FIG. 77 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 78 (s). In FIG. 78 (s), the protagonist of the protagonist has won the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 78 (t), all of them are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Note that a background image different from the background image may be displayed instead of non-display. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-display or a different background image. In addition, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain disappearing, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for which the 15R certain-variable-big-hit is determined is stopped and displayed. Also, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 78 (v) is lit. In FIG. 78 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 78 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "probably big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached in FIG. 77 (l) with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination that results in a 5R probability variable hit, 5R normal hit, and 2R normal hit), a diagram in another case following FIG. 78 (t) In 78 (u '), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed. In FIG. 78 (v') subsequent to FIG. 78 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration" The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 78 (w ′) following FIG. 78 (v ′), a character image “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (here omitted) celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 79: is a figure which shows an example of the effect of another case following FIG.78 (q) in steps.

  In FIG. 79 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 77 (o) is continuing, and this animation continues to FIG. 79 (b). In FIG. 79 (b), the protagonist of the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 79 (c), as in FIG. 78 (t), the whole is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 79 (d), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are restored, and the fluctuating icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. Is displayed. Next, during the period of the fixed display of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, a deletion animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 11F, the erasing animation of the fluctuating icon h0 is started. In FIG. 10G, the erasing animation is continued, and in FIG. 10H, the fluctuating icon h0 is completely disappeared. Note that an animation for erasing the fluctuating icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, a preview icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 80A is a diagram illustrating a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. (C) is a diagram for explaining an example of a timing of digestion of a notice icon, and FIG. (D) is a diagram for explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice icon before change, and FIG. 81 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice icon after change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is partitioned into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a fifth notice icon display area YA5, and a sixth notice icon display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is a total of eight), it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area are different. The number of notice icons that can be displayed and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), a notice icon 16 of a hat having a hat pattern is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice box of a thousand boxes is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes consisting of symbols is displayed, a notice icon I10 of a fan consisting of a fan is displayed in the third notice icon display area YA3, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4 of the notice icon A notice icon I7 of a shuriken composed of a symbol of a shuriken is displayed, a notice icon 18 of a ribbon composed of a design of a ribbon is displayed in a fifth display icon YA5, and a sixth display area YA6 of a notice icon is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is determined based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed for one area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed for one area.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (c), for example. Is controlled to be This control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the display of the variation of the decorative pattern (the variation) shown in FIG. 80 (a), the notice icon I8 of the ribbon is digested, and then the notice icon I8 of the digested ribbon is displayed. A corresponding effect may be performed. After that, when the change is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and when the change display of the decorative symbol (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the digested shuriken may be executed. Thereafter, when the symbol change corresponding to Hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 (in FIG. 80A, the hold icon h12 has moved to the hold icon h11) moves toward the change icon display area 280. Is started, and the variation display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2) is started, and when 4 seconds elapse after the symbol variation is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars is digested, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon I9 of the thousand cars may be executed. After that, when two seconds elapse after all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan announcement icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan announcement icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the notice or the effect will be performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 has, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 80 (d). Is controlled to be increased by This control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 80 (a), a lord appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a lord effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. Is done. In this lord effect, an effect is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the change is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is started, a DJ effect is performed in which a DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the number of notice icons is increased. In this DJ effect, an effect is performed in which a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, after the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the lord-like effect is executed and the fan Is performed in such a manner that the notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous production is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decoration symbol variation start and temporary stop display is executed a plurality of times in one special figure variation display.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a big hit is greater than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a loss. For example, the number of notice icons that increase in the design change display that is a loss may be set to at most one, and the number of notice icons that increase in the design change display that becomes a big hit may be set to at least two or more.

  Next, the effect content corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the notice icons include those for which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear, and those for which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 81 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), a preview icon I1 for the first lord and a preview icon I2 for the second lord as shown in FIG. 81A. And a third button notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first lord's notice icon I1 is a reminder icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is displayed in white, and the reliability of the big hit is low. In addition, the notice icon I2 of the second palace is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the face of the palace is displayed in green, and the reliability of the big hit is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a reminder icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is displayed in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is one of weak to strong. The notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord become a predetermined change display timing (for example, the timing of an increase display of the notice icon). The icon changes to one of the post-change notice icons 81 (b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 81 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  As described above, the first icon notice icon I1, the second icon notice icon I2, the third icon notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing symbols which are the objects of prefetching. In some cases, and may function as a prefetch notice. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, there may be a case where a character notation is additionally displayed. When the notice icon I2 for the second palace and the notice icon I3 for the third palace are displayed, a “question mark” may be additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), a notice icon of a hat, a notice icon of a shuriken I7, a notice icon of a shuriken, and a notice icon of a ribbon There is a notice icon I8, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the clerk, and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo continuous production may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a goose pattern. In the pseudo-sequence production of the strong pattern, for example, as described later, when the pseudo-sequence production starts, the character of the number leader appears, but the display mode of the character with the number leader is different from normal (for example, the number of characters is aura). (In a wrapped display mode), thereby notifying that the reliability is high. Note that, for example, despite the fact that it is the second pseudo continuous production, the fact that it is the third pseudo continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is high. In the pseudo continuous production of the weak pattern, the appearance of the character having the leading number is displayed in a normal display mode, thereby notifying that the reliability is low. As will be described later, the pseudo continuous production of the gasp pattern is a production in which a pseudo continuous production is performed and a missing display is performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the degree of reliability is strong, “continuation” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. In some cases. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black letters with “continuation” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo continuous production may be performed without fail. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by a character of the Oniwaban (ninja), and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, there is a case where the effect of switching the running notice effect to the strong notice effect effect after the freeze effect is performed. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the big hit is low, a stop symbol notice for notifying a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, if the degree of reliability is strong, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is weak, “A” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be always executed. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The notification icon I8 of the ribbon is a notification icon imitating a ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the reliability of the big hit is high or low. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, an effect of shifting the background to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the change notice mode may be executed (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect of changing the displayed background from a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal game state to one of the backgrounds may be executed (stage change is weak). Direction). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in conjunction with the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, if the reliability is strong, "Steven" is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. In some cases. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is low, the “A” pattern may be displayed in black letters as “Steven”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be always executed. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousands-box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating a thousand-thousands box thrown by the character of the lord toward the peasant, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is performed. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notice, and thereafter the high-reliability strong cut-in notice is executed (the advancement of the notice). Direction). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the advance promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars box, if the big hit is confirmed, the “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the degree of reliability is high, "Advance" may be displayed in red or black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the “A” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is consumed, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notification effect may be executed. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by the princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed. When the announcement icon I10 of one fan is exhausted, the appearance of a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the jackpot is determined, or the premier reach in which the jackpot is determined is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after the out-of-reach display is displayed, and a resurrection effect that is a big hit is executed (resurrection effect). In addition, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the fan announcement icon I10, "blessing" may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted, one of the premier effect and the resurrection effect may be always executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, but the timing of digestion may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any of the weakest to the fixed big hit. When one second button notice icon I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation accepting period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation accepting period, the digestion display of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed by the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. , A notice icon I8 of a thousand cars and a notice icon I10 of a fan, and the corresponding effect may be executed. Alternatively, there is a case where any of the notice icons is erased and displayed without changing.

  In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned pre-change notice icon is changed to the post-change notice icon, the change display of the notice icon is performed. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the advance notice icon (the advance notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 81 (b): erasure effect). In this effect, it is informed that the change will be out of order. In other words, the notice is a gaseous notice indicating that the pattern has been determined to be out. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. In addition, even if the erasing effect is executed, a big hit may be caused.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 82 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, The drawing holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 77. For example, the display result of the fourth symbol is displayed by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. Note that the fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of the game board 200, and is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The fourth symbol display device 284a is, from the top, a general symbol variation notification area, a special symbol variation notification area of the special figure 1, and a symbol variation notification area of the special figure 2. While the symbol in the ordinary figure is stopped, the LED in the area where the square figure is displayed is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the ordinary figure is fluctuating or blinking. While the symbol in the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the special figure 1 is blinking or turned off. While the symbol in the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed. As described above, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position, but also has a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 82 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the first special figure display device 212 performs a symbol variation display, and accordingly, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a variation symbol display. At the same time, the fourth symbol display device 284a performs a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1. The notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

  In FIG. 82 (1), a change icon h0 is displayed in a change icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. In addition, both the reserve icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of these two special maps 1 are displayed in the default display mode (circular, blank and white display mode). Although the display of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted in this effect example, the second reserved icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2), the lighting number of the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and The number is shown to be three. Further, a third suspension icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold targeted for prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as described later. For the sake of convenience of description, hatching is given to the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched, but actually the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 is shown. The display mode (circular, unpatterned and white display mode) is adopted. The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 82 (4), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed, but no change has yet occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 82 (5), the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the reserved icon at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is an effect that is executed when it is determined to display a notice icon based on the result of pre-reading. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat being carried is displayed as the notice icon. An effect display for throwing toward area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative design display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the lord character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and expresses a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, by displaying the notice icon 16 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it can be said that the pseudo continuous effect is to be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (11) to FIG. 82 (12), a display in which the main character YM is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 1−decorative 4−decorative 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82.

  In FIG. 83 (14) following FIG. 82 (13), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the lighting of the fourth symbol is turned off. Not yet.

  In FIG. 83 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 83 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the main character YM has a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 of a fan.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (17), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (18), the notice icon I6 of the hat held and the notice of the thousand boxes An effect is displayed in which the icon I9 and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (19), the advance notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the advance notice icon second display area YA2 of the advance notice icon display area 285, and the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is displayed in the advance notice icon third display area. The notification icon I10 of the fan is displayed in YA3, and the notification icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 82 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (20), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the loss. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 83 (21), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and further, the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. However, the change has not yet occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 83 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to change the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed. A display in which the notice icon I6 of the worn hat is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 such as two notice icons I6 of the hats are displayed, for example, on the left side Although the displayed notice icon is preset so as to be digested with priority, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the advance notice icons to use may be determined at random, or the advance notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate, limited to the above.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 83 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of “Continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Is also good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice or the like. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing of FIG. 83 (26), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the display of “continuation”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (27). Then, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that the vehicle is in the non-reach state.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 83.

  In FIG. 84 (28) following FIG. 83 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the number leader appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is stopped and displayed on the right. The effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed, and the player is notified that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In the present embodiment, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again after the number character BC pushes up the right symbol. However, for example, the right symbol and the left symbol are the same decorative symbols (for example, “ A decoration state may be formed as the decoration 1 "), and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (29), the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the pseudo symbol symbol representing the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display moves at a low speed from above to below.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (30), as shown in FIG. Is performed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-sequence symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-sequence is to be executed. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol is framed downward without being stopped and displayed, the pseudo consecutive symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are out is stopped and displayed as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous production may be executed even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the second decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo consecutive effect has started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the reach effect has not been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (34), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 84 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of “Continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of “continue” at the timing of FIG. 84 (37), and thereafter, in FIG. In response to the digestion of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the chief appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect is displayed in which the stopped right symbol is pushed up, and the second pseudo consecutive effect is performed. Is notified to the player that the game may be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the number-leader pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from “decoration 1” to “decoration 1”. The decoration is changed to "decoration 2", a non-reach state is formed, and a display is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves from the upper portion to the lower portion at a low speed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo consecutive symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed, the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information “pseudo × 2” may be changed while the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed. In this effect example, after the number character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display including the character display is performed to inform that the pseudo-run is executed. In the present embodiment, in one symbol change display, the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the more easily a big hit is made. That is, the case where the preview icon I6 of the hat is digested only once and the pseudo continuous production is performed only once and the case where the preview icon I6 of the hat is digested twice and the pseudo continuous production is performed twice are different from each other. If two notice icons I6 are digested, it is likely to be a big hit, and only two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested. Thus, in the case where the pseudo consecutive production is performed three times, it can be said that the one who has digested three of the hat notice icons I6 is likely to be a big hit.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo continuous effect has started.

  FIG. 85: is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 step by step.

  In FIG. 85 (43) subsequent to FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Here, the reach production is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (44), the game reaches the above-described super reach (swordsman reach). It should be noted that the decorative symbol variable display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. An image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (44), and the duel between the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (45). The animation display of the scene starts.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (47), and above the notice icon I9 of the enlarged thousand cars, The character display of "promotion" for announcing the shift to the effect with higher reliability is additionally displayed. The character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or performed after the enlarged display. Is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing of FIG. At the timing of 85 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (49), the displayed reach effect is slightly darkened in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character of the lord appears in a cut-in display, A display for cutting out the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background darkens as shown in FIG. 85 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character "Which is too hot?" Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (53), a character display of "hit" is displayed to notify that a button effect is to be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button image 136a together with a button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (55), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 85 (56). It shows that the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 85 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the ornament symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 85.

  In FIG. 86 (58) subsequent to FIG. 85 (57), all of them including the notice icon display area 285 are temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 86 (59), the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Thereafter, for example, when two seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, a display in which the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit will be determined may be added below the enlarged display of the fan notification icon I10. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. May be performed after the display is enlarged.

  Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing of FIG. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 86 (63), the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols which fluctuate in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c respectively resumes, and a re-fluctuation effect starts. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-fluctuation effect is started.

  In the fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced and displayed. You.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 86 (65), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the big hit of “decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1” is determined is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, the “special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variable big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth design display device 284a, the fourth design (circular figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the above-described big hit game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is digested, so that the re-change effect is executed and a big hit occurs. However, the fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in the advance notice icon display area. In the case where it is not displayed at 285, the display result of the outlier may be derived without performing the re-fluctuation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect performed by digesting the notice icon I9 of the 1000 boxes is missed, this reach transition effect can be said to be a false notice effect. That is, when the notice icon I9 of one thousand cars is digested, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of the type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of the digested one thousand boxes is executed, the symbol variation display result Can be said to be missed. The same is true for the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I8 of the ribbon.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a description has been given of an example in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display which is the target of the look-ahead notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the announcement icon may be executed by digesting the notice icon. In this case, the number of notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be subjected to the prefetch notice and the number of the notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be subjected to the prefetch notice are made different. Or the same.

  Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 87 to FIG. 89 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing the notice icon. 87 to 89, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 87 (8a) to (10a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (10). In other words, in FIG. 87 (8a), an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9a-1), the notice icon I1 of the thrown first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (9 a-2), after the display of the first palace notice icon I 1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes, the timing shown in FIG. 87 (10 a) is performed. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who exploded changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the lord character YM succeeds in the increase display of the notice icon, and an effect display that gives a happy expression is performed. Even with this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 87 (8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 87 (8b), an effect is displayed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. When the effect button 136 is operated between the time when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the time when the first button notice icon I4 is used, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. The notice icon changes to one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize until the effect button 136 is operated, and thus the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the reliability of the jackpot is provided. May work to enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be disabled during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be disabled. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. If the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted, the notice icon that was to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the effect of digesting the notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation validity period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 ends without operating the effect button 136, the notice to be displayed is displayed. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. May be displayed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

  FIGS. 87 (8c) to (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8c), as in FIG. 82 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 87 (9c), a state is shown in which the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gasse increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. In addition, a gasket increase effect using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6 may be performed. For example, a notice icon with higher reliability of a big hit may be less likely to perform the gasse increase effect.

  FIGS. 87 (7d) to (9d) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 87 (7d) shows a state in which the lord character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 82 (7). After that, in FIG. 87 (8d), an effect display is performed in which not only one hat notice icon I6 but also three hat notice icons I6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It is to be noted that the effect display may be such that the display is not performed simultaneously but one by one.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, and the pseudo link is displayed. Since it is guaranteed that the effect is performed three times, it may be announced that the big hit will be determined. In addition, a notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and a notice icon with low reliability is easily displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d '), some or all of the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partial gasse increase effect or an entire gasse increase effect that goes out of the frame.

  FIGS. 87 (7e) to (9e) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (7), in addition to the notice icon I6 for one hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes and a notice icon I10 for a fan, a character YM having a notice icon I10 for a fan. Is moved to a predetermined throwing position and displayed. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest jackpot reliability may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest jackpot reliability may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. Only the information may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 87 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It is to be noted that the effect display may be such that the display is not performed simultaneously but one by one. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other. For example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. In this manner, in this effect example as well, the increase of a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed by one additional effect. Therefore, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice is improved by increasing the number of the notice icons at one time, and the expectation for the execution of the plural kinds of notices can be increased. There are cases.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9 e ′), some or all of the three notice icons thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. A partial gasse increase effect or an all-gasse increase effect that goes out of the frame from the left of the region may be executed.

  FIGS. 87 (12f-1) to (12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in FIG. 87 (12f-1), similarly to FIG. 82 (12), the decorative design is displayed while the hat preview icon I6 is displayed in the preview icon display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285. Has been done. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (12f-2), the decorative symbol of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. You. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, a big hit may be achieved. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 88 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (the display aspect of the character of Sabohani), the character YM of the lord changes the notice icon I6 of the hat to the advance notice icon display area 285. An effect display for throwing at is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the pre-read notice using the hold icon. Note that the effect of increasing the notice icon and the advance notice using the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 88 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and moves the production holding lamp 286 to a predetermined position (for example, (In the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208), thereby displaying the number of reserved items. The production holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emitting mode (for example, lighting in white), light emission of a prefetch notice Driving control according to an aspect (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 88 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be pre-read is hatched, but actually the first special figure 1 Similarly, the second holding lamp of the special figure 1 is lit according to the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 88 (8i) to (9i-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 88 (8i), as in FIG. 82 (8), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 88 (9i-1), a state is shown in which the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the display mode of the prefetch notice Is effected (pending change effect). That is, in the present embodiment, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat is not displayed as the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger of the start of the prefetch advance notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed as the reliability of the jackpot is higher.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (9 i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and uses the effect holding lamp 286 to hold the icon. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the holding lamp of the first special figure 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the prefetch notice.

  FIGS. 88 (8j) to (9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). In other words, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (8), the main character YM appeared and threw a preview icon at the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8j), unlike FIG. 82 (8). It is shown that a DJ character BY having a notice icon, instead of the lord character YM, appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat notice icon I6. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9j), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner, and changes the notice icon I6 of the hat he has to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Note that the number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, in one effect of increasing the notice icon by the DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance icon increase effect by the lord character YM, a second advance icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). By configuring, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 88 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (8), the lord character YM appeared and threw a notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon further appears. Of the character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8k), the DJ character appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (9k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000 boxes that the user has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ′), the DJ character passes behind the notice icon by arranging it on a layer behind the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if it were. Also, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is thrown by the thousand characters box so as to be overlaid on the notice icon 16 of the hat thrown by the character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may be performed. That is, an overwriting effect of the notice icon may be performed. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced.

  FIG. 88 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (121), a character notation corresponding to each of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the word "continuation", and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed with a letter of "promotion", and a letter of "blessing" is additionally displayed on a notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the third notice icon display area YA3, and a fourth notice icon is displayed. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the character of "chan-chan", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the fifth display area YA5 is "STENCHEN". Characters are additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed with "question" along with "continue". The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the contents of the announcement effect whose execution is later announced.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (12l ′) and FIG. 88 (12l ″), part or all of the characters added to the notice icon are changed to “question mark” to clearly indicate the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  In addition, the effect display in which the big hit is determined based on a combination of a plurality of advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed advance notice icons may be announced. As shown in (12l ″ ″), when three notice icons 16 of the hats to which the notation of “continuation” is added are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four simulations in which the big hit is determined are performed. The effect display including the continuous effect may be notified in advance. In addition, when the character added to the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when the character of “promotion” is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. May be a premier notice display for giving a notice that the result of the symbol change display when the symbol has been digested is a jackpot determination (or that there is a jackpot in the hold).

  In the above-described effect example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord character YM or DJ character BY. However, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 89, the effect of increasing the notice icon by displaying a decorative pattern is described. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 89 (A1), the decorative symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (A2), the notice icon design imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 89 (A2), a hat notice icon design imitating a hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of this hat, a character notation of "stock" is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in an increased manner. are doing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (A3), a display is performed in which the notice icon of the hat changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is a loss. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 89 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 89 (A1), the decorative symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. , The production of normal reach is started.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the first icon of the first lord imitating the notification icon I1 of the first lord is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the effect example shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the character notation of “stock” is added over the notice icon design of the first palace, and the notice icon design area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. At 285, it is notified that the notice icon is increased and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (B3), the display of the notice icon of the first palace changes to the notice icon I1 of the first palace and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is performed, as shown in FIG. 89 (B4), the decoration symbol of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is a loss. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It is needless to say that the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon 16 of the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol change display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may change during the execution of the next and subsequent symbol change displays, The change may not be made until the icon is digested. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 90 to 93 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In FIGS. 90 to 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 90 (38m) to (40m-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 84 (38) to (40). In FIGS. 90 (38m) to (39m), effects similar to those in FIGS. 84 (38) to (39) are performed, but in FIG. 90 (40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is operated at a low speed. The pseudo-sequence symbol appears as a fluctuating display, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-sequence symbol becomes the stop display position of the decorative symbol, the fluctuating display becomes high-speed, and the pseudo-sequence symbol is displayed. Is scrolled down to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-3), a temporary stop display is performed with a combination of decoration patterns of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 2”, and the fluctuation is displayed. Is stopped and displayed to inform that the result is a miss. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo continuous production may not be performed in some cases.

  FIGS. 90 (23n) to (24n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23n), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted is started. However, as shown in FIG. 90 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the consumed hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is without being performed is performed to notify that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 90 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23o), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted is started, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (24o-1). 90 (24o-2), and as shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2), a combination of decorative patterns that have been lost without starting pseudo continuous production ("decoration 1-decoration 2" in FIG. 90 (24o-2)) −decoration 2 “decorative pattern combination”), the swing fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is performed to notify that the result is a loss. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo continuous production may not be performed in some cases.

  FIGS. 90 (22p) to (23p) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (22p), if, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, in FIG. 90 (23p), the leftmost (notice icon) of the notice icon display area 285 The effect that the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1) is consumed may be performed. In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 90 (23p), an effect is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, in the order of stocking), but the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon stored later is consumed first, the big hit may be easily made, or conversely, the big hit may be hardly made. Further, the order of digestion of the notice icons may be determined regardless of the order of the stocks. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, and the reliability of the jackpot may vary depending on the order of digestion of the notice icons. You may make it. In addition, by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, the big hit may be confirmed to be announced. For example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon for a shuriken, A rule may be set such that when the notice icon I7, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are consumed in this order, the big hit is determined. As a result, the player may be provided with an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that will be a big hit, and may be able to improve the game motivation.

  FIG. 90 (24q-1) to FIG. 90 (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-1), the advance notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left, respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digestive effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

  FIG. 91 (Aa) to FIG. 91 (Ae) show an example of an effect in a case where the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed after the effect of digestion of the notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed, the stop symbol notice is executed, and At the timing indicated by 91 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the result of the display is notified. After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ac), the hold is exhausted and the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ad), the effect of increasing the notice icon by the main character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted and the notice icon I3 becomes blank. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, an increasing number of notice icons may be displayed in a notice icon display area that becomes blank as the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 91 (B) shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of notice fields have been consumed and a plurality of blank spaces are generated in the notice icon display area. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 have been digested, the character YM When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 that are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this manner, the display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. Note that when there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas in which the increasing notice icons are displayed is not limited to the above, and may be another order. 400 may be set in advance. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons to be displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing number of advance notice icons are displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 on the rightmost side of the blank display areas in the advance notice icon display area 285, at least six advance notice icons are displayed. It may be suggested to be displayed in the display area 285, or it may be suggested that the big hit has the highest reliability.

  FIG. 91 (C) shows an example of an effect in a case where the effect of digesting the notice icon and the effect of increasing the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol change display. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), while the effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, the lord's The effect that the notification icon is increased by the character YM is performed, and the notification icon I6 of the hat, the notification icon I9 of the thousand cars box, and the notification icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notification icon display area 285. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon that has increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display was executed. In this way, the digestive effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during the execution of one symbol change display. At this time, the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed and the period during which the increase effect of the notice icon is performed may overlap. Also, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, or the effect of digestion of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon And the effect of increasing the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area where the increasing notice icon is displayed may be a blank area at the time of the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the increase effect of the announcement icon is displayed. The area may be blank before starting.

  FIG. 91 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), before the effect of digestion of the notice icon is started, an effect of stimulating whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is determined whether or not the notice icon is digested by, for example, starting to fluctuate the notice icon to be digested. I'm trying to fuel it. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. When the digestion is not completed, the advance notice icon may be deleted without being digested, or the display of the advance notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the advance notice icon may be suspended. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 91 (59r), if the fan notice icon I10 is deleted without being digested and then erased, the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative patterns and the display result of the loss. That may be notified.

  FIGS. 91 (59s) to (60s) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 91 (59s), a notice icon I6 of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars box, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 1”, the fan notice icon is displayed among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. When I10 is digested, it becomes a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 91 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, a notice icon I6 of a hat) are digested, it loses as it is. May be stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative pattern of the above.

  FIGS. 91 (23t) to (32t) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (23t), in this effect example, a digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying digested notice icons is added to the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 91 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 91 (28t) to (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after digestion, and the corresponding effect (simulated continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed until the end. The timing at which the display of the notice icon in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is started may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, or may be before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started. It may be the same as the start of the digestive effect of the notice icon. In addition, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished or before the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished. Good, may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, may be after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the end of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon May be, at the same time as the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or to the digested notice icon It may be at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, may be deleted at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or may be in progress When the notice icon display area YA0 is deleted (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 are deleted in FIG. 85 (44), or only the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is deleted. Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are consumed during one symbol change display, the notice icon a in the notice notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that has been consumed first is the digestion of the notice icon A. It may be deleted after or at the end of the effect, and no notice icon may be displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be deleted at the same time as or after the start, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digestion notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. During the digestive effect of the notice icon B, for example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super-reach effect or a big hit effect, an island simultaneous effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased and the digestion notice is displayed. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

  FIG. 92 (Aa) to FIG. 92 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 92 (Aa), a hat advance notice icon I6 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 and the advance notice icon second display area YA2 of the advance notice icon display area 285, and a notice advance icon third display area YA3 is displayed. A notice icon I8 of the ribbon is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the fourth notice icon display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested. The production starts. Here, the start timing of the digestive effect of each notice icon may be simultaneous or different. In this case, the order of digestion of the notice icons may be set to the order corresponding to the execution order of the effect.

Thereafter, when the advance notice icon I6 of the hat and the advance notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ab), they are enlarged and displayed with character display. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is additionally displayed in the vicinity of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and a character display of “Stechen” is added in the vicinity of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, after the shoji is closed as shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side, the shoji is opened and the moon is opened as shown in FIG. 92 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. Note that during the execution of the stage change effect, the decorative symbol change display performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is changed to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to and zoom out.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ae), the ornamental pattern which has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area. Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed to push up the right symbol stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that a pseudo continuous effect may be executed thereafter. .

  In addition, in this effect example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icons are made different, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIGS. 92 (66u-1) to (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (66). That is, in FIG. 92 (66u-1), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and the big hit is notified, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is shown that there is an unannounced notice icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-3), the undigested game continues after the jackpot round game is started. Notice icon is displayed. In the present example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the execution of the big hit game, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the unexecuted notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect for informing that the certainty big hit is confirmed), for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in -3), during the execution of the big hit game, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the fact that the variable change big hit is confirmed is notified, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted, May notify that the 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when the other notice icons are consumed, for example, a meaning may be given to indicate that there is a possibility of being promoted. As described above, even if the same notice icon is consumed during execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. In this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be different. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. In addition, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. .

  FIG. 92 (Ba) to FIG. 92 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ba), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the preview icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed together with the preview icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 92 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be completely deleted when the stage change is performed. After the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be always deleted, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or the notice icon may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 92 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-2), a lord character YM2 holding a placard appears and is digested. The type of the advance notice icon is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (23v), the effect of using the notice icon of the kind notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is started. In addition, even when the advance notice of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or the notice icon of a type different from the previously announced notice icon may be digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 92 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, a notice icon that may be digested is highlighted to make the player pay attention to the digestion of the notice icon. Is also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the character BC of the chief appears and the pseudo continuous production is executed, and the other production icons are not executed. Is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested, the character BC is not appeared but the princess character appears. When an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (for example, the jackpot is determined), the jackpot may be determined when the effect is executed (so-called rule break).

  In the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested can be changed by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the big hit game is deleted when the game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit occurs in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, once the big hit game is started, it is temporarily hidden, and the return display is performed after the probable change state or the time saving state ends. It may be configured as follows. Further, the system may be configured not to carry over even after the probable change state or the time saving state ends.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which the content of the reach effect to be shifted to thereafter is notified according to the type of the notice icon to be consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, and the reach state is reached, a preview icon displayed in the preview icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-1), if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-1), the enlarged character BC2 of the number length is displayed. Appears, and then moves to the number reach that corresponds to the appearing character. In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-2), the maiden character YM3 displayed in an enlarged manner is displayed. Appears, and then transitions to the lord reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-3), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-3), the enlarged and displayed princess character HM is displayed. Appears, and then transitions to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot corresponding to the notice icon is corresponded, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach productions is configured so that the order of princess reach> lord reach> bancho reach. I have. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a maiden character enlarged and displayed after digestion of the hat notice icon I6 appears) (when a so-called rule break occurs). May be configured such that the big hit is determined. A plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a combined notice may be executed by appearance of a plurality of characters corresponding to the combined notice. In addition, a special effect for rendering a plurality of advance icons (a multiple-exclusive effect) may be executed. May be configured to increase the reliability.

  Next, a button effect that is executed after the second button notice icon I11 has been consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ba), the second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol change display is started, the state shown in FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 93 (Bc), a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter, and the effect button 136 is displayed. It notifies that the operation can be accepted, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect that is executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (Ca), a second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described button reach effect is performed, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 93 (Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 93 (Cc). Thus, the effect button 136 changes to the protruding button image 136b that is displayed in a protruding manner. That is, it is shown that the reliability of the big hit has been promoted to the button reach effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 95 is a step-by-step illustration of a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95, and FIG. 97 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 98 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 97.

  In FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 95 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon is the notice icon I6 of the hat, but has been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace. Since it is the same as FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 83 (14) except for the point, the description here is omitted. Also, as for the effect performed between FIG. 95 (14) and FIG. 95 (20), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon is all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace. 83 (15) to FIG. 83 (19) except for.

  In FIG. 95 (20), the display is stopped at the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 7−decoration 6−decoration 2”, and the result of the loss is definitely displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 has also been deleted.

  In FIG. 95 (21), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed, but no change has yet occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 95 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 95 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, when four notice icons I1 of the first palace are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance that the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the advance notice icons to use may be determined at random, or the advance notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 95 (25), a character display of "continue" for giving a notice that the pseudo continuous production is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon 16 of the hat. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (26), the character display of “continue” added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After the reduced display of I6, a display for moving to the original display position, that is, the first notice icon display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. When the digested notice icon is displayed again at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed so as to be recognizable as digested.For example, the display area where the digested notice icon is displayed may be displayed. The display may be grayed out, or character information “done” may be added. Alternatively, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the effect contents shown in FIG. 95 (27) to FIG. 96 (33) are as follows: the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon Since the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace, they are the same as in FIGS. 83 (27) to 84 (33). Is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (34), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace, which has been displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 96 (36), below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, a character display of "continue" for giving notice that a pseudo continuous production is to be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (37), the display of the character “CONTINUE” added to the advance notice icon I6 of the hat is erased, and the advance notice icon of the hat is erased. After the reduced display of I6, a display for moving to the original display position, that is, to the second preview icon display area YA2 of the preview icon display area 285 is performed.

  After that, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 96 (38) to (45) are such that the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively. 84 (38) to 85 (except that the notice icon displayed in the third icon display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 has been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace. 45), and the description is omitted here.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 96 (46), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the notice icon I1 of the first palace, which has been displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the displayed notice icon I9 of the 1000 boxes displayed, a character display of "promotion" for announcing a shift to an effect with higher reliability is additionally displayed. The character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or performed after the enlarged display. Is also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars box is deleted, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars box is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 96 (48). Then, a display for moving to the original display position, that is, the third notification icon display area YA3 of the notification icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 97 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. In this effect example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display indicating that a power failure has occurred, and then displays a strong reliable strong reach. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in the present effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (50-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character “Which is a Chance” on the darkened background. At the timing shown in FIG. 97 (50-2), the character display “NO” is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot?” Is displayed, then at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (52), the character display “NO” is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (53), a character display of "blow" is displayed to notify that a button effect is to be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button image 136a together with a button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (55), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. It shows that the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 97 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 97 (58), all of them including the notice icon display area 285 are temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 97 (59), the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  After that, for example, when two seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the first icon like the preview icon I1 displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4 is exhausted at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I1 changes to the notice icon I10 of the fan and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit will be determined may be added below the enlarged display of the fan notification icon I10. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. May be performed after the display is enlarged.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the preview icon I10 of the fan is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. The display for moving to YA4 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 98 (63), the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and a re-fluctuation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

  In the fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The decorative symbol change display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced and displayed. You.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 98 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot has been determined as “decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, the “special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variable big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth design display device 284a, the fourth design (circular figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the above-described big hit game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 99 to 101 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 99 to FIG. 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 99 (8a) to (9a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8a), an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I3 of the third palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first palace. Note that the same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second palace. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (9a), the thrown notice icon I3 of the third palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 99 (8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 99 (8b), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9b), a state is shown in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaseous increase effect using the notice icon of the lord.

  FIGS. 99 (8c) to (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8c), an effect display is performed in which not only the first notice icon I1 of the first palace but also three notice icons I1 of the first palace are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. It is to be noted that the effect display may be such that the display is not performed simultaneously but one by one.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (9c), the three noticed icons I1 of the first palaces are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon of the notice icon display area 285. It is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the third palace notice icon I3) is difficult to be displayed (not easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first palace icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this example of the production, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first palace) is increased by three, but a plurality of notice icons of different degrees of reliability may be simultaneously increased. Alternatively, the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be simultaneously increased.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 99 (9 c ′), some or all of the thrown three first palace notice icons I 1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern is displayed. A partial gasse increase effect or a full gaseline increase effect that goes out of the frame from the left of the display area of the display device 208 may be executed.

  FIG. 99 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). In other words, in FIG. 99 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the main character YM changes the first advance notice icon I1 to the advance notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the pre-read notice using the hold icon. Note that the effect of increasing the notice icon and the advance notice using the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 99 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). In other words, in FIG. 99 (8f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the retained number display is performed by the effect reserved lamp 286. In FIG. 99 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be pre-read is hatched and shown, but actually, the first special figure 1 Similarly, the second holding lamp of the special figure 1 is lit according to the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 99 (8g) to (9g-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8g), as in FIG. 94 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9g-1), a state is shown in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first palace acts on the reservation icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the reservation icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetch notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode of (1) is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first palace may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for the start of the prefetch notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first palace. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed as the notice icon with a higher jackpot reliability is higher. Good.

  FIG. 99 (12h-1) to FIG. 99 (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in FIG. 99 (12h-1), similarly to FIG. 94 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (12h-2), the decorative symbol of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. You. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, a big hit may be achieved. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIGS. 100 (8i) to (9i) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the main character YM appeared and threw a preview icon into the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8i), unlike FIG. 94 (8). The figure shows that a DJ character BY having a notice icon, instead of the main character YM, appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with a first palace notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (9 i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and changes the notice icon I 1 of the first palace to the notice icon 1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, in one effect of increasing the notice icon by the DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance icon increase effect by the lord character YM, a second advance icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). By configuring, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 100 (8j) to (9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the lord character YM appears and throws the preview icon into the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8j), the DJ having the preview icon further has Of the character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon of the palace notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9j), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ An effect display is performed in which the character BY places the notice icon I1 of the first palace held by the character BY in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 while flying toward the upper left corner. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if it is passing.

  FIGS. 100 (8k) to (9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the lord character YM has appeared and the notice icon is thrown at the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ having the notice icon is further added. Of the character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with a third palace notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9k), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ is displayed. While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon that the third icon of the lord has thrown by the character YM of the third person and is displayed in the first icon YA1 of the advance icon is displayed. In such a manner that the DJ character BY places the third-class notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1, the effect display is performed. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a notice icon with a low jackpot reliability on a notice icon with a high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced. The promotion effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 100 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (12l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are each accompanied by the character notation "question mark". For example, a notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon I2 of the second notice is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and a notice icon third display area. In YA3, a notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed, in a fourth notice area YA4, a notice icon I2 of the second palace is displayed, and in a fifth notice icon display area YA5, a notice icon of the third palace is displayed. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the character notation of "question mark" is added to each notice icon. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l '), the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified in text notation for some of the notification icons before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The notice icon I2 of the second palace displayed in the display area YA4 has the character notation of "question mark" appended thereto, and the notice icon after the change cannot be recognized. The notice icon I1 of the first palace, which is displayed on YA3, is indicated by a letter notation of "chan eyes" and is changed to the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third palace is displayed with the notation of “continuation” and is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. The notice icon I1 of the first palace, which is displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6, is marked with a question mark of "question mark" together with "continuation", and is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat will change to the notice icon I6 of the hat. I have. These character notations may be notified at once for all or a part of the notice icon, or may be notified gradually over time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l ″), all or some of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 are changed notice icons, and the changed notice icon is displayed. The corresponding character notation may be added only to the object.

  FIGS. 101 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the lord character YM appeared and threw a notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the notice icon is further provided. The appearance of the DJ character BY appearing on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 101 (9m), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and throws the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes held by the main character YM to display the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed on YA1. According to this effect example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten on the notice icon after the change. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced. The overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 101 (8n-1) to 9 (9n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to 9 (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the lord character YM appeared and threw a notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. In this case, the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon of the lord's notice icon I1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes thrown by the lord character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9n), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and throws the notice icon I1 of the first lord by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars displayed on YA1. In this manner, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced. The overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first palace) is consumed, the notice icon after the change is replaced with the notice icon before overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be configured to be higher or the reliability of the jackpot may be configured to be lower when the notification icon after the overwriting is digested than when the notification icon before the overwriting is digested. It may be configured such that the jackpot reliability does not change.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the notice icon changes stepwise. In FIG. 102, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two reserve icons (reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, indicating that the start of the two symbol changes is suspended. ing. Each of these two hold icons has a default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be pre-read, and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiments are the same. In addition, the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third sign is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), a lord-like character YM2 holding a placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The placard has a character notation of “change”, which indicates that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 102 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third palace changes to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. In addition, the display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both the notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 102 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, the display modes of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0. May change. As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the notice icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol, which is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. Then, in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two reserve icons (reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, indicating that the start of the two symbol changes is suspended. ing. Each of these two hold icons has a default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be pre-read, and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiments are the same. In addition, the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third sign is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a little princess chance effect is performed. The little princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-described general-purpose fluctuating game is executed. Princess Chibi Chance production is a production that imitates an Ami-Dakuji, where the character of Princess Chibi selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and moves to the goal point. This is to notify that an effect corresponding to the indicated icon will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is notified that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 will be long opened, and the When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, it indicates that the result of the running symbol change display is likely to be a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross icon Forecast that the fluctuation display result of the ordinary figure is incorrect.

  Furthermore, in the present example, when the goal point where the notice icon of the lord is reached is reached, as shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Is changed to the notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 has changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. In addition, the display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both the notice icons may change.

  When the character of Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 102 (D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed. One changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, has changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, the display modes of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0. May change.

  As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the notice icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case where the power is cut or the power is restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a step-by-step display example in the case of a power failure or power recovery while the notice icon is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two reserve icons (reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, indicating that the start of the two symbol changes is suspended. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. Further, in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 and the advance notice icon second display area YA2 of the advance notice icon display area 285, an advance notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed. A preview icon I9 is displayed, and a fan preview icon I10 is displayed in the fourth preview icon display area YA4.

  In FIG. 103 (B), a power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 103 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the instantaneous power recovery. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (C), a character display of “Please wait for a while” is displayed as a recovery display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the symbol variation display ends, and the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the special figure I which is the display result of the loss. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol change display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with “decorative 6-decorative 2-decorative 7” which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss. Then, when the power is cut off or the power is restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. Further, when the power is cut off or the power is restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or the power is restored, the pre-reading result information stored in the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 or the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 in the RAM 308 is the “undetermined” information. The configuration may be such that Here, in the case where at least one of the subcommands including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit includes the “undetermined” information, the “undetermined” information is included. Until all the held reservations are exhausted, the pre-reading announcement including the digestion effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may not be performed. Also, for the newly increased hold after the power interruption / recovery (the hold in which the pre-read result is stored), the pre-read notice is not performed, and the pre-read notice is performed after all the holds including the “undetermined” information have been consumed. Alternatively, for a newly increased hold after a power failure or power recovery, a pre-reading advance notice may be made before the hold including the “undetermined” information is consumed.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and illustrates another example of an effect of increasing the notice icon and another example of the effect of digestion. 105 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 104. 104 to 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 104, the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is on hold, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 104 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 82 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. FIG. 82 (5) is different from FIG. 82 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that, after the start of the change, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the final stop.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, different from FIG. 82 (6), the main character YM has a notice icon I21 of “house” in which the character of “house” is surrounded by a circle.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (3), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (4), the preview icon I21 of the “house” being held is displayed as a preview icon. An effect display for throwing toward area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (5), the notice icon I21 of the thrown “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (6). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Accordingly, the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a later-described family crest effect may be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 104 (7) to (8), a display is performed in which the main character YM goes out of the display area of the decorative design display device 208 in a frame-out direction. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by the moving animation, respectively. The suspended icon that has been displayed and is at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is the special icon 1 Is the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord character YM has a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is surrounded by a circle.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (12), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display to be thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (14), the notice icon I22 of the thrown “print” is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, after an effect display similar to that of FIG. 104 (6) is performed, an effect display similar to that of FIGS. 104 (7) to (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and reports the display result of the loss. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (17), the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative design display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (19) following FIG. 104 (18), the preview icon I21 and the preview icon of “house” displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 The display in which the notice icon I22 of “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously exhausted is started. That is, the advance notice icon I21 of “house” displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 and the advance notice icon I22 of “print” displayed in the advance notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 and The display moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" have been consumed. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is deleted may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued thereafter. In addition, the timing of starting the movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may be simultaneous, or the start of movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” may be the notice icon I22 of “crest”. The movement start of the notice icon I22 of “Crest” may be earlier than the movement start of the notice icon I21 of “Home”.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 21), the crest role object 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a family crest displaying an effect image to that effect. A drop performance is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (22), the game develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Note that the effect contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, as two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon") are digested, a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. Is configured. In addition, even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. Further, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be assured that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display, or a loss may occur. Further, the configuration may be such that a big hit can be made more easily when the family crest drop effect is performed than when the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display which is a big hit has a higher frequency of performing the family crest drop effect than the symbol variation display which is a loss. In addition, the design change display which becomes a big hit makes it easier to digest two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon") than the design change display which becomes a loss. May be configured.

  FIG. 106 and FIG. 107 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 106 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In FIG. 106 (a1), unlike FIG. 104 (5), the notice icon I22 of “Crest” appears before the notice icon I21 of “House” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 106 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a3), the notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display region YA2 of the “monster” displayed in the notice icon first display region YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of “Crest” displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of “Home” displayed in the second notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and The display moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and a reach effect has been started.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I22 of “Crest” and the notice icon I21 of “Home” are moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this arrangement order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1). You. At this time, the images are displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “houses” and “prints”) instead of the order of “prints” and “houses”. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “print” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the order of “print” and “house”. In this effect example, the structure described above is configured so that the above-described family crest fall effect is performed thereafter in both the case shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1) and the case shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2). For example, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of “house” and “crest” (that is, the correct arrangement order), a family crest drop effect is performed, and the arrangement order of “crest” and “house” (that is, If the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order, the family crest drop effect may not be performed. Also, when the notice icon is displayed in an enlarged order in the order of "Crest" and "House", the fall of the family crest effect is less likely to be started than when the notice icon is displayed in an enlarged order in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.

  FIG. 106 (b1) to FIG. 106 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest falling effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “print” is displayed. Is displayed without waiting for the advance notice icon I22 to be displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (b3), The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down. It is operating as if it is vibrating in the direction (flicking operation). At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “Creating a crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a crest drop effect may be performed is displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in an enlarged manner, while the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And the direction of the lord has started. At this time, the lord's character YM has a notice icon I22 of “Crest”. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b4), when the character YM of the lord moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 Is displayed in the second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the loss is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Also, at this time, the crest role item 224B temporarily retreats to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but does not retreat to the initial position and continues the fluttering operation. Is also good. On the other hand, the character display of “Creating a crest” is continuously displayed.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 106 (b6), the holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation on the decorative design display device 208, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the crest role item 224B that has been evacuated descends again and resumes the panning operation. In this effect example, when, for example, the notice icon I22 of “Crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest role item 224B descends, and FIG. A family crest drop effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. In FIG. 106 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “monster” notice icon I22 displayed later is consumed. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the “print” may be stocked, but may be digested without stocking.

  FIG. 106 (c1) to FIG. 106 (c2-3) show another example of the effect of the notice icon digestion effect. In this effect example, a state is shown in which a background notice in which the background changes due to digestion of the notice icon is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “don” in which the character of “don” is surrounded by a circle is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, a “Princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “Princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and a “Grandpa” notice icon I33 in which the character “Princess” is circled is noticed. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  In FIG. 106 (c2-1), a background display state after three notice icons of the “donor” notice icon I31, the “princess” notice icon I32, and the “grandfather” notice icon I33 have been consumed is shown. ing. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the face of the old man is up from the left side of the display screen and a face of the lord. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image of the princess face are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of “dono”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” are consumed, the reliability of the symbol change display to the big hit is displayed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that is highest. Further, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. For example, the notice icon I31 of “dono”> “princess” May be set to have the highest reliability when digestion is performed in the order of the notice icon I32> the notice icon I33 of “grandfather”, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability for the big hit can be set as appropriate. .

  In FIG. 106 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of “dono”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image in which the princess's face is up from the left side of the display screen and the old man's face are displayed. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three advance notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "dono", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are consumed, the symbol change display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the reliability is lower than when three notice icons are consumed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” are digested out of the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of "Princess" and the notice icon I31 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" may be digested. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "dono" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are digested, "dono" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I31 and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested. And when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  In FIG. 106 (c2-3), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of “dono”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa”, only the notice icon I33 of “grandpa” The background display after the is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes the background display in which the image of the face of the old man is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three advance notice icons of the advance notice icon I31 of the "lord", the advance notice icon I32 of the "princess", and the advance notice icon I33 of the "grandfather" is consumed, the symbol change display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is lower than the reliability when the two notice icons are consumed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” has been digested out of the three notice icons. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notice icon I31 of “dono” has been digested. Alternatively, the “Princess” notice icon I32 may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “dono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon of “grandpa” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case where the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of “Princess” is digested than when the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” is digested. These may be set, but these can be set as appropriate.

  In addition, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two icons may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the type of the notice icon to be displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “dono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or “grandfather” Is higher than when the notice icon I33 is displayed, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is greater than when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is displayed. May be high, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of “dono” and the notice icon I32 of “princess” are displayed, the notice icon I31 of “dono” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa” are displayed. Also, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case where the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "dono" and that of "grandfather" are displayed. When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than when the notification icon I32 of "princess" and the notification icon I33 of "grandfather" are displayed, but these may be set appropriately. can do.

  Also, in this effect example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is configured to be displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. May be performed, or the background display may not change. In this case, the fact that the big hit is fixed may be notified as a so-called rule break.

  When three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol change display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the display order.

  Further, in this example of production, when the notice icon I31 of “lord” is digested, the character of the lord appears and the reach of the lord is started, and when the notice icon I32 of “princess” is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the “grandfather” notice icon I33 has been consumed, the grandfather character may appear and the grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 of “Grandfather” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, the character of the grandfather and the princess appear and the grandfather & princess reach is started, and the notification icon of “Dono” is displayed. When I31 and the princess notice icon I32 are digested, the lord character and the princess character appear, and the lord & princess reach is started, and the "princess" notice icon I31 and the "grandfather" notice icon When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear, and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. When the notice icon I31 of "do", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are digested, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather appear, and Princess & grandfather reach may be started. In this way, a reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed by digesting these notice icons is not limited to the above-described notice of the reach effect and the background display. Other notices (for example, various notices such as characters that increase the notice icon) may be made. The effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (eg, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. The effect by the corresponding light emitting pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 107, an example in which an effect may be performed when the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested and when the notice icon I22 of “monster” is digested may be performed. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “print” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by "decoration 1", and a reach effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (d2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only the “house” notice icon I21 of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “crest” notice icon I22 is digested. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, a state in which the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to a chance symbol which is a special symbol is shown.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance symbol, or as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), the family crest together with the effect image is displayed. A family crest drop effect of dropping the accessory 224B may be performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the game may shift to the swordsman reach described above. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the crest role item 224B without displaying the effect image, the process may shift to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the swordstop reach without performing the drops of the crest role product 224B. The transition may be made. Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of "house".

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the process may shift to another super reach (a family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decorative 1-chance symbol-decorative 1” and then at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (d4-4). In the decorative design display device 208, a character display of “Crest Challenge” indicating that the process has shifted to the Family Crest Challenge Reach is performed. The first decorative symbol fluctuates while maintaining the combination of “decorative 1-chance symbol-decorative 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 107 (d5-4), in the decorative design display device 208, the appearance of the lord character YM pulling the “monster” notice icon I22 with a rope is shown, and the “monster” notice is displayed. The fact that the icon I22 is attracted indicates that the expectation for the big hit is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4), when the main character YM succeeds in drawing the notice icon I22 of “print”, the family crest role item 224B falls as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “print” has been successfully digested. After the family crest drop effect is performed, the process moves to, for example, the swordsman reach described above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the lord character YM may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the "print". In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the process may shift to the swordsman reach described above. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be made lower than in the case where the pull-in of the notice icon I22 of “print” is successful. Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the lord character YM breaks and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of “Crest” fails, the state is changed to FIG. 107 (d7-4b). As shown, the loss result may be displayed as it is. It should be noted that the same may be applied to a case where the notice icon I22 of the “print” is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that the family crest drop effect is more likely to occur when the “print” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse is also possible.

  Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned “house” notice icon I21, “monster” notice icon I22, “dono” notice icon I31, “princess” notice icon I32, and “grandpa” notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon of gasse that resembles the icon, for example, a notice icon of “U”, a notice icon of “Shark”, a notice icon of “Old”, a notice icon of “Minister”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "shark" are digested, the crest drop effect may not be performed, or the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "crest" may be digested. The crest drop effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the notice icon of “house” and the notice icon of “shark” are digested than when the notice icon of “house” is digested. In addition, the notice icon of the gasket such as “Shark” may be changed to the notice icon of “Crest”.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined effect is performed by satisfying a requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more characters may be used in this effect example. For example, a notice icon of “suspect”, a notice icon of “similar”, and a notice icon of “ren” When three of the icons are digested, a pseudo continuous production may be performed.

  In this example of production, for example, when the user wants to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”, when there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285, , The notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may not be displayed. In addition, only one of the advance notice icons I21 and I22 of the "house" and the advance notice icon I22 of the "monster" may be displayed. In this case, the advance notice icon that cannot be displayed is displayed as the advance notice icon. The display may be increased when a space is generated in the area 285, or may not be even used in the first place when no space is generated in the notice icon display area 285. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be used as it is.

  If the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" have been exhausted and there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed, for example, "house" When the notice icon I21 of "?" Is digested, the effect of digesting the notice icon I22 of "Crest" may be performed together, or the effect of digesting only the notice icon I21 of "house" may be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner, and illustrates an increase effect of a notice icon and a digestive effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in a stepwise manner. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display unit 212, the second special figure display unit 214, the general figure display unit 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 108 (e1), the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is a holding icon that is a target of the prefetch notice, and its display mode is another holding icon (for example, the first holding icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is in a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any of the display areas. In this effect example, the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice, shows a state in which various parts are added. In FIG. 108 (e1), the hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281. The second hold icon h12 shown constitutes a first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), a state is shown in which the unscrupulous merchant character EC is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating the head of a snowman.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the unscrupulous merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the main character YM has a third notice part P3. The third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket put on the head of the snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e3), in the decorative design display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant goes out of the frame and the eyes and the mouth are drawn in the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e4) after the main character YM moves and displays to the predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. Is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, the main character YM is framed out in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 104 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 108 (e <b> 6) shows a state in which the display result of the loss is derived, and one of the reserved variable displays of the special figure 1 is digested to start the symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the display mode of the hold icon which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is more reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a display mode with a high degree. In addition, a big hit announcement display in the running symbol variation display is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e <b> 7), variable display of the symbol has been started in the chance roulette display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the third notice part P3 has been digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is a display mode of a snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. The DJ character BY has a fourth notice part P4. This fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. And the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner of the display screen and moves the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P2 in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the second display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the symbols are still displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e10), a display result in which the character “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of the snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the trunk constituting the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 108 (e11 ′), the fifth notice part P5 is not immediately mounted, and the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 where the third notice icon P3 was once displayed. The information may be temporarily displayed (stocked) in the display area YA1. In this case, instead of displaying the notice icon in the first display area YA1, the notice icon may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (e12), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” and loses. Is displayed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this effect example, the change icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the fourth notice part P4 has been consumed. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 which is a display mode of a snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the change icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the change icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman is displayed. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. If the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the change is highly reliable to the big hit.

  The fourth notice part P4 is not limited to being displayed during normal symbol change display, and may be attached, for example, when a super-reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 108 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 108, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the swordsman reach, the fourth notice part P4 is digested and attached to the change icon h0 in the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e15-2). You may make it. Here, since the fluctuating icon h0 shifts to the super reach, the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 frame out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-read notice.For example, the displayed notice parts are consumed, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. A display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. Also, when the displayed notice part is consumed, it is attached to the hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading, it functions as another pre-read notice of hold, or it is attached to the floating icon that is not the target of pre-read. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step by step a modification of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestion effect step by step, and FIG. 110 is a figure which shows the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 step by step. 109 to 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is a target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 The default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11. Further, FIGS. 109 to 110 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub-display device are provided. . Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is located at the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Partly overlaps the front side. The first decorative symbol display device 208A displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 and displays a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed large over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second decorative symbol. Decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 109 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord effect is started. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the lord character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area where the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. In addition, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icons can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the preview icons are displayed in all of the four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is displayed, and it is notified that the preview icons can be stocked. For example, for example, every time the display area being displayed becomes full with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas become full with the notice icon, May display all remaining four display areas that were not displayed. Further, when the lord character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are full of notice icons. In the case where the lord's character YM has one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is set when the lord's character YM performs an action of throwing the notice icon. May be increased, or the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the lord character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by three when the action of the lord character YM throwing the notice icon is performed. Alternatively, all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. In addition, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icons can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icons are displayed in all of the four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice) including four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. Icon display area), and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) including four new display areas in which no notice icon is displayed is newly displayed, and the second notice icon is displayed. A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. In addition, the number of the preview icons displayed in the preview icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the notice icon stock area is displayed in place of the notice icon display area 285. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, there is a case where the pre-reading notice can be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (3), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward is performed. In this effect example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the main character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notification icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon may not be straddled between the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. For example, the first decorative symbol display device The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (6). In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression. Thereby, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285A, thereby informing that there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous appearance will be executed in the future. Thereafter, the lord character YM moves out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 109 (7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of performing the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 109 (8), the first decoration symbol display device 208A displays “decoration 7-decoration 6”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as before, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display device 212, as shown in FIG. 109 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the moving animation. The suspended icon that was displayed and was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 109 (10), the first preview icon in the preview icon display area 285A of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. A display in which the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. When the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and is then enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (12). Is done. The timing of switching from the display including the preview icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display is changed to the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 109 (11). The timing may be a timing at which the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or a timing at which the notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

  In FIG. 110 (13) subsequent to FIG. 109 (12), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon 16 of the hat. Note that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of “continue” is additionally displayed, or “ The timing may be the timing after the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing of FIG. 110 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of “continue”, and the notice is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The display including the icon display area 285A has been switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed over the two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that the vehicle is in the non-reach state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the number length appears, and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, an effect display in which the number character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the stopped right symbol is displayed. It informs the player that the pseudo continuous production may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the number character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 110 (16), the number character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display across” is displayed in cooperation with each other on the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the display may be performed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display region of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, a display for moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (18), a display is performed in which the pseudo continuous symbol enters the frame from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B and moves downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (19). Thereafter, for example, a pseudo continuous production is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are diagrams showing step by step another modification example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 113 is a diagram of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestion effect step by step. 111 to 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation function The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, the hold icon which is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  FIGS. 111 (a1) to (a7-2) have the same configuration as those shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The difference is that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be able to overlap with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and a hold icon h11, h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed large over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, and thus description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208A derives and displays the hat notice icon I6 in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps substantially the center on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image that surrounds the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B stands out. Note that the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 111 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 109 (2) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and the stop display is performed in the combination of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2” which is the result of the loss. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not deleted, but may be deleted at a timing before the end of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. Also, in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the first decorative pattern is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be easier to recognize that the notice icon is stocked. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during the symbol stop display. In addition, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interrupting the symbol stop display and the symbol change display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), even after the hat advance notice icon I6 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B keeps the state of being lowered until the symbol change display in which all the preview icons displayed in the preview icon display area 285A are exhausted, but at what timing Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be set as appropriate. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the loss, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” Is stopped and displayed in combination. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed at the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 111 (a6-2) illustrates a state in which two holdings have been exhausted, and the symbol variation display, which is the object of prefetching, has been started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative symbol is changed. The display has been made.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged as shown in FIG. 111 (a7-2). Then, the image is projected from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon 16 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, below the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous production is performed is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily recognized by the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in a lowered state until the symbol change ends.

  FIG. 111 (b1) to FIG. 111 (b4) show, in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display number display at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. The notice icon display number display device 288 is constituted by, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) in which the notice icons are displayed.

  FIG. 111 (b1) to FIG. 111 (b3) have the same effect contents as FIG. 83 (17) to FIG. 83 (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, A state in which the numerical value changes in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. That is, in FIG. 111 (b1), since only one advance notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, “01” indicating the number is displayed on the advance notice icon display number display device 288. I have. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b2), the lord character YM is throwing three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand cars, and a notice icon I10 for a fan). Has not yet been displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, the value indicated on the advance notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (so-called gaseous display) may be displayed. Then, when the above-mentioned three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (b4), when the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of advance notice icons is decreased by one, the advance notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. The timing of decreasing the value of the notice icon display number display device may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or may be the notice icon. It may be the timing after digestion. As indicated by the dashed line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is consumed, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this production example, the number of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments, but, for example, an operation by a light emitting unit such as an LED or a movable unit such as a production movable body, A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a voice, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device in which a preview icon display area 285 is displayed, and other devices). The number of notice icons to be displayed may be notified by a decorative design display device or the like.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D), similarly to FIGS. 109 to 110. However, they differ in that they use display devices of the same size. In FIG. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 112 (c1), the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is to be held. The mode is a default display mode, for example, like the first hold icon h11. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C. They are arranged so as to substantially overlap. Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, a special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and a special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are reserved. "2" and "0" are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 112 (c1). At the timing indicated by, the decorative symbol is being displayed for change. In the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chance roulette display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed. It is shown. Also, the background display is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 112 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208D displays the first decorative symbol. The display device 208C is lowered to a position covering the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the advance notice icon display area 285B, and is derived and displayed in the advance notice icon first display area Y1 of the advance notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C changes the display mode to the notice icon display mode. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed.

  In FIG. 112 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, in the first notice icon first display area YA1 and the second notice icon display area YA2, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, and in the third notice icon display area YA3, a notice icon I7 of a shuriken is displayed. . At the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c3), since the number of suspensions is one, "1" indicating that fact is displayed in the special figure 1 second suspension number display H1.

  FIG. 112 (c4) shows a state where the notice icon I7 of the shuriken has been digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of the chance is performed by the notice icon I7 of the shuriken being consumed. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, as shown in FIG. 112 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the losing is a chance and informs that the symbol variation display which is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, by displaying this chance, a pre-reading notice is given.

  FIG. 112 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is foretelling that the second pseudo consecutive notice is performed. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (c9), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the second hat, the number character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped and displayed. The effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is notified that the second pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the number character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a preview icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes, but large symbols and small symbols are displayed. However, only the size may be changed so that the display mode is the same.

  In addition, in this effect example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Alternatively, both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may move in the directions in which they are separated from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device may be moved. When the device 208D is separated, the accessories arranged on the back side may be configured to be visible, and further, the accessories may be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 112 (d) shows an example in which three decorative pattern display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 112 (d), a first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and a second decorative symbol display disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. In addition, all three decorative design display devices may be the same size.

  The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (d), a notice icon 16 for a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and in particular, a notice icon second display area YA2 Is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F from the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In the third notification icon display area YA3, a notification icon I9 of a thousand cars is displayed, and in the fourth notification icon display area YA4, a notification icon I10 of a fan is displayed. The decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for one symbol row. That is, the left symbol display region 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative design display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 113 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 113, a first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and a second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by a third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same length in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction as compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The second decorative symbol display device 208I has a frame portion protruding from the upper edge, the lower edge, and the left edge, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper edge, the lower edge, the right edge, and the like. Each has a frame portion projecting therefrom. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, The two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can perform a display as if one screen is displayed, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

  Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 113 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 85 (47), and covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. This shows that a swordsman reach is taking place. That is, in FIG. 113 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of a thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and it is notified that the effect will be shifted to an effect with higher reliability. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in directions approaching each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. State. At this time, the reach transition effect described above with reference to FIG. 85 (49) is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been performed is slightly darkened over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect that is being performed is performed. A display for cutting the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e3) to FIG. 113 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated into a display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is received. Is notified and the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, a variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is being performed.

  Thereafter, when the production button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 113 (e7), "decoration 1-decoration 2-" The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the ornament symbols of "decoration 1".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e8) to 113 (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. Then, it is rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, The display of the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 1” is started over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” that fluctuates. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, and is derived and displayed as a loss result.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e11-2), the display in which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. Thus, even if the notice icon is consumed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced form on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and re-variable display is performed. Thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1—decoration” 1-decoration 1) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 113 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 113 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed over the third decoration symbol display device 208J, the first decoration symbol display device 208H, and the second decoration symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the big hit display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 113 (e7 ″) shows a configuration in which when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. It shows an example of the effect in the case of being performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 113 (e3) to FIG. 113 (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also It is also possible to make it rotate integrally with. In this case, for example, a mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and a mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can be rotated in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 7E is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are performed. The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 113 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208I Each of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the horizontal widths thereof are uniform.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another modification example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 114, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and has a predetermined lens cut in a transmission region of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission area has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can be seen to emit light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the first-layer panel disposed on the near side has a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is disposed on the back side of the first-layer panel. The second layer panel has a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that in FIG. 114, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the panel of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, but may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of a single layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. Further, in FIG. 114, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 114, the hold icon which is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is a default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 are displayed. In the suspension icon display area 281, a change icon h0 and suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 108, and thus description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern simulating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 114 (f2-1), a dark effect display and a stock effect of a notice icon by light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (turns off), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative design display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative design display device 208 is finished. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed while the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. It may be made to be performed.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides light. The light plate IL is rotated 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction to emit light corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL so as to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured separately from the first layer panel and the second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layer may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, thereby simulating the future. It has been announced that the continuous production will be performed.

  FIG. 114 (g) shows a state where the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed. As shown in FIG. 114 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 114 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (prior to the execution of the stock effect of the notice icon). This shows a state in which a notice is given in advance. As shown in FIG. 114 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, symbol variation display is performed in a chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern simulating the notice icon I6 of the hat. Is announced in advance.

  FIG. 114 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing, the light guide plate is displayed. The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the IL emits light to form a pattern simulating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel also emits light to simulate the effect image. Also, a notice icon digestion production is performed so as to make it appear. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be made to stand out.

  FIG. 114 (j) shows another example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (j), in the decorative design display device 208, after moving the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The display is enlarged to fill the entire screen, and at that time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby performing the effect of notice icon digestion. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, but may be displayed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of another effect of the notice icon digestion effect. 115 (1) to 115 (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is replaced by the notice icon I31 for the drink instead of the notice icon I10 for the fan. 85 (44) to FIG. 85 (54), only parts different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85, and description of common parts will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced in accordance with the effect content. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (1), in the decorative design display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the effect to be produced will be changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 115 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 115 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image of sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the liquid image disappears, a projecting button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is at the projecting position is displayed. At this time, the state is a state before the start of operation reception of the effect button 136.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (17), as shown in FIG. 115 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter decreases. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has been started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the projecting position may be the same as the timing at which the projecting button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), or the projecting button image 136b. May be a timing before the display of is displayed, or may be a timing after the projection button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestive effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. In this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In addition, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, it is illuminated (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period. Lighting (for example, lighting in red) may be performed in such a manner as to notify the user.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing step by step an effect example using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 116 (a1) to FIG. 116 (a3) show that when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. I have. FIG. 116 (a1) shows a display similar to that of FIG. 104 (1), except that a staging movable body 224C imitating a placard with a character display of “STOCK” on the right side of the decorative design display device 208 is provided. It is arranged to be hidden behind 206.

  FIG. 116 (a2) illustrates a state in which the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to a visible position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that any one of the plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative design display device 208, or the notification may be performed by sound or lamp. Alternatively, a plurality of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the type of the notice icon, and the type of the notice icon stocked according to the type of the appearing effect movable body 224C may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 116 (a3) shows a state where the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  In FIG. 116 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable about the depth direction as rotation axes are respectively arranged near the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208. More specifically, near the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224Da with the character "Large", the fifth effect movable body 224De with the asterisk symbol, the "board" Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and near the lower part of the decorative design display device 208, a third effect movable body 224Dc with the character “振” is attached. A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with the character “Mai” are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons (stocked) displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd are provided. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the rotation of the rendered movable body of the digested number may be stopped, or the number of rendered movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stored notice icons may be rotated. Is also good.

  FIGS. 116 (c1) to (c6) show a state in which the effect of the prefetch mode has been notified by operating the effect movable body 224. In this effect example, a special training notice icon I41 may be displayed as a notice icon. When the special training notice icon I41 is exhausted, the mode shifts to the prefetch mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 116 (c1) shows a state where the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I41 of the special training displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and a state of moving to the center of the display screen is displayed. Note that an effect movable body 224 imitating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special-reading notice icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (c2), in the decorative design display device 208, the character display of “preparing for special training” is displayed on the right in the band-shaped scroll display area. Is scrolled to the left. As a result, the player is notified that the mode has shifted to the prefetch mode. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, the initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the position (first position) that covers the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. (A pre-reading operation) is performed. The prefetching operation by the effect movable body 224 temporarily returns to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Also, during execution of the prefetching operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the forearm does not operate. Only the unit 224b may operate.

  FIG. 116 (c3) illustrates a state in which two “decorations 1” are aligned and a reach state is formed during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the target of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continuously performed.

  FIG. 116 (c4) shows a state where the special training reach as a super reach effect has been started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “preparing for special training” is finished, and the character display of “start of special training” indicating that the special training reach has started is performed. Also, after once returning to the initial position, the effect movable body 224 moves the upper arm 224a from the initial position to the maximum movement position, as shown in FIG. 116 (c5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (c6). Then, the forearm portion 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon in a stepwise manner. It is. Note that in FIG. 117, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 117, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is a target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 The default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 117 (1) is a display similar to that of FIG. 104 (1) described above, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6.

  In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (3), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, but the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is not thrown yet, and FIG. 117 (4) As shown in the figure, in a state where the main character YM stands by at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 117 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by the moving animation, respectively. The suspended icon that has been displayed and is at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is the special icon 1 Is the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The main character YM is still waiting at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, a notice that the notice icon is displayed is given, but the notice icon is stocked. However, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. It should be noted that, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching is suspended, a notice is given that the notice icon will be displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but a so-called gaze notice that does not display the notice icon is performed. You may. In this case, for example, the main character YM may end the display before the variable display of the symbol to be pre-read starts, and, for example, immediately before the symbol variable display to be pre-read, The display may be terminated at the timing at which the result of the performed symbol variation display is derived. In addition, the display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, ends. For example, a super-reach performed during the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading starts. The display of the main character YM may be ended beforehand. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the main character YM may be displayed continuously after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, in a state where the main character is in a standby state, if a big hit occurs in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing of deriving the big hit symbol after the super reach (for example, (During swing fluctuation display), the standby display may be continued with the lord character holding a notice icon, or may be deleted.

  After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are performed in FIGS. This is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 117 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the loss is determined. I have. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 117 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, four seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 117 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. A notice icon digestion effect in which the notice icon I6 of the worn hat is consumed is performed.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 118, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 118, the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is to be held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, as in the case of the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is set.

  FIG. 118 (a1) to FIG. 118 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect for notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 118 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display section 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and the success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 118 (a1), when a strike is obtained in a bowling game, a character display of “Item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is obtained in a bowling game, a preview item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, a bowling effect by a lord character has been started. Note that the contents of the mission and the success reward displayed on the explanation display section 288 are, for example, those related to the change in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice and those being executed, in addition to those related to the stock of the notice item. May be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. In addition, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for a notice related to the stock of the notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a boring effect as shown in FIG. 118 (a1) is performed, whereby the advance notice of the stocking of the advance notice icon is performed. In addition, this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the running pattern fluctuation display, or may be used as another look-ahead advance notice You may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed, which indicates that the boring effect is to be continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that a “Strike Item Get” indicating the mission and its success reward is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the lord character rolls on the lane and heads for ten aligned bowling pins. , Fueling the expectation that the notice icons may be stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the scene where the strike was taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”. As shown in the figure, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon 16 of the hat to inform that the notice icon 16 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It is notified that the stock was taken. As described above, in this effect example, the notice item is displayed without displaying the notice item (stock) during the symbol change display being executed when the design change display which is the target of the prefetch is suspended. Notice has been given.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a sub-display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub-display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285C for displaying a notice icon in the lower half is displayed, and the above-described boring effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and a notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the boring effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during swing fluctuation display). May be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 118 (a2) may be displayed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. You may.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, a description has been given of a case in which the variable display of the special figure 2 is preferentially performed over the special figure 1, but in this effect example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. In other words, the present invention is applied to a case in which the special figure fluctuating game related to the reservation of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed in a starting opening winning order variation in which the starting opening winning order is started. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to a case where special figure 2 priority change is performed. Further, in FIG. 119, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 119, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is a target of a prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 The default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed in the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22, which are the change icons of the special figure 1 that have been won and held, have been won and held in the second special figure starting port 232. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of Toku-zu 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 119 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, in which the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, and This is an effect (Amida effect) for acquiring a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 1-decorative 4-decorative 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida production is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction is set at one of the starting points of the Sabohani character SB. Are arranged, and a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I10 of a fan, and an icon IX of a loss are arranged for each end point of the three horizontal lines. Also, the number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines is appropriately set, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of reserves at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves on the line in accordance with the rule of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. Then, when reaching the end point where the losing icon IX is arranged, it is notified that the notice icon will not be stocked. Then, every time the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the Sabohani character SB may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-run is performed. And so on. Further, for one symbol change display, the display may advance to the vertical line two or more ahead. The effect as shown in FIG. 119 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub-display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 118 (c) and (d), for example. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the Amami effect even during the execution of Super Reach. Then, for example, an effect of increasing the notice icon during the super reach may be able to be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are respectively moved by the moving animation, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative pattern starts the variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of the Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and a display is shown in which the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the horizontal line at the middle stage has been reached halfway.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, the variable display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four reserved icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the moving animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke that hides the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the elimination of the smoke, this vertical line is found to have been cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line. Continue straight along the horizontal line toward the end point.

  When the variable display of the special figure 2 is completed, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, and the three holding icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the holding icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the moving animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke that hides the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the elimination of the smoke, this vertical line is connected with the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is moved from the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line by the vertical line in accordance with the rules of amiduji. Move to horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that the information has been obtained is displayed, the Amida effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a6), a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this example of the effect, as described above with reference to FIG. 119 (a1-1), one of a plurality of notice icons of different types is selected. As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged at all of the end points of the horizontal line. Is also good. In this manner, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all of the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that the displayed notice icon is determined to be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the warning icon I10 of the fan is a warning icon indicating that an effect for warning that the big hit will be determined is performed as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), the icon IX of the hat is not arranged, and the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes are arranged at the end point of each horizontal line. It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), the character SB of Sabohani is arranged at all the start points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan) arranged at the end point of each of the horizontal lines Alternatively, it may be determined that all of the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), since the fan announcement icon I10 is included, it is guaranteed that an effect to announce that the big hit will be confirmed will be performed. In some cases, the sense of expectation can be further increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-6), at the end point of each horizontal line, the type of the notice icon is not clear, the notice icon of the first lord (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, the second The notice icon I3) of the third person may be arranged. In this case, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. As described above, the color of the notice icon of the lord differs depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the color. Therefore, depending on which color of the notice icon of the lord is acquired, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third palace, which is the notice icon of the red palace, is more likely to be changed to the notice icon where the “pseudo ream” is decided than the notice icon where the “pseudo ream” is not decided. In contrast, the notice icon I1 of the first palace, which is the notice icon of, can be easily changed to the notice icon in which the “pseudo-ren” is not determined.

  Further, in this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 119 (a3-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke, and it is difficult to specify the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which of the notice icons will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with confidence. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 119 (a2-1), a notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2), during execution of the Amida production, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is displayed is hidden by smoke, and thereafter, FIG. 119 (a2-2a) ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a), the losing icon IX is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the contents of the Amida effect are promoted. It should be noted that, for example, a part of or all of the preview icons arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is changed to a missing icon IX or a lower-ranking notification icon, so that the content of the Amida production is demoted. It may be.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida production, the smoke that has hidden a part of the vertical line extends vertically, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that one of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I10 of the fan can be obtained. Then, the third vertical line disappears, and it is assured that the fan notice icon I10 will be stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut off in the middle, the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in FIG. 119 (a4-3a), after the second vertical line is not cut, and the losing icon IX is selected and the effect is completed, FIG. 119 (a4-3a) As shown in (5), it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any of the notice icon display areas 285.

  Note that, in the above-described Amida production, a pre-reading advance notice may be given for the symbol variation display to be pre-read based on the type of the advance notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 120: is a figure which shows step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, and is a figure which shows step by step another example of the effect of the notice icon increase effect. is there. In FIG. 120, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 120, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and the hold display is a display mode of the prefetch notice (a Sabohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 120 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), the first special figure display device 212 performs a symbol variation display, and accordingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 120 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of these two special maps 1 are displayed in a default display mode (circular blank pattern and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (2), the third special figure 1 hold icon h13 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. A message is displayed to notify that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold targeted for prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of Sabohani).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 changes to the first hold of the special figure 1. The icon becomes the icon h11, and the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 becomes the second reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the display of the decorative design is started to change. FIG. 120 (5) shows a state where the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (6), the lord character YM appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6. Thus, in this effect example, in the effect that the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain shrine production has started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (7), the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative design display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the main character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and expresses a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 120 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the lord character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (14), the display is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching is started.

  Then, for example, when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 120 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. A notice icon digestion effect in which the notice icon I6 of the worn hat is consumed is performed. As described above, according to this effect example, it can be said that the pre-reading notice using the hold icon and the pre-reading notice using the reservation icon are simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and illustrates another example of the effect of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect in a stepwise manner. FIG. In FIG. 121, the first special figure display unit 212, the second special figure display unit 214, the general figure display unit 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 121, the third holding icon h13 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is to be held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, as in the case of the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is set.

  FIG. 121 (a1) to FIG. 121 (a3-1) show a state where a notice effect is given in advance to notify that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 1”, and the display of the loss. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 has also been deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any of the display areas.

  Thereafter, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the moving display is performed by the moving animation, and the holding at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is performed. The icon moves to the fluctuating icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuating icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of FIG. The reserved icon at the display position becomes the second reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for giving a notice that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on the placard PL1, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed after "in the next fluctuation", and further, "not stock" is displayed following this, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. Is notified in advance that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is ended after the fluctuation time elapses, and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started. As shown in 121 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. This allows the player to recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is necessarily stocked. For example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed after "next change", and further, "was stock" is displayed, followed by a question mark. It is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  If the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 121 (a3-2), no effect on the stock of the notice icon is performed. In addition, an effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, a lord-like effect, etc.) may be performed.

  FIG. 121 (b1) to FIG. 121 (b3) show a state in which the prefetch mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is being performed during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (b1), the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, and the prefetching notice is displayed as the display mode of the third reserved icon h13. Of the display mode of Savohani as the display mode of (1) is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed in correspondence with the variable display of the special figure 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display having a high possibility of a big hit is suspended, is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in each of the two band-shaped scroll display areas, the character “intense heat approaching” scrolls from right to left. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 has started, as shown in FIG. 121 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. A lord effect is performed, and a preview icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the preview icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to perform the pre-reading advance notice by stocking the advance notice icon, the pre-reading advance notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon, and the pre-reading advance notice by changing the background display.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c1) and 121 (c2), during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, a lord effect is performed, and a notice icon is displayed. May be performed.

  FIG. 121 (d1) to FIG. 121 (d3) show how the notice icon is stocked and consumed while the same symbol variation display is being executed. That is, stocking and digestion of the notice icon relating to the execution of the notice effect during the symbol change display are also executable.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as the notice icon as shown in FIG. 121 (d2). The notice icon in the area 285 is temporarily stocked in the first display area YA1. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 121 (d3), a notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 121 (e1) and 121 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, but is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is different from a notice icon increase effect and a digestive effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of step by step. In FIG. 122, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 122, the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol change display to be prefetched is on hold, but the display mode is as follows. For example, as in the case of the first hold icon h11, the default display mode is set.

  FIG. 122 (a1) to FIG. 122 (a3) show that the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are both used.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative design display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “Castle Town”. I have. In this stage display area 289, in addition to the display of the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of a notice or a description of a character appearing may be performed, or the notice display may be performed. Is also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described lord effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed, and the character display of "stock" is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A notice icon 16 of a hat is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (b1) to FIG. 122 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the lord's effect is not stocked, but is kept as it is. It may be digested. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of digesting the notice icon relating to the notice during the symbol change display.

  FIG. 122 (c1) to FIG. 122 (c2) show a state where a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the kind of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. But not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YAL3. Is displayed. Also, in the second notice icon display area 285F, there are four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Are provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any of the display areas. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed in a line at substantially the center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. Note that, in this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. After that, in other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is filled after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when a smaller number of the second button notice icons I11 are used. Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and then the second button notice icon I11 is digested, the reliability of the big hit may be made different. For example, the more the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, the better It may be configured so as to be easy with. Note that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be digested. For example, four button notice icons I11 may be displayed or only two button notice icons I11 may be digested. In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be maintained in stock until the next symbol change display, or may be deleted without digestion. Also, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of stocked notice items.

  FIG. 122 (d1) to FIG. 122 (d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (d1), the notice icon I6s of the hat is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the notice icon I7s of the shuriken is displayed in the first hold icon. It is displayed small over the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the suspension icon may be displayed with the notice icon included.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced display hat displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 jumps out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed with the character display of "stock", and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this effect example, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the change icon h0 is performed every time the holding of the symbol change display is exhausted. Not limited.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 122 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  FIG. 122 (f1) to FIG. 122 (f3) show an example where the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  FIG. 122 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 122 (d1), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, the erasing animation of the fluctuating icon h0 is then started at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (f2) when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (f3). h0 is deleted. At this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also deleted together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. As described above, even if the notice icon is displayed on the change icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 122 (g1) to FIG. 122 (g3) show a state where, when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bouquet notice icon I51 as a notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plural kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 81 (b), and it is determined which notice icon is included. This is a mode that is difficult to specify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then enlarged and displayed. You.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (g3), the display of the bouquet notice icon I51 changes to a hat notice icon I6 and a ribbon notice icon I8, and the type of the notice icon included in the bouquet notice icon I51 Can be recognized. For this reason, the player may be able to give a sense of expectation as to which kind of notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described hereinafter, the notice icon may be displayed continuously even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, and if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without the symbol change display being held, the state of the stock even during the demonstration display May be maintained. Regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is on hold, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked.

  Also, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be announced.

  In addition, the effect that the notice icon that is stocked is changed or promoted (level up) may be performed. For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the stock hat is changed to the notice icon I10 of the fan is performed. In the case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of chances in a state where the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, an effect of changing the notice icon I6 of the hat to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes may be performed. . Conversely, an effect in which the stocked preview icon is demoted (level down) may be performed.

  In addition, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (level-up) may be performed. For example, an effect in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. The effect of changing to the fan notification icon I10 may be performed when the fan is running, or the number of pseudo repetitions may be increased in the pseudo continuous production performed by digesting the hat notification icon I6. Good. Conversely, an effect in which the effect display performed when the notice icon is exhausted may be demoted (level down) may be performed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  Alternatively, whether or not a notice of stocking the notice icon may be made or not may be determined based on the length of the symbol change display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time in the case where the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed between the symbol change display that becomes a big hit and the symbol change display that becomes a loss may be the same or different.

  Further, as the variable display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the notice of stocking the advance icon may be controlled in a controllable manner.

  Further, in the case where the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so that the announcement of stocking the preview icon is not performed.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the variation time of the length of stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked preview icon may be digested in the interrupted symbol change display of the special figure 1 or may be exhausted during the interrupted symbol change display of the special figure 2.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the stock is displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 before the interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stored and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the type of the notice icon is not limited to the above-described one or the one described later, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When the item for customization is exhausted, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a selection by a player are made. It may be possible to increase possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Also, for example, an effect selection item may be displayed, and when the effect selection item is exhausted, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  Also, for example, a user setting clearing item may be displayed, and when the user setting clearing item is exhausted, for example, the user setting may be cleared or the user setting may be cleared. It may be made possible to clear after confirming whether or not to perform.

  Also, for example, an effect mode ending item may be displayed.If the effect mode ending item is exhausted, for example, it is possible to end the pre-reading mode or end the effect mode. It may be configured such that the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode can be confirmed and confirmed.

  In addition, for example, point acquisition items and level-up presenting items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  In addition, for example, a reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  In addition, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, for example, when the present icon is consumed, an icon of “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune-telling icon) from which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the demonstration for the customer, or may be displayed other than during the demonstration for the customer.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information regarding the simultaneous island production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the start of the island simultaneous production may be displayed, or the content of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Is also good.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized on the store side when digested. For example, even if it is possible to make settings such that an effect related to the area of the installed game store is performed (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed game store can be set. Good. For example, according to the setting, the characters of the group notice appearing in the Tohoku region mode (for example, the Namahage group) and the characters of the group notice appearing in the Chubu region mode (for example, the Shachihoko group) can be made different. There are cases.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon for starting the tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that a promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed or a result indicating that a notice about the symbol change display is performed is displayed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when digested.

  Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table relating to a notice item. It is.

  FIG. 123 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. The illustration of the general symbol display device 210, the general symbol holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 123 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped at "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special map 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon is displayed left-justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. In addition, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed left-aligned. Each of these hold icons h11 and h12 has a default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold has been consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the reservation icon h21 corresponding to the first reservation is displayed left-justified in the reservation icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (d), the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in the special figure 1 is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode in which “heat” is displayed). ).

  When the timing shown in FIG. 123 (e) is reached after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, the notice icon It and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. You. That is, a display in which the number of the notice icons increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih which has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by speech balloons of the characters “Atari” and “question mark” appears. Note that the appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (g), "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is the result of the loss. Will be notified.

  In the present embodiment, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. You. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, a notice icon is displayed. Is not digested, and the increase of the notice icon is not displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digestion and the increase display of the notice icon may be performed, or the digestion and increase display of the notice icon are performed. There may be. On the other hand, the reserved icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, all the reserved icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, and the reserved icon display of the special figure 2 may be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed by interruption, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the reserved icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (i), the display is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 3−decoration 2−decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (j), after the symbol variation display of the reserved special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and “Atari” and “question mark” are displayed. A lord character YI accompanied by a character notation balloon appears. The timing of appearance of the main character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 123 (j), a notice icon Id of the evil deputy is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the number of the notice icons increases is performed. Here, the timing of the additional display of the evil warrant notice icon Id may be before, after or after the digestion display of the notice notice icon It of the lord is started. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih and the evil officer's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and a princess character HI and an evil character DI appear. Note that the appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol. In addition, the timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the timing of the appearance of the evil character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 123 (m), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops displaying “decoration 3” in the right symbol display region 208c, and then stops displaying “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display region 208b. , A big hit is reported.

  Next, a description will be given of a configuration of a lottery table related to a notice icon for determining whether or not to execute the increase display and the digestion display of the notice icon in this effect example.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the hold of the special figure 1, The increase of the notice icon of the lord is performed with a probability of / 50, the increase of the notice icon of the princess is performed with a probability of 3/50, and the increase of the notice icon of the evil magistrate is performed with a probability of 2/50. . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of the lord is executed at a probability of 40/50, the display of the notice icon of the princess is executed at a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer is executed at a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the lottery for performing the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed simultaneously for two or more notice icons, or when the digest display is performed for the two or more notice icons simultaneously, There is.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is unacceptable, as a result of the pre-reading of the hold in FIG. In 3/50, an increase in the notice icon of the Princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, an increase in the notice icon of the Princess is executed with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notice icon of the evil magistrate with a 1/50 probability. Execute the display. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of 1/50, the display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 10/50, and the notice icon of the evil magistrate is executed with a probability of 15/50. Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed at the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the reserved pre-reading of the special figure 1 , The display of the icon of the Lord's notice is increased with a probability of 25/50, the display of the notice of the Princess is increased with a probability of 20/50, and the notice of the evil officer is increased with the probability of 7/50. Execute. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of the lord is performed with a probability of 20/50, the display of the notification icon of the princess is performed with a probability of 15/50, and the notification icon of the evil officer is performed with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that does not expect to win the second special figure starting port 232 in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, The increase display may not be performed for the advance notice icon, and the digest display may not be performed for any advance notice icon.

  In addition, if the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol change display of Toku-zu 2 is out of order, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the suspension of Toku-zu 1, the increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons. No notification is displayed for any of the notice icons.

  Note that, for example, when the power support state is ended and one or a plurality of reserves remain in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the digestion display of the advance notice icon is not performed as a pre-reading advance notice of the special figure 2 hold. Alternatively, the increase display and the digest display of the advance notice icon may be performed in accordance with the jackpot determination result executed at the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 125 to FIG. 137 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step examples of the effects of the pachinko machine 100 which can be applied to the present embodiment, centering on the decorative symbol display device. In FIGS. 125 to 137, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. FIGS. 125 to 137 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, a first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, a second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a length in the width direction shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a slightly shorter height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a right end portion overlapping the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left edge portion which is the second edge portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are closest to each other, they can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily those in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device. It is added here, just in case, because it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Also, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. Can be displayed, or a plurality of types of effect displays can be displayed. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in a transmission area. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission area emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 125 to 137, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of the light irradiation plate. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, FIGS. 125 to 135 and 137 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 125: is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment, and FIG. 126 is a figure which shows the example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 step by step. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit has a change icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserve icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. Further, on the right side of the change icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), "the lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and a description of the lord character is made. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage is hot when the stage shifts to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when a normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot compared to the display of the red stage name, so this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying a currently performed stage name or reach name is arranged at a lower portion of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The main character may or may not always be displayed.

  A crest role object 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. Further, the crest role object 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents. Above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yatsushiro role 224Fa and a Shogun role 224Fb, which are one of the production movable bodies, are arranged, and move in the vertical direction according to the production content. It is configured to be able to. Each of the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the general role type 224Fb has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the effect contents.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (b), the third special figure 1 hold icon h13 (third hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound output of “pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss. Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), the holding icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. Is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The holding icon at the display position of the third holding icon h13 becomes the second holding icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal, respectively. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol starts, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol starts. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. As described above, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of the bomb icon I61 being thrown by the lord character starts, and the lord character changes the icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. An attempt to throw is shown. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance by being thrown by the lord character. In addition, the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed by an animation in which the notice icon to be displayed can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be possible to specify from the middle of the throw or to specify from the beginning. In addition, an animation related to a notice icon having a high jackpot expectation degree when the digestion is completed (a high expectation notice icon) and an animation relating to a notice icon having a small jackpot expectation degree when digested than the high expectation notice animation are performed. , The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (f), the appearance of the lord character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "By using the notice icon ..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. May be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L for the bomb icon I61. The timing may be after the movement to. As described above, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord-like character explodes, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (i), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice of shifting to swordsman reach, as described later. Further, when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “Don” notifying the fact. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one to one to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (j), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 125 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the lord character. The animation ends. As described above, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to recognize. Here, the difficulty in viewing means that the notice icon is more difficult to view than when the notice icon is not located at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Also, in other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is overlapped on the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, thereby facilitating the player to pay attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. May be possible. Further, in some cases, it is possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the description of the effect that may occur earlier or in the future.
The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged at a position near the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. You may be able to get. In addition, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman notice icon I62 or the contents completely unrelated to the swordsman notice icon I62. The content may be a content related to the current production, or may be a content completely unrelated to the current production. In FIG. 125 (j), the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon, and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. However, the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman Is not displayed in connection with the text, but happens to be related to the content of the description, but the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, and the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. They may be displayed simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display section TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched, as described later. In addition, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be used in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started. Note that, in this example of the effect, the preview icon is stored in the tutorial display section TT1, but the preview icon may be stored in the stage name display section ST1.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "notice icon digestion ..." to "panda is the master of the lord." , The relationship between the lord character and the panda character is described. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to new contents while the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has been started with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 is before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanation displays in one symbol change display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 125 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be pre-read is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 has also been deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “When Yatsushiro moves ....”. It is described that something happens when the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the Shogun role 224Fb operate.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 125 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The held icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (p), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman starts swinging, which fuels the sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice icon I62 of the swordsman will be consumed. By doing so, there are cases where the player can be longed for the notice icon to be used quickly. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. Note that the effect display need not be performed. This effect display covers the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 that has been swinging moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlapping state of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily recognized by the player.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a) subsequent to FIG. 125 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display to notify that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advance to the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in a small size above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby producing a high degree of reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 126 (c) shows a state where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the castle town background to the background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display is performed. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, characters of "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation of the duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c), the appearance of the lord character and the swordsman character confronting each other is displayed. Note that in the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, so that the display position of the change icon h0 has moved downward. Also, at this time, the UI unit may go out of the frame after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may go out of the frame for each hold icon. In addition, in the state where the explanation display is being performed in addition to the hold icon, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously deleted. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 126 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, emits red light) indicating that the operation is in the operation accepting state. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing when the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (f), as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays “Go” with the rise of the lord. The cut-in image to which the character display "Ze" is added is superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (h), the main character's palace is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 126 (i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived, and the fluctuation starts.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 2", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the above-mentioned notice icon I10 of a fan) for performing a resurrection effect after once displaying a loss is stocked, the background display is changed from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town which is a normal background. You may be made to digest after returning.

  127 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 127. It is. Note that FIGS. 127 (a) to (l) are the same as FIGS. 125 (a) to (l), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 127 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (m), the notice icon pattern CS (sometimes called “decoration C”) displaying “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 1—decoration C—decoration”. 6 "is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon pattern CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. In addition, the preview icon design CS may include an image (including an enlarged or reduced image itself) imitating the preview icon I63 of chance up, and may move to the preview icon display area. That is, the notice icon acquisition animation based on the symbol is different from the throw animation, as long as the notice icon is displayed so that the notice icon can be specified. In addition, there may be something that does not correspond to the notice icon design CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of the preview icons displayed in the design may be more or less than the types of the preview icons not displayed in the design. The type of the notice icon displayed at the time of the animation (for example, throwing animation) related to the character of the lord is the notice displayed at the time of the animation related to the design (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon pattern CS). The type of the icon may be different, and at least some of the preview icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed at two occasions, and may or may not be stocked at two different occasions due to one change. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is fluctuated in any symbol row. The change icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed. The display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When Yatsushiro moves ...".

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 127 (n), the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out of the notice icon design CS, and FIG. As shown in ()), it is moved to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and to the right of the swordsman notice icon I62, and is arranged (stocked). Then, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. Note that at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, the notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the announcement icon pattern CS is derived, so that the player can easily recognize that the chance-up announcement icon I63 is stocked. However, the notification by voice may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, in some cases, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by using a plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Also, in this effect example, the trigger for stocking the swordsman notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are different, and therefore, the effect contents until stocking are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the display result of the loss. Is determined. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  Then, when the symbol change on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 127 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The held icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (a) following FIG. 127 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of “decoration 2” are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (b), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. It also depends on the chance-up notice icon I63 that is stocked at the same time. Therefore, in addition to the explanation display, it may be possible to notice that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 that has been swinging moves upward and is digested. At this time, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. When the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the notice icon I62 of the swordsman to make the notice icon I62 of the swordsman stand out. As shown, the effect display is over the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and the description display and the chance-up notice icon I63 may sometimes attract attention.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (d), on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a display notifying that the game will develop into a swordsman reach is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in a small size above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested before the shift to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63 May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 128 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. I have. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative design display device, depending on the position viewed by the player, it is possible to avoid overlapping due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be easily viewed.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows a state where the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the castle town background to the background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display is performed. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, characters of "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (f), a state in which the lord character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI section is framed downward, and thus the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. However, the notice icon I63 of the chance up is not affected by the change, and the display position is not changed. Not changed.

  In FIG. 128 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (h), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, emits red light) indicating that the operation is in the operation accepting state. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts to swing, which is fueling a sense of expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (i), as shown in FIG. 128 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays “Go” with the rise of the lord. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "Ze" is added is superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the oscillating chance-up notice icon I63 has moved upward and is being digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the lord's face is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to overlap the first cut-in image, and the big hit It has been reported that the degree of confidence in the has increased. In other words, it is shown that the advance notice by the cut-in image has been ranked up by exhausting the chance-up advance notice icon I63. Note that the first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. You may. When another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the notice icon may be overlapped with the notice icon in which the second cut-in image is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked preview icon. In the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed. However, when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed, any of the display icons is displayed. Also does not overlap. In other words, the displayed notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed, and may overlap with another image at a certain moment, but may not overlap with another image at a certain moment. Can be. When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for the promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 128 (h), the notice icon is exhausted and disappears before the start of the cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It may or may not have disappeared.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (m), the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 128 (n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. Is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. -Decoration 2-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed with the combination of decoration patterns, and the display result of the big hit is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, after displaying a notice icon on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an effect display in which the displayed notice icon is transported to the stock position is provided. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a1), since two variable displays in the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "With notice icon digestion ..." is displayed. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state is shown in which the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 jumps out from below. In the tutorial display section TT1, the description is changed from "Notice icon digestion ..." to "Swordsman is the enemy of the lord." The timing of changing the description display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or at a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that has jumped out of the treasure chest image TR is burst. The effect display of this rupture overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, since the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, a sound of “Pakin” notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120, thereby notifying that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is kept on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode as if the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner as if to move. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a6), it is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has completely moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 (b1) to (b8), another example of a notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the description "Swordsman is the enemy of the lord" is displayed as the explanation display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state is shown in which the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out from the inside upward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure box image TR changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in an enlarged manner, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (b4). Is erased. At this time, a sound of “Pakin” notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120, indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of the sound output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be the same as the timing of changing from the bombs icon I6 to the swordsman notice icon I62. The timing may be the timing before, the timing after the change from the bomb icon I6 to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, or the timing before the treasure box image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure box image TR is deleted, or may be the timing after the treasure box image TR is deleted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may be.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode as if the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner as if to move. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b6), it is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is eliminated, and the player In some cases, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT <b> 1 may be easily recognized.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b8), the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked. As described above, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to recognize.

  In this effect example, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5 ′), the height of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the 208L is higher than the position where the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. Since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is located near the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , Slide the display, and while visually checking the display state of the tutorial display section TT1, the third decorative symbol table There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 129, when the preview icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the preview icon. May be overlapped, and an effect display in which the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the preview icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the preview icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visually recognized.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of an advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 130 shows a state in which the tutorial display section TT1 is normally out of the frame and enters the frame from below when the explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. I have. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 130 (a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, frame-in of the tutorial display section TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 130 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a4), "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 130 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the description displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be deleted before the animation to start out of the frame starts, may be deleted at the timing when the animation to start out of the frame starts, or may go out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation is started, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a7), for example, after the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 125 (e) to (j), FIG. As shown, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a11), the explanation display “Turn on the notice icon ...” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, but the tutorial display section TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, and is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 frame-out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. The overlap state with TT1 is eliminated. When the description displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of the frame, the description may be easily recognized by eliminating the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a13), when the tutorial display section TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation of the frame out ends.

  Also in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 130 (b1) to 130 (b2), when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state to the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. FIGS. 130 (b1) to 130 (b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 125 (p) to FIG. 125 (q), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing an advance notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 131 shows a state in which a tutorial display is performed in a conversation effect of a character in addition to the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. I have. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and the message "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1). In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Further, in this effect example, a balloon TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Princess Chibi's character CH1 and balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or a line effect) is performed, and perform a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), a description indicating that "gold is hotter than red" is displayed in the blowing portion TT2, and a description relating to a notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is provided. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon TT2 or the balloon TT3 described later. Further, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The display area of the tutorial display section TT1 may be larger or smaller than the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display section TT1 may have a larger or smaller font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The font may be the same or different between the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. In addition, the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbol in some cases. However, the decorative symbol does not overlap in the display area where another explanation display is performed, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2, TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is deleted together with the character CH of the princess Chibi. In addition, the decorative design is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. Note that the balloon TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss. Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 still displays "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun."

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 131 (a4), the holding icons h11, h12, h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. Is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The holding icon at the display position of the third holding icon h13 becomes the second holding icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal, respectively. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. As described above, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Have been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and a conversation effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a5), an explanation indicating that "swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon TT2, and an explanation on a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon TT2 is displayed may be a timing before the start of the throwing animation, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or may be a timing after the start of the throwing animation. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the appearance of the lord character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown. As shown in FIG. 131 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a line effect) is performed, and perform a tutorial display (explanatory display), a preview display, and the like. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is displayed with an explanation display "Panda intrusion", and an explanation regarding the announcement effect is made. Here, the balloon part TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord character cast the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord character cast the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be a timing later than the timing when the lord character throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the display is performed such that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what is displayed as "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "With notice icon digestion ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least some of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61 may be easily attracted to the player. Note that the timing at which the explanation display is changed in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3. The timing may be a timing before the timing or a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman goes to the position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least some of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to recognize. Further, when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “Don” notifying the fact. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (tutorial display unit TT1 and balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation display is performed.

  In the effect examples shown in FIG. 131 (a1) to FIG. 131 (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the speech balloon (the speech balloon TT2 and the speech balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is set to red), and the character “ For example, a preview display or a pre-reading advance display in the symbol variation display may be performed by displaying.

  FIGS. 131 (c1) to (c3) show other examples of the contents displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. A state in which the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has begun to swing is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 that has been swinging moves upward and is digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “Evolve into a swordsman reach”, and an explanation display of an event to occur (a live broadcast) Display). With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is consumed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 131 (c3), the sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the example of the effect described above, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having the function of displaying the explanation of the effect. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 131 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to the change (for example, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red), the display of the symbol variation display may be performed, for example, to display the advance notice display or the advance notice display in the symbol variation display. Is also good.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing an advance notice icon that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 132 shows a state in which the UI unit is displayed integrally with the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 at the bottom of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been. Also, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this example, when the super reach is reached, the UI unit is designed to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 132 (a1) has a reserved icon display area formed in the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a1), since two variable displays in the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), "In advance of the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role item are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a2), the third special figure 1 hold icon (third hold icon h13) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a3), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss. Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is not deleted, but may be deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, the symbol change in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation described above with reference to FIGS. 125 (e) to (k).

  FIG. 132 (a5) shows that after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character ruptures, the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a princess notice icon I64 and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a5), it is shown that it overlaps the stage name display section ST2 but has not reached the predetermined display position (stock position). . In this case, since the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display section ST2, an explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display section ST2. In the case of a notice icon related to the notice icon design CS (see FIG. 127), the explanation display is deleted based on the timing of the acquisition of the notice icon, for example, the explanation display is erased before overlapping the stage name display part ST2. May be configured to have different timings for erasing. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. In addition, a pattern (so-called gasket) in which a notice icon is not acquired after the animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display section ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may be configured not to be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display section ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of the gasp pattern, and is not really erased). In a true pattern in which a notice icon is acquired, for example, the description may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display ST2. Can be executed, and in the case where the UI section is hidden at the time of the dark turning effect, at least a part of the process from starting the bomb icon throwing animation to obtaining the notice icon and the gasket is executed while the dark turning effect is being executed. Specifically, after the animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is started. When the darkening effect ends and the UI section is displayed again, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display is disappeared from the explanation display is displayed). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the "castle town" which has been displayed so far is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. The display of the description of the "stage" is deleted, and functions as an area exclusively for displaying a notice icon. Therefore, the character display of "STOCK" is displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the stage name is not displayed. It should be noted that the scene in which the notice icon is digested and the execution of the dark turning effect described above may be configured to overlap. In addition, when the notice icon is acquired, the moving means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, and the movable member is changed to the acquired notice icon. Or at least a part of the notice icons that have already been acquired (eg, at least one notice icon among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of one notice icon, etc.). May be. Further, an effect is provided in which the movable means moves during at least a part of the period from before the start of the animation of the bomb icon I61 to the end thereof, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Is also good. That is, before the notice icon is displayed, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means, and after the notice icon is displayed, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the loss is determined. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the holding icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol starts, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol starts. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display section ST2 is not displayed, and when the stage name display section ST2 is not displayed, the stage name after the change is changed. No display is performed. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display section ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 132 (a9) shows a state where five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display part ST2, but if the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display part TT4. In this case, the description displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is deleted, and the function only functions as an area for displaying a notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanatory display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a9), first, a princess notice icon I64 and two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display portion ST2, and subsequently, a tutorial display portion. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this effect example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icons to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 132 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 move one by one to the left, respectively, and the tutorial display is performed. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the notice icon I63 of the chance up displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. I do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved instantaneously or the like so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

  Then, when all the preview icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 have been exhausted, the explanation display is restarted on the tutorial display section TT4, and all the advance icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 have been exhausted. In this case, the display of the stage name in the stage name display section ST2 is restarted. Note that the description display and the display of the stage name need not be restarted. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as the symbol variation display in which the notice icon has been digested (for example, after the super reach is over). When the explanation display is restarted, the same display may be restarted, or the display may be restarted from a different portion in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the type of the preview icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the preview icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, if the notice icon is exhausted, the other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon moving animation.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon to be stocked is first stored in the stage name display portion ST2, and when the number of stocked becomes three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is displayed in the tutorial display portion. The TT4 is configured so that up to three can be stocked. However, if the stock is first made in the tutorial display section TT4, and the number of stocks becomes three, a notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. It may be configured to be able to stock up to one.

  Further, in this effect example, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4). In (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 or the tutorial display section TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting to move upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 or the tutorial display section TT4, the explanation display is displayed. Immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is used, the explanation display is not displayed. It may not be performed.

  Further, in this effect example, the above-described thing shown in FIG. 125 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that the aspects shown in other figures can be combined.

  In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, for example, there may be a display area dedicated to a notice icon to be consumed, such as a variable icon display area.

  In addition, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a toothless manner, and another notice icon may be moved so as to fill an empty space. Good, you don't have to move.

  Also, a so-called MAX8 machine (8) which can be divided into a first special figure winning opening and a second special figure winning opening per starting opening, and can hold eight symbol change displays in a normal game state. In some cases, the hold icon display area has four reserve display areas prepared in advance, and when the number of reserves becomes four, the display area expands to five. Or may be expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged holding icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIGS. 132 (b1) and 132 (b2) show a state in which the stocked notice icon is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

  Then, the timing at which the chance-up notice icon I63 is exhausted is reached, and as shown in FIG. 131 (b2), the state in which the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward is shown. In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display section ST2, it is displayed as an explanation display. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. This is the same for the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.

  FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that both the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0, and "Turn on notice icon ..." is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  FIGS. 133 (a1) to 133 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 133 (a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. The display mode of this castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG.

  FIG. 133 (a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage differs from the castle town stage described above in that a UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section on the space stage, a fluctuating icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. The display position of the notice icon that is stocked is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage described above with reference to FIG. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. , A white pentagonal display mode, and the display mode of the prefetch notice is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different on the space stage, the notice display icon does not overlap the tutorial display area TT1.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 133 (a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the description display is not displayed immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new description display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. Note that an explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when a transition is made to another stage (for example, a space stage) while the tutorial display region TT1 is in a non-display state in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display region TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  FIGS. 133 (b1) and (b2) show a state in which the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 133 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI section. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (b1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and displays "With notice icon digestion ...". In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon that informs in advance of the number of occurrences of an effect of operating a button during a specific effect. It can be said that the larger the jackpot reliability is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the more likely the jackpot is.

  Thus, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that performing another display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing an advance notice icon that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 134 shows another effect example using the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned lord character.

  FIG. 134 (a1) to FIG. 134 (a6) show a state in which a notice icon that is already stocked changes due to a throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. On the right side of the change icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 134 (a1), a notice icon I66 of Hatena is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. The notice icon I66 of Hatena is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing of digestion, but does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if digestion is performed. Function as an advance notice icon. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Have been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a3), the appearance of the lord character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a4), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what is displayed as "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "With notice icon digestion ...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the notice icon I66 of Hatena, and at least a part of the notice icon I66 of Hatena is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is large enough to at least cover the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon to be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the notice icon I66 of Hatena has changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Then, the sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. At this time, since the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to recognize. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a6), what is displayed as "Notice icon digestion ..." has been changed to "The swordsman is the enemy of the lord." The timing of changing the description display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or the timing of changing the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be the timing before or the timing after the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is at least the same as the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 134 (b1) to FIG. 134 (b3) show a state in which the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (b1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), and FIG. 134 (b3) is the same as FIG. 134 (a6), so description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT1 in FIG. 134 (b3), "with notice icon digestion ..." is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 134 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of the notice icon I66 of the hatena and the tutorial display section TT1 are made difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than that of the effect image shown in FIG. 134 (a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, the notice icons may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is at least the same as the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c3) show a state where the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (c1) is the same as FIG. 134 (b1), and FIG. 134 (c2) is the same as FIG. 134 (b2), so description thereof will be omitted.

  After the explosion of the bomb icon I61 at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c2), as shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the notice icon I66 of Hatena is changed to the notice of the swordsman. The icon has changed to an icon I62 and a notice icon I63 of a chance up. That is, one notice icon has changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

  FIGS. 134 (d1) to 134 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 134 (d1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), so description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 134 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 134 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character is replaced by the second holding icon h12 which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the second reserve icon h12, and at least a part of the second reserve icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is large enough to at least cover the second reserve icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the holding icon to be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )are doing. Then, a sound “pong” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is at least the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  Thus, in the effect example shown in FIG. 134, at least a part of the animation at the time of acquiring the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animations. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol display device). The same applies to animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing step-by-step another effect example of an advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 135 (a1) to FIG. 135 (a7) show a state in which a specific notice icon is stocked and the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact. Note that FIGS. 135 (a1) to 135 (a3) are the same as FIGS. 125 (h) to FIG. 125 (j), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 135 (a3) is performed, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character ends, as shown in FIG. 135 (a4). In addition, as shown in FIG. 135 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. Is displayed. In the achievement display section KM1, "swordsman stock" indicating that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is stocked is displayed. That is, when the mission for acquiring the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, and when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the fact is displayed on the achievement display section KM1 to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who foresees that an effect with a very high expectation to the big hit is performed is stocked. Is also good. The timing at which the achievement display section KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, may be a timing before the end of the throwing animation, or may be a timing after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. In addition, since the achievement display part KM1 is displayed near the notice icon I62 of the stocked swordsman, the achievement display part KM1 may be noticed in some cases. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed on the achievement display section KM1 so as to overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration". 6 "is temporarily stopped and displayed. The change icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 of the chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display portion KM1, making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the explanation display on the achievement display portion KM1.

  Note that, in this effect example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 is determined by the type of the notice icon that is consumed. The overlap with the address may be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and when the notice icons are digested, and the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval, among the plurality of notice icons, When a predetermined number of notice icons are consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

  FIGS. 135 (b1) to 135 (b3) show an example of an operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which operate at the time of developing into a super reach or a big hit, for example. It is shown.

  FIG. 135 (b1) shows a state where super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a change icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI section is framed downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the change icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the display of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in the direction approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial decorative portion TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There are cases. According to this, the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the phenomenon in which the explanation display is hidden may sometimes give attention to the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation to the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are close to each other are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Further, the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. The image in which the character “celebration” is given in the frame is also displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the family crest role item 224E disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward to overlie the lower center portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The wrapping is performed, and the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the general role 224Fb disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial decorative portion TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There are cases. When the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may overlap with the Yatsushiro role 224Fa or the general role role 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may overlap with the family crest role item 224E. According to this, in some cases, the explanation display may be noticed while giving a sense of expectation to a big hit due to the phenomenon that the decoration operation and the effect movable body and the explanation display hide the explanation display.

  In FIG. 135 (c1) to FIG. 135 (c4), the button image 136a is displayed at all times or at least for a certain period of time on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, so that the effect button 136 is displayed. The state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 135 (c1) shows an animation of a duel scene in swordsman reach. FIG. 135 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 126 (d), but the stage name display section ST1 is displayed at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed at all times or at least for a certain period below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 135 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode for urging the user to press the effect button 136. With this display, it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, emits red light) indicating that the operation is in the operation accepting state.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c3), as shown in FIG. 135 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays "Go" with the rise of the lord. The cut-in image to which the character display "Ze" is added is superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this effect example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above, In some cases, the operation of the effect button 136 can be promoted by the player.

  FIG. 135 (d) shows an example of a notice icon which can be applied in the present embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, reservation promotion notice icon I67, chance notice notice icon I68 , A panda notice icon I69 is provided. Here, the reservation promotion notice icon I67 is an icon for giving a notice that, when exhausted, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit. The pseudo consecutive announcement icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo consecutive production will be performed when digested. In addition, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that a chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative pattern when the chance eye is consumed. Further, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the pre-reading zone will be made after digestion. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for notifying that the effect that the panda will intrude when digested is performed, and that a big hit (probable) will always occur.

  FIG. 136 is a view for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 136 (a1) to 137 (a7) show a state in which the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is the enemy of the lord”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scroll-displayed. The tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 136 has the left side overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  FIG. 136 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of "Swordsman is the enemy of the lord" scrolls sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a3), only the “swordsman is the lord” is scrolled in. I have. In these cases, none of the characters overlap with the swordsman's notice icon I62, so the explanation display may be clearly recognizable.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a4), the entire text of "Swordsman is the archenemy of the lord" is displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "Swordsman" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a5) follows, the part of “Swordsman” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part of “I am the enemy of the lord” is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "the lord" is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a6), the part of “Swordsman is the lord” is scrolled out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part of “Nemesis” is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "At the enemy" is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a7) follows, the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this effect example, the characters overlapped by the preview icon are changed over time due to the scroll of the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the description display causes a period in which the description display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the description display does not overlap. When the scroll of the explanation display is repeatedly performed, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  FIG. 136 (b1) to FIG. 136 (b7) show another example in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is the enemy of the lord”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which a display (for example, a warning display of “superheat”) is performed is shown. 136 (b1) to 136 (b3) and FIGS. 136 (b6) to 136 (b7) are shown in FIGS. 136 (a1) to 136 (a3) and 136 (a6) to 136 (a6), respectively. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 136 (b3), a preview display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 as illustrated in FIGS. 136 (b4) to 136 (b5). For the preview display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the character "" is displayed. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display is finished, the scroll display of the explanation display is restarted as shown in FIG. 136 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after the progress in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of the interruption. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. In addition, although the preview display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the advance display.

  FIG. 136 (c1) to FIG. 136 (c5) show the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is the arch enemy of the lord”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During display, a state is shown in which another notice icon moves as part of the notice icon is consumed.

  In FIG. 136 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63, which is a notice icon scheduled to be consumed first, and a notice icon I62, a swordsman, which is a notice icon scheduled to be consumed second, are displayed. , The notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (c2), when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, as shown in FIGS. 136 (c3) to FIG. 136 (c5), the swordsman notice icon I62 increases the chance. Of the notice icon moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the state of the overlap is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easily recognized. May be. That is, in this effect example, the notice icons do not overlap in the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of notice icons that are stocked. When the explanation display is scrolled in the tutorial display section TT1, the movement display of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display in the movement animation of the notice icon may overlap.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon that is applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 137, when the notice icon is stocked, a state where the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI1, a reserve icon display area in which four reserve icons can be respectively displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons are respectively displayed in a substantially square display frame on the upper right side. Is formed at the upper right, and a tutorial display section TT5 is formed below the preview icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed at a position above the UI unit UI1 and close to the reserved icon display area. More specifically, the fluctuating icon display area is arranged above a display frame where the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (a), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. I have. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 137 (a), "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed. In addition, two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (a), both of which are in a normal display mode (in this production example, referred to as “first display mode”). In some cases.). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative pattern, the notice icon does not overlap with the decorative pattern. Do not overlap. Note that the notice icon in the normal display mode may overlap with the decorative design, or may overlap with the decorative design.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 137 (a), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, so that the display mode changes when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed at all times, or may not be displayed during a certain period. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Have been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (c), it is shown that the lord character throws the bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (d), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner, the bomb icon I61 may overlap with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character reaches the display frame where the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and explodes. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area becomes stock. At least a part of the displayed display frame is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is large enough to at least cover the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. As a result, the third notification icon is notified to be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT5 or the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. If the display frame to be displayed and a notice icon are stocked in this display frame, the display icon overlaps the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (f), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode changes to a flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI part UI1 with flame. Therefore, together with the advance notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and the tutorial display unit TT5 are also difficult to see. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be set to a non-display state, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed and the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, and may make at least a part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 visible, or a notice icon display area. Only the visibility may be difficult.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (g), the notice icon enlargement animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display area YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed as a flame effect. A state of appearance from EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. In the display frame where the third notice icon is stocked, a swordsman notice icon I62 is newly displayed to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is Are displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This may allow the player to easily recognize that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, is further enlarged and displayed, and the first notice is displayed. The left part of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and the right part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. You. Also, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are further enlarged and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. Thereby, at least a part of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame where the first notice icon is stocked is made difficult to visually recognize. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 are respectively overlapped on the front side of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, a part of the preview icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to visually recognize. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is thus difficult to visually recognize. In addition, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative pattern during the variable display, it may be possible to more easily understand that the notice icon is stocked. In other words, it can be said that the magnified and displayed notice icon sometimes overlaps the decorative design. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in this effect example, when an effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other displays (for example, notice display) (overlapping display). ), But the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may overlap with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame for stocking a third notice icon in which a notice icon I62 of a swordsman is displayed is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed to the maximum size. That is, the notice icon I62 of the stocked swordsman and the pseudo-serial notice icon I65 already stocked are displayed in an enlarged display mode (in this example of production, "No. The display may be referred to as “second display mode”.) At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed. Are displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame where the second notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front side of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the preview icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to visually recognize. That is, at least a part of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 in the display frame where the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. In other words, in a state where the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode, it can be said that a part of the already-stocked pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 can be visually recognized. Note that the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is therefore displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (j), a notice icon reduction animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed at a position where the notice icon display area is displayed. The display of moving toward is performed. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also displayed in a reduced size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame where the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and the state is easily visible. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first preview icon is stocked is included in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo series displayed in the display frame in which the first preview icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this effect example, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually made visible in the notice icon reduction animation. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increasing due to the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduction animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed at a position where the notice icon display area is displayed. The display of moving toward is performed. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also displayed in a reduced size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entirety of the notice icon display frame YF is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icons (two pseudo successive notice icons I65 and I65) displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed. All the notice icons I62) of the swordsman are made visible. That is, it can be said that the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, but are all visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l), the notice icon reduction animation ends. That is, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, and the effect EF1 of the flame overlapping the notice icon display frame YF is also deleted. , The UI unit UI1 is displayed again. At this time, the notice icon display area shows that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is stocked in addition to the two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65. In the tutorial display section TT5, "Princess is Yatsushiro General" is displayed, but "Panda is the master of the lord" is changed. Here, the flame effect EF1 may be erased after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, or the notice icon display frame YF may be erased after the flame effect EF1 is erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be deleted at the same time. The display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be a timing before the flame effect EF1 is deleted or a timing after the flame effect EF1 is deleted. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT5 may not be changed. Further, the change icon or the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). In this case, the configuration may be such that the increase in the number of reservations is reflected firmly.

  In this example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the notice icon enlargement animation described above ends, Since the display frame in which the first preview icon in the preview icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the preview icon display frame YF can be visually recognized, In the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background display appears in an area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF. In this case, since there is no notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, no notice icon that is difficult to view is not generated.

  Also, in this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. However, for example, a flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the preview icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (i) without going through the preview icon enlargement animation, or, for example, the preview icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (l) without going through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the reserved icon display area. May be displayed.

  Further, in this effect example, the notice icon that has been stocked is displayed in a normal display mode by a reduced animation after being enlarged and displayed, but, for example, the notice icon is consumed in a state where the notice icon is enlarged and displayed. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without displaying the notice icon in a normal display mode.

  In addition, in this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed so that the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed. After the notice icon to be digested is enlarged (displayed in the second display mode), the digest icon may be digested, or when the digest icon is digested, the notice icon is enlarged (displayed in the second display mode). You may do so.

  Further, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation performed when the notice icon is stocked may be canceled by the trigger of the stock. For example, when a notice icon is stocked by the action of the character (for example, an animation of the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character) immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern, a part is canceled (for example, the latter half part). May be canceled), or, for example, the stock of a preview icon due to the stoppage of a special symbol such as a pseudo consecutive symbol may not be canceled.

  Further, the mode of the enlarged display may be different depending on the number of the notice icons already stocked and the number of the notice icons stocked. Further, the mode of the enlarged display may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

  In addition, when the holding is increased while the notice icon is displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at a start port) blinks, or an effect sound is output. And the like. This may be performed, for example, when the number of holdings to be pre-read is increased at the time of starting winning. In addition, even when the hold is increased while the notice icon is displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at a starting port) blinks, and an effect sound is output. May not be performed, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. In this way, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be easier.

  In addition, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the change icon and the hold icon may be enlarged and displayed together. In this case, if the number of holdings increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon, the holding increase animation may not be performed.

  In the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “hot fever”, “SP”, “pseudo-ream”, etc.), it may be referred to as notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 138 is a schematic explanatory view showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a-1), in the gaming board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate-like shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is provided. The transparent protection member CL is formed, for example, to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and has a rib RB formed at the upper end, and protrudes forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about one third of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 via the transparent protective member CL. I have. The rib RB prevents the game ball jumped into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring by colliding with the effect movable body or the like arranged in the camera.

  FIG. 138 (a-2) shows a state where the effect display 206 is applied to the decorative symbol display device 208 by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 138, a crest actor 224 </ b> E as one of the effect movable bodies is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protection member CL. It is configured to be able to be displaced. As shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI portion is arranged at the lower portion of the display screen. It is displayed in the state accommodated in the frame FL1, and on the left side of the change icon h0, a reserved icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so as to be able to display four reserved icons is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is blinking, and the prefetching is performed. This is a display mode of a notice. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2) is in a non-display state. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen along with the balloon TT2, and the grandpa character GY1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The balloon TT3 is displayed. In the balloon part TT2, a line saying "Where is the grandfather?" Is displayed, and in the balloon part TT3, a line "Here" is displayed. Note that the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative pattern during the variable display, and are in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state where they do not overlap with the decorative pattern during the variable display. Also, a part of the UI unit (the holding display frame FL1 and the change icons h0 and the holding icons h11 and h12 displayed in the holding display frame FL1) and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi overlap with the transparent protection member CL and are transparent. In some cases, the visibility is reduced as compared with the case where the protection member CL does not overlap.

  FIG. 138 (a-3) shows a state in which the family crest role item 224E rises and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is expanded so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-3), the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), the family crest role item 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlapping state with the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-4) shows a state in which the fluctuating icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the extended display frame FL1. Have been. Note that the balloon TT2 is overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an extended manner, and it is difficult to visually recognize the balloon portion TT2 as compared with the case where the balloon portion TT2 does not overlap the extended portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is extended. Since the balloon TT3 is displayed above the hold display frame FL1, it does not overlap. In addition, the decorative symbol during the variable display is overlapped with the reserved display frame FL1, and it is partially difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the decorative symbol is not overlapped with the reserved display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, the extended display of the hold display frame FL1 allows the display to be higher than the transparent protection member CL, so that the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 138 (b-1) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. (A-2), and FIG. This is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-1a), between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protection member CL, in addition to the above-mentioned crest role item 224E, the size of the decorative design display device 208 is substantially the same. The light guide plate IL is arranged. The light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest object 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (b-1), the family crest role item 224E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this manner, a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and another part is viewed through the transparent protection member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. The configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG. 114, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  FIG. 138 (b-2) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. (A-3), and FIG. 138 (b-2a) is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. This is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-2a), the crest actor 224E is interposed between the decorative design display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the crest actor 224E is disposed between the decorative design display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to visually recognize as compared to the case where no intervening member is present.

  FIG. 138 (b-3) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. (A-4), and FIG. 138 (b-3a) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. This is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b-3a), since the crest actor 224E has moved below the decorative symbol display device 208, the player can move the crest actor 224E between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The display state of the decorative design display device 208 is easily visible through the transparent protection member CL and the light guide plate IL, as compared with the case where the display device 208 is interposed in the display device.

  FIG. 138 (c-1) and FIG. 138 (c-2) are diagrams illustrating an example of a layer configuration in which images displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (c-1), the above-mentioned reserved display frame FL1 is arranged on the first layer layer LY1. In the example illustrated in FIG. 138 (c-2), the portion (extended portion) of the hold display frame FL1 that has been extended upward is the second layer disposed behind the first layer layer LY1. It is arranged in the layer LY2. Note that the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extension of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged on the second layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extension of the suspension display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts respectively arranged on the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, and for example, a dialogue notice, a decorative design, or a notice display (for example, a display in which an arrow flies) ) Can be displayed. In addition, the extended portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2), so that parts are not straddled on two or more layers, and are configured as one image data. It may be.

  In addition, the display mode of the UI unit may be configured to be different depending on an effect stage and an effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as “effect stage, etc.”) corresponding to each game state, or may be common.

  In addition, at least a part of the production stage or the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or may be changed according to the progress of the game (for example, every change number). Is also good.

  In addition, the operation of “the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward”, which is a characteristic operation of the present invention, is at least a part of an effect stage or the like (for example, an effect stage or the like in a non-electric support state, It may be performed in a part of the effect stages that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is being displayed during the change), or may be performed in all effect stages.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 154.

  FIG. 139 to FIG. 154 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step modifications of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 139 to 154, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. 139 to 150, 152 and 154 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, a first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, a second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a length in the width direction shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a slightly shorter height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a right end portion overlapping the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left edge portion which is the second edge portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are closest to each other, they can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily those in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device. It is added here, just in case, because it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Also, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. Can be displayed, or a plurality of types of effect displays can be displayed. In addition, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a part of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side with respect to at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. FIGS. 139 to 150 and FIGS. 152 to 154 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a reservation change notice effect as a prefetch notice effect using a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 140 shows a step-by-step example of the effect shown in FIG. 139. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit has a change icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in the form of being accommodated in the rectangular holding display frame FL1, and a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. I have. Note that, in a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal of the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. Further, on the right side of the change icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various kinds of information on games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and a description of the character of the lord is made. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage is hot when the stage shifts to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when a normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot compared to the display of the red stage name, so this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying a currently performed stage name or reach name is arranged at a lower portion of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, so that the display mode changes when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed at all times, or may not be displayed during a certain period. Further, the UI unit may be always displayed, or there may be a period during which the UI unit is not displayed. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The main character may or may not always be displayed.

  A crest role object 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. Further, the crest role object 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents. Above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yatsushiro role 224Fa and a Shogun role 224Fb, which are one of the production movable bodies, are arranged, and move in the vertical direction according to the production content. It is configured to be able to. Each of the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the general role type 224Fb has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the effect contents.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third special figure 1 reserve icon h13 (third reserve icon) is displayed in the reserve icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. However, in this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, the display mode of blinking white). At this time, a sound output of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed. The sound output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 may change before the voice output from the speaker 120 changes. You may. In this case, the configuration may be such that the timing is always performed at any timing, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the timing of the change of the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. On the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanation display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. Princess Chibi's character CH1 and balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or a line effect) is performed, and perform a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), an explanation display of “this variation is. Although the balloon TT2 overlaps the first decorative pattern, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Also, Princess Chibi's character CH1 and balloon TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, speech balloon TT2 may be displayed after Princess Chibi's character CH1 is displayed, or balloon TT2 may be displayed. After that, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi may be displayed. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon portion TT2 has been changed to the explanation display of "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the description of the balloon TT2 is changed, or the timing after the description of the balloon TT2 is changed. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the description of the balloon TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. In addition, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon TT2 are overlapped by a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped by a plurality of arrows. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is not displayed. The timing at which the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the display of the balloon TT2 is changed, or may be the timing before the display of the balloon TT2 is changed. Is also good. Further, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 is deleted and the timing at which the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (e), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the left symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6”. Note that the left symbol stopped and displayed in “decoration 6” is displayed so as to partially overlap the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. Note that a plurality of arrows and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi have been deleted. The timing of the deletion of the plurality of arrows may be after the princess Chibi character CH1 has been deleted, before the princess Chibi character CH1 has been deleted, or the princess Chibi character CH1 may be deleted. The timing may be the same as the timing. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 2”, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” After the swing fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is determined. Also, at the timing of the first decorative symbol finalization stop display, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. . At this time, the change icon h0 may be deleted or may remain displayed. Also, the decorative symbol may be erased before the swing fluctuation state is started.

  FIG. 140 (a) shows a state during the symbol stop display, continuing from FIG. 139 (g).

  When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the holding icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. Is held in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. And the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal, respectively. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be at the timing after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, at the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or at the same time as the change of the decorative symbol. The timing may be before the start of the display. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanation display unit) is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. Is displayed. In the speech balloon TT2, the words "Where is the grandfather?" Are displayed, and a conversation notice has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which a plurality of arrows again descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in a plurality of symbol change displays in succession. In this effect example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed as in FIG. 139 (c), but another character may be displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen along with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a line effect) is performed, and perform a tutorial display (explanatory display), a preview display, and the like. At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (d), in response to the words displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, words are displayed in the balloon TT3 as "Here", and the conversation notice is continued. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 overlap with the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 may overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap the first decorative symbol. In addition, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon TT3 may be displayed after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon TT3 may be displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. In addition, the conversation notice by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display section TT1, it is not displayed. The timing at which the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or may be the timing before the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. Is also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), a state is shown in which the family crest role item 224E has risen from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, after moving, the crest role item 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the balloon part TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, the reserved display frame FL1 is extended upward, and the family crest role object 224E is displayed. It is shown as if it appears above. In other words, it can be said that a portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest role item 224E appears. Further, the extended hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the balloon TT2 and overlaps with the balloon TT2, but does not overlap with the balloon TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, the dialogue notice (the balloon TT3) displayed later may not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expanded display mode. Note that, in this effect example, a diagram of the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown. However, the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands stepwise.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest role 224E, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the family crest role 224E does not partially overlap.

  FIG. 140 (h) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the crest role item 224E is enlarged, and the visual recognition is facilitated. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that is performing a prefetch notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or behind the display of the conversation notice by the princess Chibi character CH1 or the grandfather character GY1. . It can be said that the effect of the ninja character NJ1 is being performed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL1. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area inside the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area inside the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. The effect of the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of a pre-reading notice or a change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ1) performed in the extended holding display frame FL1, but can be said to be an effect performed outside the holding display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 140 (i) shows a state in which the family crest role item 224E has returned to the initial position. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 140 (i), the area in the frame of the suspended display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area in the frame of the suspended display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes the entire second hold icon h12 difficult to visually recognize, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. As a result, in some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change to increase the reliability of the big hit.

  Thereafter, FIG. 140 (k) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest role item 224E changes from white to green. In other words, it can be said that the notification that the display color of the second hold icon h12 will change from white to green is notified in advance. In other words, before the hold icon of the hold to be prefetched changes, predetermined light-emitting means (such as an LED incorporated in the family crest role item 224E or an LED provided in the special figure starting port) is changed to the hold icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily and easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. The sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may change after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 may be performed. The change of the mode and the audio output may be performed simultaneously. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, the hold display frame FL1 is displayed in FIG. Animation display (reduced animation) in which the image is reduced so as to have the shape shown is performed. The reduced animation may be performed without erasing the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. May be overlapped with each other, and finally erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes a default display mode.

  Note that, in the above-described effect example, the start timing of each effect such as Chibi princess character CH1, grandfather character GY1, notice of a plurality of arrows, family crest role item 224E, decorative design change display, extension operation of hold display frame FL1, and the like. And the end timing can be determined in any combination.

  Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, a ninja character NJ1) for changing the holding icon is displayed in the expanded holding display frame FL1, but an image substantially the same as the changed holding icon is displayed. May be configured to be displayed, or an image that recalls the changed reserved icon (corresponding to the changed reserved icon) may be displayed.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon fails in the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1.

  FIG. 140 (i ′) corresponds to FIG. 140 (i) and has the same effect contents as FIG. 140 (i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (j ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, although the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, the effect EF2 is not displayed, and the shuriken SH1 becomes the second hold icon. 140 (k '), as shown in FIG. 140 (k'), the fact that the shuriken SH1 has framed out below the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has failed in changing the display mode of the hold icon. Directing. Therefore, the display state of the second hold icon h12 remains the state of blinking white.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the pending change announcement effect. FIG. 141 illustrates a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed in response to the stop display of the decorative symbol indicating the character display of “change” in the middle symbol. That is, it can be said that the decorative pattern of “change” is a display suggesting the effect contents.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower portion of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is provided at the center of the UI section in the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in the accommodated mode, and a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in a default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white, and the display of the prefetch notice is displayed. It is displayed in a manner. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the first decorative symbol display device 208L swings and fluctuates due to the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-change-decoration 1”. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is in the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative design. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 141 (a), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, and a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of a lord character on the stage is shown, and at the top of the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (b) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E has risen from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest role item 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and displays a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle pattern of “change”. Covering. Note that the family crest role item 224E may not overlap the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the reserved display frame FL1 is expanded upward and appears above the family crest role object 224E. At this time, the extended hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of "change") overlaps the extended display frame FL1. Note that the extended display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears above the hold display frame FL1. The ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest role 224E, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a case where the family crest role 224E does not partially overlap.

  FIG. 141 (e) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the crest role item 224E is enlarged, and the visual recognition is facilitated. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that is performing a prefetch notice. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon has been started in a state where the display indicating the effect contents (decorative symbol of “change”) is overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (f) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E has returned to the initial position. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12 and the second holding icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes the entire second hold icon h12 difficult to visually recognize, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, FIG. 141 (h) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest role object 224E changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visually recognized again as compared with a state in which the effect EF2 is not deleted. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the reserved display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, the reduced animation of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes a default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state where the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 142 shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of the frame in the normal state, and enters the frame from below when the explanation display is performed. FIGS. 142 (a) to (n) are the same as FIGS. 140 (a) to (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation of moving into and out of the frame. Only the portions will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 140 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed, and the frame is out.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation of the frame-in of the tutorial display section TT1 (frame-in animation) is started from below the right-hand frame of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 142 (c), the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and a character display of "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. The timing at which the character display on the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. Further, the character display of “Panda is the master of the lord” in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the animation (frame-out animation) of the frame-out of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. For 5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), when the crest role item 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display part TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 is changed. May overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 142 (f) to (h), the tutorial display section TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation in which the frame is out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. Note that the description displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or may start when the frame-out animation starts. It may be deleted at the timing after the operation is completed, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. The start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be a timing before the start of the extended animation, or may be the timing of the extended animation. The timing may be after the start. In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 can be said to be an example of a second extended display. For example, the tutorial display section TT1 is similar to the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this production example, it may be referred to as an example of a first extended display) in that the tutorial display section TT1 is not overlapped with a decorative symbol. It can be said that they differ in that they do not overlap in the notice, that there are few overlapping areas, that they overlap less frequently, and so on.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. FIG. 143 shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation and the frame is out, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 again enters the frame, and a preview display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (n) show that the tutorial display section TT1 enters the frame again after the tutorial display section TT1 has framed out, and that the notice display is performed on the tutorial display section TT1. (A) to (n), only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as in (a) to (n) of FIG. 142 will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the tutorial from the bottom right of the display screen under the tutorial. The frame-in animation on the display unit TT1 is started again, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (j), the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the text “pseudo-ream” is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1. The display is displayed. That is, a display indicating that a pseudo-ream may be performed is performed. That is, the tutorial display section TT1 can perform a preview display in addition to the tutorial display. It should be noted that the character display of the “pseudo series” may be an advance notice of the change or a pre-read advance notice. The timing of completion of the frame-in animation in the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or may be a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. May be present or at the same timing as the start of the display of the effect EF2. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 143 (j) to (n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the configuration is such that the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is longer when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. Further, the color of the characters may be different between the case of the explanation display and the case of the notice display. Thus, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be performed a plurality of times.

  In the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a pattern of success or failure are displayed, and when a success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , Display that gives a change to another effect display such as a change of hold (for example, a change of the display mode of the hold icon, a change of the display mode of the fluctuating icon, the stop of the pseudo-sequence symbol, the generation of the pseudo-sequence, the display mode of the speech notice) Change (for example, change a blue line or a blue background line to a red line or red line dialogue line), step up for a line announcement (for example, in a state where the character A line is displayed in advance, and then a line for the character B) For example, a notice display may be performed.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a stepwise example of a super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 144, for example, a symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode has been changed as described above is performed after the effect display illustrated in FIG. 140 is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is displayed at the center of the UI unit in the suspended display frame FL1. It is displayed in the accommodated mode, and a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The fluctuating icon h0 has a display mode of a pre-reading advance notice displayed in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been deleted. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is in the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 shows a state in which the character display “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and the explanation display is being performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 144 (a), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, and a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of a lord character on the stage is shown, and at the top of the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Also, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been. It should be noted that the family crest role object 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the change icon h0.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display to notify that it will develop into a super reach (swordsman reach).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby producing a high degree of reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. . Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the change icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the change icon and the hold icon. In some cases, these displays may be more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where they do not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI section FO animation) in which the UI section frames out below the display screen has been started. Specifically, when the UI section FO animation is started, the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is deleted, and the hold icon displayed on the hold icon display area is deleted. Note that the timing of deleting the character display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the timing of deleting the reserved icon or a timing after the timing of deleting the reserved icon. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. Although the fluctuating icon h0 is not deleted, the fluctuating icon h0 may also be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 144 (d) to 144 (g), the UI section is framed out by the UI section FO animation. It should be noted that, even if the hold display frame FL1 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon can sometimes be recognized based on the emission color of the family crest role item 224E. That is, as described above, the display is performed by performing the symbol change display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 as described above. Even after the hold display frame FL1 accommodating the change icon is hidden, the display mode after the change of the hold icon may be confirmed in some cases.

  FIG. 144 (h) shows a state where the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the castle town background to the background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display is performed. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, characters of "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the lord character and the swordsman character shown in FIG. 126 (c) to FIG. In the symbol display device 208L, the protagonist of the hero loses to the enemy swordsman, and as a result, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2” is derived for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the fluctuation is caused to fluctuate. Is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the castle town background. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 144 (j) to (n), an animation in which the UI unit enters the frame from below the display screen (UI unit FI animation) is performed. The hold icon is displayed again after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed. However, the hold icon may be displayed when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the display of the UI part FI animation may be performed. It may be displayed simultaneously with completion. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is decorated with “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Stop display is performed with the combination of symbols, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, the family crest role object 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol display device 208N also displays the first decorative symbol, it may be deleted at the time of stop display. Further, the timing at which the family crest role object 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, the timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the decoration. The timing may be after the symbol stop display. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. Further, the change icon h0 may be changed to a default display mode once before the stop display of the decorative symbol and then deleted, or may be changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative symbol. May be deleted after that, or may be deleted without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative pattern, or after the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display mode may be changed. It may be erased without change, or may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the stop display timing of the decorative symbol.

  In the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the display frame FL1 after expansion, during expansion, and during reduction may be configured to be displayed. Of the reserved display frame FL1 may not be overlapped with the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  In addition, the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach. In this configuration, each timing (for example, the cut-in of a friendly character or the cut-in of an enemy character, , Or the display mode at the display timing of the dialogue displayed in blue or the dialogue displayed in red, etc.).

  In addition to or in place of the above-described configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be able to be framed in during super-reach, and the display mode at each of the above-described timings may be changed. May be displayed from among a plurality of types of displays.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change announcement effect. Here, FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4) show a state in which an effect display for stocking a preview icon is performed in an extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 145 (b- FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (b-1) show a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in a state where the notice icon is stocked. FIG. (C-6) illustrates a state in which an effect in which the display mode of the notice icon is changed by an effect that is partially common to the change mode of the display mode of the hold icon is performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 145 (a-1) is the same as that of FIG. 140 (g) except that a treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omitted. As shown in FIG. 145 (a-1), the notice icon BX of the treasure box is partially overlapped with the family crest role 224E and partially not overlapped with the family crest role 224E. In comparison, it is considered difficult to see. Further, in this effect example, a treasure box notice icon BX will be described as an example of a notice icon, but the present invention is also applicable to, for example, displaying various notice icons shown in FIGS. 81 and 136 (d). Needless to say.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-2), a state in which the family crest combination object 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, a portion of the treasure box notice icon BX that is not overlapped with the family crest role item 224E is enlarged, and visual recognition is facilitated.

  Thereafter, FIG. 145 (a-3) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second holding icon h12. At this time, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped and displayed above the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. This suggests that some kind of advance notice will be given in the symbol change display based on the hold. That is, the pre-reading advance notice is given by the advance icon BX of the treasure box.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-6) are similar to those shown in FIG. 140 (g) except that a treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. Since FIG. 1 (l) is the same, detailed description is omitted. Note that the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 145 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4), and may include, for example, other effects. (For example, an effect performed by stopping a chance symbol) or the like may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 145 (b-3) illustrates a state in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the treasure chest notice icon BX. Here, the shuriken SH1 may be overlapped with the treasure chest notice icon BX, or may be overlapped with the treasure chest notice icon BX. That is, for example, even if the treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. May be displayed on the front side or on the back side.

  FIG. 145 (b-4) shows a state in which the effect EF2 overlaps with the entire treasure box notice icon BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. As a result, it is not known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes, and the player can be given a sense of expectation in some cases.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-5), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 145 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second holding icon h12. However, the emission of the crest role object 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the changed holding icon is displayed. No change in aspect is seen. That is, it can be said that the change of the hold icon is not displayed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest role object 224E.

  FIG. 145 (c-6) following FIG. 145 (c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 has been erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is deleted, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure chest notice icon BX changes. In some cases, the player may give unexpectedness to the production and further increase the expectation of the big hit by changing the promotion icon BX of the treasure box instead of changing the display mode of the hold icon. is there. The mode of change of the treasure box notice icon BX is not limited to the change in size, but may be, for example, a shape change, a color change, or a combination thereof. . As shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), the speaker 120 outputs a sound to notify that the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX has changed, but does not perform the sound output. It may be.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the pending change announcement effect. Here, in FIGS. 146 (a-1) to (a-6), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, blinking in white). 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-4), the display state of the hold icon is displayed when another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1. FIG. 146 (c-1) to FIG. 146 (c-5) show an effect in which the effect of changing the effect is being performed. In FIG. 146 (c-1) to FIG. Is shown.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 146 (a-1) is the same as that in FIG. 140 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and therefore detailed description is omitted. In addition, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a default display mode.

  FIG. 146A subsequent to FIG. 146A shows that the family crest role item 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the crest role item 224E is enlarged, and the visual recognition is facilitated. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third holding icon h13 adjacent to the second holding icon h13, which is not the second holding icon h12 performing the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (a-3) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E returns to the initial position. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the third holding icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13 and the third hold icon h13 explodes. Is being done. This effect EF2 makes the entire third holding icon h13 difficult to visually recognize, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second holding icon h12. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains in the display mode of the prefetch notice (blinking in white).

  Then, FIG. 146 (a-5) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest role object 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notification that the display color of the third hold icon h13 will change from white to green is notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with a state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. It is easily displayed. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. The sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 changes, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may change after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 may be performed. The change of the mode and the audio output may be performed simultaneously. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged as the display mode of the prefetch notice. According to this effect example, not only the second hold icon h12 but the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12 is changed, so that the effect can be given a surprising effect, and the second hold icon h13 can be provided. In some cases, it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the symbol change display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 while maintaining the expectation for the symbol change display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12. . Although the effect example has been described with respect to the third holding icon adjacent to the second holding icon which is the target of the prefetch notice, the effect example may be performed with respect to the first holding icon. If there is a fourth hold, the hold may be performed on the fourth hold icon h14.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 146 (b-1) to (b-4), the extended character BC1 instead of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the throwing object is also displayed. 140 (g) to FIG. 140 (j) except for the point that is changed, only the different points will be described in detail, and the other parts will not be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, not the ninja character NJ1 but the longest character BC1 appears above the hold display frame FL1. In addition, the character BC1 of the bancho is partially overlapped with the family crest combination 224E, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state in which a part is not overlapped with the family crest combination 224E.

  FIG. 146 (b-2) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the first character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest role item 224E is enlarged, and visual recognition is facilitated. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the character BC1 who is the chief character throws a qigong wave KK1 as a throwing object instead of the shuriken SH1. This qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that is performing the prefetch notice. The effect display of the Qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the display of the notice of the conversation by the princess Chibi character CH1 or the grandfather character GY1. Good.

  Thereafter, FIG. 146 (b-3) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E returns to the initial position. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the qigong wave KK1 is heading for the second holding icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the qigong wave KK1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the qigong wave KK1. At this time, the number character BC1 has been deleted from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. As described above, in this effect example, by allowing characters other than the ninja character NJ1 to be displayed, for example, there is a case where the reliability of the big hit can be changed depending on the characters that appear.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 146 (c-1) to (c-3) show that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-3) except for the above, only the differences will be described in detail, and the other detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (c-3) following FIG. 146 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but also in the entire hold icon display area. That is, by displaying this effect EF3, it is notified that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are to be changed in the display mode. This may provide the expectation that reliability may increase for all holds. At the timing shown in FIG. 146 (c-4), the longest character BC1 has been deleted from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. The effect by the effect EF3 is an effect that is performed only when the number character BC1 appears, and may be an effect that is not performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. Further, when the number-leading character BC1 appears, an effect by the effect EF3 may be always performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icons h11 to h3 are compared with a state in which the effect EF3 is not erased. Is displayed again easily. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 have changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this effect example, not only the hold icon to be prefetched, but also the display mode of all the hold icons displayed is changed, so that the effect can be made surprising, and all the hold In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. May be performed.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the pending change announcement effect. Here, FIG. 147 (a-1) to FIG. 147 (a-5) show that the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged, and FIG. 147 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened, and the appearance of the character related to the hold change announcement effect appears therein, as shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4). Shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuating icon is being performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (g) and described above, and therefore detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) following FIG. 147 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. In addition, the ninja character NJ1 has also moved further upward in accordance with the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest role 224E, and is easier to recognize as compared with the state where it is overlapped with the family crest role 224E. Further, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the balloon TT3, and it is difficult to visually recognize the display of the balloon TT3 as compared with a state where it does not overlap with the balloon TT3. Also, the family crest role item 224E is descending toward the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 throws three shurikens SH1. These three shurikens SH1 are all moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a prefetch notice is being given. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the family crest role object 224E has returned to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. The display has been made.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with a state where the effect EF2 is not deleted. It is easily displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the manner of a lord. At this time, a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be output from the speaker 120. Further, at this time, the light emission mode of the family crest role object 224E has not changed, but may change. Thus, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 140, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is further enlarged upward, and the effect contents are partially different. The effect contents may be the same even if the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, there is a case where the sense of expectation for the big hit can be changed depending on the change amount of the hold display frame FL1.

  The extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only above but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3 ′), in addition to expanding the hold display frame FL1 upward, the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping with the hold icon to be prefetched. Good. Further, the extension range of the suspension display frame FL1 in the up-down direction may be as shown in FIG. 140 (g), and the extension range in the width direction may be a range overlapping the suspension icon to be prefetched. When a third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 to be prefetched is displayed, the third hold icon is enlarged in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. May be configured. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the third hold icon.

  In FIG. 147 (b-1), the family crest role item 224E has risen from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 has expanded upward due to the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1, but no character appears in the expanded portion. The state where the family crest role object 224E has moved to the initial position is shown. The other effect contents are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started, and the back side of the background is visually recognized. The state where the display of the various modes is performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 is shown. Note that a plurality of types of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 with the background fully opened may be prepared, and the colors may be changed depending on the degree of expectation of the change of the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1. The timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be after the timing when the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing when the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Or at a timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is in the fully open state. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12 and the second holding icon h12 explodes. Is being done. At this time, a closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 descends like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be earlier than the start timing of the display of the effect EF2, or may be the same as the start timing of the display of the effect EF2. Alternatively, the timing may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 147 (c-1) is the same as that in FIG. 140 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0, and therefore the differences are described. The details will be described, and the description of the other will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 toward the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the fluctuating icon h0 and the fluctuating icon h0 explodes is displayed. The effect EF3 makes the entire variation icon h0 difficult to visually recognize, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Thereby, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol change display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change and the reliability of the change to the big hit may increase. In some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, FIG. 147 (c-3) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest role object 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the user is notified in advance that the display color of the change icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, before a notice of a change in the display mode of the fluctuating icon is given, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED built in the crest object 224E or an LED provided in the special figure starting port) is turned on. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is deleted, and the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed easily again. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting up in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the change icon h0 has changed. The sound output may be performed after the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 changes, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 may change after the voice output is performed, or the display of the fluctuating icon h0 may be performed. The change of the mode and the audio output may be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the pending change announcement effect. FIG. 148 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is out of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion is arranged at the lower portion of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is provided at the center of the UI portion in the suspended display frame FL1. It is displayed in the accommodated mode, and a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is in the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative design. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon TT2, which indicates that a UI section FO animation in which a UI section including a hold display frame FL1 will be out of frame will be performed. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 148 (a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden by frame out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 148 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display mode above the stage name display section ST1, and a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of a lord character on the stage is shown, and at the top of the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figure are displayed. 1 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 are displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  FIG. 148 (b) shows a state in which the UI section FO animation is performed and the UI section is framed out below the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. The UI section FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to a blackout effect or SP reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect in which the ninja character NJ1 is displayed and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the decorative pattern and also overlaps with the balloon TT2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the exploding effect EF2 is displayed. I have.

  Thereafter, FIG. 148 (e) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest role object 224E changes from white to green. That is, the user is notified in advance that the display color of the second hold icon h12 will change from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, but since the UI section is still in the frame-out state, the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, a sound of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which the UI section is framed in (UI section FI animation) is performed, and the UI section FI animation is completed. When the UI part FI animation is completed, the UI part is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has been changed from white to green.

  In this effect example, the UI section is framed out including the hold display frame FL1, and during this time, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, FIGS. 148 (a ′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI section may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 148 (a ′) is the same as that in FIG. 148 (a), and therefore detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 148 (b ′) following FIG. 148 (a ′) shows a state in which the UI part FO animation has been completed. As shown in FIG. 148 (b ′), in this effect example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part is framed out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being framed out. State is maintained.

  In FIG. 148 (c ′), an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and thereafter, the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (c ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed with the second hold icon h12. There is a performance of throwing at the position where it was done. In other words, in this effect example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold icon that is the target of the display mode change is not displayed.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the pending change announcement effect. Here, FIGS. 149 (a-1) to (a-7) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are performed at the same time, FIG. 149 (b-1) to FIG. 149 (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 140 (f), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) following FIG. 149 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 appears above the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest role 224E, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state in which the family crest role 224E does not partially overlap.

  Also, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character is started, and the lord character tries to throw the bomb icon I61.

  Thereafter, FIG. 149 (a-3) shows a state where the family crest role object 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the crest role item 224E is enlarged, and the visual recognition is facilitated. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that is performing a prefetch notice.

  On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state in which a lord character throws a bomb icon I61 is shown. Note that the timing of starting the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1, or the timing before the start of throwing the shuriken SH1. It may be a timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, FIG. 149 (a-4) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E returns to the initial position. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-4), the display is performed such that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps the first decorative pattern and also overlaps the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative pattern, or may be overlapped with the grandfather character GY1 or the balloon TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second holding icon h12 and the second holding icon h12 explodes. Is being done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character bursts. Note that the timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or the timing after the effect EF2 is displayed. Timing. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 149 (a-6), it is notified that the emission color of the family crest role item 224E changes from white to green, and that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-6), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, informing that the game will shift to the swordsman's reach. Here, at the timing when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, a sound notifying the fact may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the timing of changing to the swordsman notice icon I62 may be the same as the timing at which the emission color of the family crest role 224E changes to green, or the timing before the emission color of the family crest role 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family crest role item 224E changes to green. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with a state in which the effect EF2 is not deleted. It is easily displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound of “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size, and thereafter, the bomb icon I61 of the lord character The throwing animation ends. Note that the announcement of the swordsman notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1 may be notified by voice output. As described above, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, the swordsman notice icon I62 is compared with a state where the notice icon I62 is not arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. In other words, according to this effect example, it can be said that the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display section TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is superimposed on the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, so that the player can easily pay attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. You may be able to. Further, in some cases, it is possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol change display rather than the description of the effect that may occur earlier or in the future.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) is the same as that of FIG. 139 (a) except that the character display of “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b-1), which follows FIG. 149 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character becomes the bomb icon An attempt is made to throw I61.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (b-3), the lord character throws a bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 cast by the lord character reaches the second reserved icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts. Is shown. The display of the exploded bomb icon I61 covers the whole of the second reserve icon h12 and overlaps a part of the first reserve icon h11.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the second explosive bomb icon I61 is compared with a state in which the exploded bomb icon I61 is not erased. Is displayed again easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice (display mode that blinks in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon is not limited to the time when the hold is increased, and may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Also, as in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change effect. Further, the effect of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the reserved icon described above may be performed, for example, in a state where the UI unit is out of the frame.

  FIG. 150: is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of a reservation change notice effect. Here, FIG. 150 illustrates a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while the sub-display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are movable.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 150 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 140 (d), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 150 (a-2) following FIG. 150 (a-1) shows a state in which the stage-like character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been deleted for each stage.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 150 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each of the grandfather character GY1, the balloon part TT3, the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Each of the TT3, the tutorial display section TT1, and a part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N does not overlap.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-4) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and a change icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the change icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. . That is, it can be said that the reserved display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an extended display of the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the overlap with the grandfather character GY1 has been resolved, but each of the balloon TT3 and a part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is still in the third decorative symbol display. Overlapping device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the hold display frame FL1, the fluctuating icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, and each part of the balloon TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case, it is difficult to visually recognize the suspended display frame FL1 and the fluctuating icon h0 accommodated in the suspended display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon TT2 that are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has reached the position where its center matches the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and has finished moving. Then, all of the holding display frame FL1 and the middle symbols of the first decoration symbol displayed on the first decoration symbol display device 208L are overlapped with the third decoration symbol display device 208N, and together with the middle symbol and the holding display frame FL1. The fluctuating icon h0 becomes invisible in a front view. Further, the first hold icon h11, the balloon TT2, and a part of the balloon TT3 are also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first reserve icon h11, the balloon TT2, and a part of the balloon TT3 are partially overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the third decorative symbol display device 208N as compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N does not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an extended animation of the reserved display frame FL2 is performed, the reserved display frame FL2 is extended upward, and the ninja's ninja is added to the extended portion. A state in which the character NJ2 appears is shown. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is expanded and displayed is further expanded and displayed. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. And may be made smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-7), a state in which the ninja character NJ2 is throwing the shuriken SH1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 that is performing the prefetch notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or the back side of the display of the conversation notice by the princess Chibi character CH1 or the grandfather character GY1. . It can be said that the effect of the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL2 after the extension. In other words, it can be said that a ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect of the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of a pre-reading notice or a change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the extended holding display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the holding display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Is being done. The effect EF2 partially overlaps the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-10) illustrates a state in which the emission color of the family crest role object 224E changes from white to green. In addition, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and these light emitting means notify that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. I do. Note that the timing of the change of the emission color of the family crest role object 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or the timing of the change of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or may be at the timing before the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with a state in which the effect EF2 is not deleted. It is easily displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, the fact that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be notified by voice output.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the hold display frame FL2 is deleted together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by an animation of frame-out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fade-out, or may be suddenly erased.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-13) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves rightward toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is canceled, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in the third decorative symbol display. The device 208N is partially overlapped, and is partially visible together with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and compared with a state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is in a visible state, the right symbol is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state in which the part is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-14) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N has reached the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-14), the overlap has been resolved for each display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that the overlap has occurred. Each display is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize as compared with the state where is not eliminated.

  Thereafter, FIG. 150 (a-15) shows a state in which the LED emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. Instead of turning off the light, the light may be turned on in a default light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode in which white light is emitted). On the other hand, the family crest role item 224E still emits green light corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this effect example, one of the two sub-display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is connected to the first decorative symbol display device 208N. The display device 208L is moved so as to overlap with the display device 208L, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), both of the two sub-display devices are displayed. An effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by moving the hold icon may be performed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), when performing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are connected to the first decorative symbol. The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other at the center. Then, the display frame FL2 is extended and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower portion of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. , A ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the fluctuation icon h00. At this time, the balloon section TT2, the balloon section TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon are displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. All of h0 are overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display section TT1 and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi are overlapped.

  FIG. 151: is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of a reservation change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 151, in place of the two sub-display devices described above, an effect is provided in which only one sub-decorative design display device 208P is provided, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed in the sub-decorative design display device 208P. Is shown.

  FIG. 151 differs from the above-described embodiment in that a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub-decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub-display device are provided. The sub-decorative design display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 208, and the upper edge of the sub-decorative design display device 208P overlaps the front of a part of the lower end edge of the decorative design display device 208. ing. As shown in FIG. 151 (a), on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, a suspension display frame FL1 and a suspension icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a tutorial display section TT1 is provided below these. Are displayed, a fluctuating icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are set to the default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is set to the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is described. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. In the balloon portion TT2, a line is displayed that reads "Where is the grandfather?" On the right side of the display screen, a balloon TT3 is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1. In the balloon part TT3, a word "here" is displayed. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 151 (a), a conversation notice is performed. In addition, although the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 overlap with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern may be overlapped with the balloon parts TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and a fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (a), the display of the decorative symbols is changed.

  Then, FIG. 151 (b) shows a state in which the extended display frame FL1 is expanded and the extended display frame FL1 is extended upward, and the ninja character NJ2 appears in the extended portion. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold display frame FL displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed in an extended part of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the extended hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized as compared with a state where it is not overlapped with the extended hold display frame FL1. It is difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed on the sub decorative symbol display device 208P. A state of moving toward the displayed second holding icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 151 (c) shows a state in which the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, and heads toward the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. I have. This effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily in comparison with the state where the effect EF2 is not deleted. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, the fact that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be notified by voice output.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change announcement effect. Here, FIG. 152 (a-1) to FIG. 152 (a-6) show a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the error display is being performed. FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when an effect display is performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. FIGS. 152 (d-1) to (c-3) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136, and FIGS. FIG. (D-3) shows a state in which the effect of prompting to operate the effect button 136 and changing the display mode of the hold icon when the button effect is being performed is being performed.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 152 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 140 (d) except that an error display is performed. A detailed description of the other components is omitted.

  In FIG. 152 (a-1), when the lower plate is full, a character display "Please remove the ball" is displayed to inform that the lower plate full error has occurred. A state in which the button error display ER is displayed is shown. The lower plate full error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly notify the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the lower plate full error display ER overlaps a part of the balloon portion TT2 is shown. Such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is eliminated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-2), a state is shown in which the family crest role item 224E has risen from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 152 (a-2), since the crest character 224E is arranged on the front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full error display ER is overlapped with the crest character 224E. The lower plate full error display ER is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state in which a part of the lower plate full error display ER is not overlapped with the family crest role item 224E.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation of the reserved display frame FL1 is performed, and the reserved display frame FL1 is extended upward, and is thus higher than the family crest role object 224E. It is shown that it appears upward. In this effect example, since the error display is given priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the lower plate full error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Is difficult to recognize as compared with a state where the lower plate full error display ER is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears above the hold display frame FL1. Note that a part of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the lower plate full error display ER, and it is difficult to view compared to a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full error display ER. It has been.

  FIG. 152 (a-5) shows a state where the family crest role item 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest role item 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full error display ER, a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full error display ER. Character NJ1 is difficult to see. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that is performing a prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, FIG. 152 (a-6) shows a state where the family crest role object 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, the overlapping state of the family crest role item 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the change icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is eliminated. However, since the lower plate full error still continues, the lower plate full error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and an extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. A part is overlapped with the lower plate full error display ER. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 152 (b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and scrolls to the left. Have been. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 152 (b), the second hold icon h12 is set to the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of "enemy invades" is displayed, and contents related to the notice display YK are displayed. In this effect example, in order to display the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon with priority over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner.

  In FIG. 152 (c-1), as an example of the display mode of the pre-reading notice, a state in which the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon which is a display mode imitating the effect button 136 is shown. Note that, in this effect example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of grandfather are not displayed, and the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is not displayed, but the button image 136a may be displayed. In addition, since this button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the display does not overlap even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged and displayed. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (c-2), as shown in FIG. 152 (c-3), the second holding icon h12 is changed from the button holding icon to the second holding icon h12. The icon changes to a hold icon in the display mode of the main character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is set to a state where it can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Is also good.

  FIG. 152 (d-1) illustrates a state where an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed at the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. Is displayed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button effect is performed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this effect example, the effect display for changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the button effect, so that the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed in the hold display frame FL1. Overlapped. In addition, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative design is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative design, and the decorative design is a button effect. It can also be said that the production does not overlap. At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the error display is given priority over the button effect and the hold display frame FL1. When the above-mentioned button hold icon is displayed, the button image 136a is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1. Or may be displayed behind the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed behind the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, when the production button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (d-2), as shown in FIG. Display may be performed. By performing the cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the big hit has high reliability. In this effect example, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. . At this time, if the above-described error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. When the above-mentioned button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating a stepwise example of the symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 153 (a-1) to FIG. 153 (a-5), the effect display is performed only by the decorative design display device 208 as the main display device without the sub display device. FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show a state in which an error display is performed. FIG. 153 (c) shows a state where the display positions of the fluctuating icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 153 (d-1) to FIG. 153 (d). In -2), a state in which a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area is shown.

  FIG. 153 (a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that only the decorative pattern display device 208 as a main display device is provided and no sub-display device is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), the UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display screen. In the upper right of the figure, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed.

  In addition, a family crest role item 224E is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208, and a Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and a general role character portion 224Fb are disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”, and the fluctuation is performed. In the second decorative symbol, a variable display is performed. In the UI unit, a hold display frame FL1 accommodating the change icon h0 is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Each of these change icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 has a default display mode. The tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from left and right to the center of the display screen. In this effect example, an image simulating a sliding door is used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and an effect display in which the sliding door closes is performed as the wipe display. Here, the term “wipe” refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting an image to be displayed next from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of wipe techniques, but any of these techniques can be applied. In this example, the wipe display using the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is performed after the swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the lost decorative patterns. May be performed. Further, for example, it may be performed when the stage is changed, or may be performed when shifting to the super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap with the UI part and the first decorative symbol, while overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display, and the fourth symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area do not overlap with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that the change icon h0 has been deleted at the timing when the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started. Here, the timing at which the fluctuating icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the start of the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2, or at the same timing as the start of the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2. It may be present or at a timing later than the timing at which the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started. Further, in this case, the timing may be configured to be always performed at any timing, or the timing may be configured to be different depending on the case.

  FIG. 153 (a-3) shows a state in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap with the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 displays the wipe image WP1. , WP2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered by the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and a state in which the lost symbol is definitely displayed is displayed. Therefore, the hold display frame FL1 is in a state where it is entirely overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed on the upper left of the display screen is a combination of “decorative 6-decorative 2-decorative 2” in accordance with the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The display is stopped, and the fourth symbol in the special figure 1 is also stopped and displayed in a lost pattern.

  Thereafter, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are respectively frame-out in the left and right directions of the display screen. Will be As a result, the UI portion is made visible, and the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed so as to be visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the first and fourth special symbols have started variable display. At this time, for example, the first holding icon displayed as the first holding icon h11 moves to the holding display frame FL1 and is displayed as the change icon h0 by the holding movement animation. Further, the second holding icon displayed as the second holding icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first holding icon, and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

  FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b-2) show that the wipe display is being performed while the error display is being displayed. 153 (a-3) to FIG. 153 (a-3) to FIG. 153 (a-3) to FIG. 153 (a-3) except that the lower plate full error display ER is displayed. Since this is the same as a-4), only the differences will be described in detail, and the other description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state where the above-mentioned lower plate full error display ER overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is shown. Have been. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly notify the player. Therefore, even in the case shown in FIG. 153 (b-1), the display of the lower tray full error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower plate full error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. . Note that an error display such as the lower plate full error display ER may overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 153 (c) shows a state where the display positions of the fluctuating icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 153 (c) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the display positions of the fluctuating icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the different points will be described in detail. The detailed description is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 153 (c), for example, when an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward together with the expansion of the hold display frame FL1, and from the back side of the change icon h0. An effect is performed in which a ninja character NJ1 appears. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the change icon h0 has changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In FIG. 153 (d-1), a hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12, which is the target of the prefetch notice, is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward, and the ninja is displayed in the expanded portion. A state where the character NJ3 is displayed is shown. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 153 (d-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 ( Since this is the same as b), only the differences will be described in detail, and the other description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround a second hold icon h12 which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. The reserved display frame FL4 is, for example, framed in from the lower part of the display screen and moved to a position surrounding the second reserved icon h12 in a default display mode having a size corresponding to the size of the second reserved icon h12. Thereafter, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward by the extended animation is performed as described above. Then, a ninja character NJ3 is displayed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding and displaying the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding and displaying the hold display frame FL4 are performed. May be overlapped, or the timing at which both effects are performed may not be overlapped.

  In addition, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the next symbol change display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended hold display frame FL4 is reduced to change to the default display mode, and then the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 in the default display mode is also moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the movement animation, and the symbol change display is started. After that, the reserved display frame FL4 is extended upward by extended animation. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such a manner. In addition, at the time of the symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be deleted once, and after the next symbol change display is started, the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again. Further, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state even during the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may also move according to the moving display of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the extended effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 154 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the tutorial display section TT6 as a hold display frame expands, and FIGS. In b-5), a state is shown in which an effect is displayed in which the hold display frame accommodating the hold icon is expanded and the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion is arranged at the lower portion of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is displayed at the center of the UI portion in a suspended display frame. The icon is displayed in a state accommodated in the FL1. On the left side of the change icon h0, a holding icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is in the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative design. In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is arranged below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. . Then, in the tutorial display section TT6, a character display of "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and a state in which the explanation display is performed is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this example, the button image 136a is not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of a lord character on the stage is shown, and at the top of the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Also, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  FIG. 154 (a-2) shows a state in which the tutorial display section TT6 is pushed upward, and the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are pushed upward by the animation of the tutorial display section TT6 extending upward, thereby expanding the range of the tutorial display section TT6. ing. In the extended tutorial display section TT6, a drink confrontation reach effect has been started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area in which the display of the decorative pattern is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, the area (lower area) below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area is expanded by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. The display performed in the lower area is a display that is not overlapped with a decorative pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, for example, a display of a dialogue such as a conversation notice, a display of a notice, a change in display of a hold icon, and the like. It can be said. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a character display of "SP development by victory", and notifies the contents of the effect performed when the victory is reached in the drinker confrontation reach effect. In the liquor confrontation reach production, a hero's lord and a grandfather are compared for drinking, and if the grandfather gets drunk, the hero's lord will win and is predicted to develop into SP reach. In addition, when the drinking confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. You may.

  FIG. 154 (a-3) shows a state in which the drinker confrontation reach effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4), when shifting to SP reach, an effect display in which the grandfather gets drunk and the hero's lord wins is performed. On the other hand, when the result of the loss is displayed without shifting to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4 ′), the production display in which the protagonist of the protagonist is drunk and the protagonist of the protagonist is defeated by the grandfather. Is performed. In the tutorial display section TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1), the effect display performed in the tutorial display section TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) may not be performed. In the tutorial display section TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2), the explanation display performed in the tutorial display section TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) may not be performed. In the state shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the hold icon and the change icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI part UI2 in this effect example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, each constituting a reserved display frame, and configured such that one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), in the holding icon display area, four holding icons are accommodated in each frame, and among the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14, The second hold icon h12 is a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and during the symbol variable display, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the text display of "Advance notice icon ..." is displayed on the tutorial display section TT7, suggesting that a notice effect will be performed. Note that the tutorial display section TT7 may display an explanation. Note that none of the fluctuating icon h0 and the first to fourth holding icons h11 to h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In this example, the stage name display section and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of a lord character on the stage is shown, and at the top of the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the family crest role item 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the reserved icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged display of the reserved icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually enlarges. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12 is displayed in an expanded manner. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-3), the emission color of the crest role object 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 has been changed from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged and displayed second hold icon h12 has been changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation of a big hit for the symbol change display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and returns to the default display mode. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces the size. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon can be performed in the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 155 to FIG. 157 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step modifications of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 155 to 157, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. 155 to 157 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, a first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, a second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a length in the width direction shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a slightly shorter height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a right end portion overlapping the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left edge portion which is the second edge portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are closest to each other, they can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is configured to be able to. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can also rotate independently even when not in the state of being closest to each other. Here, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily those in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner for each display device. It is added here just in case that it is attached and does not narrow down the interpretation of the display device. Also, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. Can be displayed, or a plurality of types of effect displays can be displayed. In addition, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a part of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. In addition, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side with respect to at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 155 to 157 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 155 shows a state in which the UI unit is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 are integrated. Have been. Also, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, it is shown that the explanation display in the stage name display section ST2 is deleted.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 155 (a) has a reserved icon display area formed at the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 155 (a), "Notice icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (b), the third special figure 1 hold icon (third hold icon h13) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of reservations has become three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss. Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is not deleted, but may be deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Then, after the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 155 (d), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation described above with reference to FIGS. 125 (e) to (k).

  FIG. 155 (e) shows a state in which after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character has ruptured, the ruptured bomb icon I61 has changed to the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 and has moved to the stage name display section ST2. At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (e), it is shown that it overlaps the stage name display section ST2 but has not reached the predetermined display position (stock position). In this case, since the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is not yet displayed in the stage name display section ST2, the explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least one of the icons I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is displayed. The part is in a state that is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display section ST2. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon I61 moves to the stage name display section. In addition, a pattern (so-called gasket) in which a notice icon is not acquired after the animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display section ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, even if the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display section ST2, the explanation display may not be erased. When the notice icon is acquired (stocked), as shown in FIG. 155 (e), the explanation display (stage name display) is deleted before the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, and the notice is displayed. In the case of gasses for which an icon is not acquired, as shown in FIG. 155 (e), a configuration may be adopted in which the explanation display is not erased, so that it is possible to grasp in advance whether or not the notice icon is acquired.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (f), when the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display ST2, the previously displayed “I” is displayed in the stage name display ST2. The explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is deleted, and it functions exclusively as an area for displaying a notice icon. Therefore, the character display of "STOCK" is displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the stage name is not displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it is indicated that the notice icon is displayed during the symbol change display that is started after the prefetch target is suspended.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the loss is determined. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 155 (h), the holding icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (h) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 155 (h), the stage is changed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display section ST2 is not displayed, and when the stage name display section ST2 is not displayed, the stage name after the change is changed. No display is performed. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display section ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed. When the stage is changed, the stage name display section ST2 does not display the changed stage name, but displays the changed stage name for a few seconds (for example, 5 seconds) in a portion where the background is displayed. You may do so. The change of the stage may be performed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. You may.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (i), a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanatory display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. I have. In the balloon unit TT2, the above-described conversational production and dialogue production are performed. In this production example, by displaying “GET” together with the pseudo consecutive announcement icon I65, the notice icon related to the pseudo consecutive notice is acquired. Is displayed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon is displayed in the balloon TT2. As described above, in this effect example, while a notice icon is displayed in a certain explanation display area (stage name display part ST2), a notice icon may be displayed in another explanation display area (balloon part TT2). is there. In addition, the balloon TT2 sometimes overlaps the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is not displayed on the balloon section TT2, but may be displayed. The display area of the tutorial display section TT4 may be larger or smaller than the balloon section TT2. The tutorial display section TT4 may have a larger or smaller font than the balloon TT2. Further, the font may be the same or different between the tutorial display section TT4 and the balloon section TT2. In addition, the balloon TT2 may overlap with the decorative design in some cases, but the decorative design does not overlap in the display area where another explanation display is performed, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT4, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than in the balloon section TT2. Further, both the tutorial display section TT4 and the balloon section TT2 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines. The effect related to the notice icon may be performed only in the non-electric support state. In this case, for example, in the configuration in which the state shifts from the electric support state to the non-electric support state and the predetermined number of changes (for example, 30 times) shifts to the predetermined effect mode, a predetermined effect is obtained even in the non-electric support state. In the mode, the effect related to the notice icon may not be performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (j), after the pseudo consecutive symbol in which the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed as “NEXT” stops, “decorative 2-pseudo consecutive symbol- The swing fluctuation display is performed by the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 3”, and a state in which the pseudo-ream is started is shown. This indicates that the pseudo consecutive notice has been performed by the digestion of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 displayed on the balloon TT2. The icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice displayed on the balloon TT2 may be directly digested from the state displayed on the balloon TT2, or may be digested after being temporarily stored in the stage name display ST2. May be performed. As described above, the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice displayed in the balloon TT2 is not stocked until the symbol variation display, which is the object of prefetching, is performed. May be performed. In addition, in this production example, when the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is digested, the pseudo consecutive notice is always performed, but there may be a false notice in which the pseudo consecutive notice is not performed. When the pseudo-announcement icon I65 is consumed, a pseudo-continuous symbol appears and a button image is displayed to prompt the operation of the effect button 136. Further, for example, a question mark may be attached to the notice icon, and a false notice may be given to the notice icon with this mark. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player and the pseudo-sequence symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the pseudo-sequence notice is started. If the pseudo-sequence symbol is not stopped and displayed, a false notice is given. If there is, it may be stopped and displayed as it is with the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss. That is, the icon I65 of the pseudo-serial preview may be used as a preview item in which an effect for inducing whether or not the pseudo-serial preview is performed is performed.

  FIGS. 155 (k1) to (k4) show an example of a display mode when a plurality of notice icons of the same type are stocked. When a plurality of advance notice icons of the same type are stocked, any of the modes described below can be adopted, and a plurality of modes may be used in combination.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (k1), for example, when a plurality of pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, the display color may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (k1), In the case where two pseudo-announcement icons I65 are stocked, they are displayed in a red display mode. That is, when the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 in a red display mode is displayed, it can be said that the pseudo consecutive notice is performed twice. Here, the display mode of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 may be changed according to the number of stocked pseudo consecutive notice icons I65. Further, the change in the display mode may be a change in color, a change in shape, a change in size, or a change in display position. In the case where one of the stocked preview icons I65 is exhausted, for example, the icon I65 of the pseudo-announcement display in red as shown in FIG. 125 (q) fluctuates. After moving, the icon I65 of one pseudo-serial announcement is digested by changing the display mode from red to white, and then the icon I65 of the pseudo-serial preview whose display mode has changed is displayed in the stage name display section. The display position may return to the original display position in ST2. Here, at the timing when the display mode of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 changes, the sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 has been consumed. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (k2), for example, when a plurality of pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, only one pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 is displayed, and the number of stocked preliminary notices is displayed. 155 may be displayed by a number. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (k2), when two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked, “× 2” is displayed together with one pseudo consecutive notice icon I65. Is displayed to notify that two icons I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice are stocked. In the case where one of the plurality of stored icons I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is consumed, for example, after the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice swings in the manner shown in FIG. The icon I65 of one pseudo consecutive notice may be digested by moving the icon I65 of one pseudo consecutive notice upward while leaving the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice in the name display part ST2. At this time, the display indicating the number of stocks of the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice displayed on the stage name display section ST2 is erased when “× 2” is displayed, for example, as “× 3”. In the case of the display indicating the number of stocks of three or more, the display may be such that the numerical value is reduced by one, such as “× 2”. Here, at the timing when the display mode of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 changes, the sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 has been consumed. Good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (k3), for example, when a plurality of pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, the pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 may be displayed side by side by the number of stocks. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (k3), when two pseudo-announcement icons I65 are stocked, two pseudo-announcement icons I65 are displayed side by side, so that the pseudo-announcement icon I65 is displayed. That two are stocked.

  As shown in FIG. 155 (k4), for example, when a plurality of pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked and displayed, they may be displayed using two explanation display areas. In the example shown in (k4), when three pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked, one pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, and two pseudo consecutive notices are displayed on the balloon part TT2. The display of the preview icon I65 informs that three pseudo consecutive preview icons I65 are stocked.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 155 (k1) and (k2), for example, the present invention is applied to a notice icon corresponding to a repeated effect such as a pseudo consecutive notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b). For example, a notice icon corresponding to an effect that is rarely performed a plurality of times, such as a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars corresponding to an effect that promotes the contents of the effect, may not be applied. 155 (k1) and the effect example shown in FIG. 155 (k2) are applied only to the icon I65 of the pseudo-serial announcement, and the announcement icon (for example, chance increase May not be applied.

  In this effect example, the stage name display section ST2 may function as a first display area, the tutorial display section TT4 may function as a second display area, or the stage name display section ST2 may function as a first display area. The balloon TT2 may function as a second display area. Further, the tutorial display section TT4 may function as a first display area, the stage name display section ST2 may function as a second display area, or the tutorial display section TT4 functions as a first display area, and The unit TT2 may function as a second display area. Also, the balloon TT2 may function as a first display area, the stage name display ST2 may function as a second display area, or the balloon TT2 may function as a first display area, and the tutorial display section TT4 may function as the second display area.

  Further, in this effect example, the stage name display section ST2, the tutorial display section TT4, and the balloon section TT2 are all configured to be able to display two or more notice icons, but the stage name display section ST2, the tutorial display section TT4, A part or all of the balloon part TT2 may be configured to be able to display only one notice icon. For example, only one announcement icon may be displayed for the balloon part TT2 where a speech announcement is performed.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect of a notice icon digestion effect applicable to the embodiment in a stepwise manner. FIG. 156 shows an effect performed by digesting the second button notice icon I11.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (a1), a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 156 (a1) has a reserved icon display area formed in the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is suspended, so one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although the change icon h0 is in a default display mode, the first hold icon h11 is for holding the symbol change display which is the target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also the display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode as a blue circle). Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 156 (a1), "Notice of the notification icon is displayed ..." is displayed, but in the stage name display section ST2, the second button notification icon I11 is stocked. And the display of the stage name is deleted. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed, a pseudo consecutive symbol appears, and an effect is provided to inspire whether or not the pseudo consecutive notice is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (a1), it is not possible to know which notice the second button notice icon I11 corresponds to, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation. .

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (a2), a state is shown in which the second button notice icon I11 stocked in the stage name display portion ST2 is digested. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display is performed in such a manner that the second button notice icon I11 jumps out of the stage name display section ST2 and hits the pseudo consecutive symbol. At this time, by displaying an effect image showing a state in which the second button notice icon I11 has hit the pseudo-sequence symbol, it is produced that the second button notice icon I11 has been digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (a3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and the player is notified. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted. In this way, by operating the effect button 136, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive notice will occur. In the stage name display section ST2, since the notice icon that has been stocked has disappeared, the display of the stage name is restarted, and the “shore stage” that is the current stage is displayed. In addition, since the operation of the effect button 136 has been validated, the chance button lamp 138 emits red light to notify the player of the fact. The timing at which the button image 136a starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the chance button lamp 138 emits red light, or the chance button lamp 138 emits red light after the button image 136a starts displaying. The button image 136a may be displayed after the chance button lamp 138 emits red light.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (a4), as shown in FIG. 156 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. After the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped, a swing fluctuation display is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-pseudo continuous symbol-decoration 3", and a state in which the pseudo continuous is started is shown. . Although the effect button 136 is operated, when a failed effect is performed, the pseudo consecutive symbols are scrolled out downward, and a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived.

  As described above, in this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 can be regarded as an example of a notice icon relating to the operation means.

  In this effect example, a plurality of second button notice icons I11 may be stocked, and each may be directed to the same notice effect (for example, a pseudo consecutive notice). However, different notices (for example, a pseudo consecutive notice and a cut-in notice, etc.) may be targeted. In this effect example, when a plurality of second button notice icons I11 are stocked, the button effect is generated as many as the number of stocked second button notice icons I11. In some cases, the more stocked, the higher the expectation can be.

  FIGS. 156 (b1) to (b7) show another mode in which the button notice icons are stocked, and another mode in which the stocked button notice icons are consumed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (b1), a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 156 (b1) has a reserved icon display area formed at the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is suspended, so one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although the change icon h0 is in a default display mode, the first hold icon h11 is for holding the symbol change display which is the target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also the display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode as a blue circle). Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 156 (b1), "Notice icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, the current stage name "coast stage" is displayed. Have been. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L also performs a variable display of the first decorative symbol. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (b1), a part icon p1 of “+1” indicating the number of parts necessary for stocking the button notice icon appears. As will be described later in detail, when the part icon p1 appears, the number of parts of the button meter 136m indicated by the part icon p1 is accumulated, and when the tank is full, one button notice icon is stocked.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, a button meter 136m imitating the shape of the effect button 136 is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button meter 136m is configured by four parts, and is configured to accumulate parts when the above-described part icon p1 appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b1), no parts have been stored yet. Above the button meter 136m, the remaining digestable number of the button notice icon (that is, the number of stocks) is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b1), "0 more times" is displayed. It notifies that there is no digestible button notice icon. The button meter 136m may be always displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may not be displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (b2), the part icon p1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is deleted, and one part of the button meter 136m is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The appearance of accumulation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 156 (b3), a balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen. In the balloon portion TT2, "GET" is displayed together with the parts icon p1 displaying "+1", and the fact that one part of the button meter 136m is stored is notified. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the display of the part icon p1 is also performed in the balloon unit TT2. The parts icon p1 may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage display section ST2 to notify that the parts of the button meter 136m are stored. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 156 (b3), a state where three parts of the button meter 136m are stored is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (b4), the character CH1 and the balloon TT2 of Princess Chibi displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are erased, and the button meter is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The 136 m part is shown full.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (b5), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the remaining digestible number of the button notice icon becomes “one more time”, that is, one button notice icon is stocked. In addition to this, it is shown that the button meter 136m is changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (b6), the stocked button notice icon is digested, a second button notice icon I11 appears, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is switched to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is performed in such a manner as to move over and hit the pseudo continuous symbol. At this time, by displaying an effect image showing a state in which the second button notice icon I11 has hit the pseudo-sequence symbol, it is produced that the second button notice icon I11 has been digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (b7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and the player is notified. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted. In this way, by operating the effect button 136, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the pseudo consecutive notice will occur. In addition, the display of the remaining number of times that the button notice icon can be used is displayed as "0 times remaining", that is, it is notified that the number of stocks of the button notice icon has become zero. In addition, since the operation of the effect button 136 has been validated, the chance button lamp 138 emits red light to notify the player of the fact.

  As described above, in this effect example, the button notice icon is different in the manner of stocking from the other notice icons.

  According to this effect example, for example, in a situation where the button meter 136m becomes full when one more part accumulates, a button effect occurs, while expecting the appearance of the part icon p1 displayed as "+1". In some cases, the production can be entertained. Further, for example, in a situation where two or more parts need to be stored before the button meter 136m is full, a part icon p1 for storing a plurality of parts such as “+2” can be displayed, and the button effect of the button effect can be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to prevent giving up.

  FIGS. 156 (c1) to (c3) show another mode in which the button notice icons are stocked. In this production example, the remaining number of times that the button notice icon can be used is not displayed, and when the parts of the button meter 136m are full, the second button hold icon I11 appears and appears on the stage name display section ST2. The state of stocking is shown. FIGS. 156 (c1) to (c2) are the same as FIGS. 156 (b3) to (b4), except that the remaining noticeable number of button announcement icons is not displayed. The description is omitted.

  When the parts of the button meter 136m are full, as shown in FIG. 156 (c3), the second button notice icon I11 appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the second button notice icon I11 that has appeared. Moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward the stage name display portion ST2, and the second button notice icon I11 moves to a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2. When the stage name is displayed, the stage name display of the “shore stage” that has been displayed so far is deleted in the stage name display portion ST2, and the character display of “STOCK” is displayed on the upper part of the stage name display portion ST2, A state in which a notification area is a notification icon stock area is shown. The button meter 136m has changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored. The timing at which the button meter 136m changes to a display mode in which no parts are stored may be the same as the timing at which the second button notice icon I11 is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, After the meter 136m has changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored, the second button notice icon I11 may be stocked in the stage name display section ST2, or the second button notice icon I11 may be displayed. After being stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the button meter 136m may be changed to a display mode in which no parts are stored.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step examples of other effects that can be applied to the present embodiment, such as a notice icon increase effect and a digestive effect.

  FIGS. 157 (a1) to (a5) show another mode in which the button notice icons are stocked.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at a lower portion of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 157 (a1) has a reserved icon display area formed in the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 157 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is suspended, so one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although the change icon h0 is in a default display mode, the first hold icon h11 is for holding the symbol change display which is the target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also the display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode as a blue circle). Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 157 (a1), "Notice icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "coast stage" indicating the current stage is displayed. Is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a united animation is performed, and a pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are displayed on the upper right and left sides of the display screen. The semi-transparent button notice icon I11f notifies that the second button notice icon I11 is materialized by the unification and the second button notice icon I11 is stocked. The pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are moving toward the center while approaching each other. In addition, in this effect example, the example in which the two translucent button notice icons I11f are combined has been described. For example, an effect in which four translucent button notice icons I11f may be combined may be performed. The second button notice icon I11 is materialized when the effect in which the four translucent button notice icons I11f are combined is performed, compared to the case where the effect in which the translucent button notice icon I11f is combined is performed. The stocking probability may be increased.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 157 (a2) to (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the united animation is continuously performed, and the pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are displayed while gradually approaching each other. It is shown moving to the center of the screen. Note that the pair of translucent button notice icons I11f overlap the first decorative symbol, but may overlap the first decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state is shown in which the pair of translucent button notice icons I11f are united and the second button notice icon I11 is materialized. I have. Note that, in the union animation, when union of the translucent button notice icon I11f has failed, the translucent button notice icon I11f does not unite but frames out toward the bottom of the display screen. The union animation is performed when the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, but may be applied to the case where another notice icon is stocked. Further, the notice icon for performing the united animation may be only one type, two or more types, or all types. Also, in the union animation, when the advance notice icon is displayed in a semi-transparent manner, which advance notice icon is displayed in a form that cannot be specified (for example, display with a question mark, etc.). May be specified.

  After the second button notice icon I11 materializes as described above, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (a5), the second button notice icon I11 is reduced to a stage name display. Stocked in the section ST2. At this time, the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display section ST2 is erased, and “STOCK” is displayed to inform that the stage name display section ST2 is an area for displaying a notice icon. ing.

  FIG. 157 (b1) to FIG. 157 (b3) show a state in which a mission for stocking a notice icon in a predetermined explanation display portion is being performed.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 157 (b1) has a reserved icon display area formed at the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 157 (b1), since one variable display of the special figure 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. Although the change icon h0 is in a default display mode, the first hold icon h11 is for holding the symbol change display which is the target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also the display form of the prefetch notice (for example, (Display mode as a blue circle). Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 157 (b1), "storing a preview icon" is displayed (display of a mission), and a mission for storing the preview icon in the tutorial display section TT4 until it is full. Is reported to have occurred. When the mission is completed, for example, in addition to the effect corresponding to the notice icon being performed, a special privilege such as occurrence of a premiere notice is given. The display of the mission may be performed in a place other than the tutorial display section TT4. For example, the display may be performed in another description display section such as a balloon appearing in a conversation notice or the stage name display section ST2, or the description display. It may be displayed in a display area other than the section. On the other hand, in the stage name display section ST2, two icons I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice are stocked, and the display of the stage name is deleted. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (b2) shows a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4. Note that any of the above-described modes can be used until the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (b3), a state in which a chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in the stage name display portion ST2 instead of the tutorial display portion TT4 is shown. Normally, stocking in the tutorial display section TT4 increases the possibility that a special privilege will be given. However, by stocking in the stage name display section ST2, the possibility is reduced. In some cases, the player may feel disappointed and be more motivated to stock the preview icon in the tutorial display section TT4. When the above-mentioned mission occurs, the notice icon may always be stocked in the tutorial display section TT4.

  As described above, it can be said that the effect example shows a state in which the mini game using the notice icon is performed.

  FIGS. 157 (c) and (c1) to (c5) show an example of the mode when the notice icon is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at a lower portion of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is provided at the center of the UI unit. It is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserve icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 157 (c), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode, but the change icon h0 is an icon indicating a symbol change display that was the target of the prefetch notice, and the display form is also the prefetch notice. (For example, a blue circle). Further, below the fluctuation icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various kinds of information on games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 157 (c), "When General Yatsushiro moves ..." is displayed, and a description is given that suggests the relationship between the character of the lord and the notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying a currently performed stage name or reach name is arranged at a lower portion of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 157 (c), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The main character may or may not always be displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  In this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is stocked in the tutorial display section TT1. When the notice icon stocked in the tutorial display section TT1 is consumed, the procedure is performed as shown in FIGS. 157 (c1) to (c5). 157 (c1) to 157 (c5) show only the fluctuating icon h0 and the tutorial display section TT1, and omits the others.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157 (c1), when the notice icon is stocked in a state where characters are displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, the stocking is performed as shown in FIG. 157 (c2). Notice icon (here, a swordsman notice icon I62 is used) is arranged at the center of the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, as the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon starts swinging, as shown in FIG. 157 (c3), and fuels a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice icon is consumed. At this time, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the notice icon.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (c4), a state where the swaying notice icon moves upward is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 157 (c4), the notice icon overlaps with the change icon h0, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to view than in the state where the notice icon does not overlap with the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (c5), the notice icon is stopped above the fluctuation icon h0, a predetermined effect is displayed, and the notice that the notice icon is consumed is notified.

  When the notice icon moves to a position where it does not overlap with the tutorial display section TT1, the character display on the tutorial display section TT1 may be restarted.

In the above description,
"First operation means [for example, the transmission unit 191, the cross key 181a, the OK button 181b, the cancel button 181c, the button B (second chance button 137), etc.]"
A second operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like];
A gaming table with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the final effects shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), FIGS. 25 (m) to (q), and FIGS. 26 (m) to (q). Judge production etc.)
The first effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), FIGS. 25 (m) to (q), and FIGS. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q)],
When the first operating means does not vibrate while the second operating means is vibrating [for example, when the first operating means vibrates while the second operating means is vibrating] 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (p), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (r1), and FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (r2). If there is no vibration]
The first effect is not a notice effect relating to the second operation means [for example, an operation notice effect including a notification prompting operation of the chance button 136 or a notification regarding the operation result of the chance button 136],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  Both the first operation means and the second operation means may be a button, such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, a glass button, or a lever, a touch sensor, or a touch panel. Good. That is, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be appropriately combined. In addition, the operation means includes those that can be operated by holding their hands even if they cannot be directly contacted, in addition to those that can be operated by direct contact.

  The first operation means includes a chance button (for example, a chance button 136), another chance button (for example, a button B (a second chance button 137)), a cross key (for example, a cross key 181a), and a transparent button. Any one of a button-shaped member such as the portion 191 or the like, a lever, a touch sensor, and a touch panel may be used, or only one of the members may be applied, and the other ones may not be used. It may be applied. For example, a chance button (for example, a chance button 136) may be applied to the first operation unit, and the remaining other chance buttons, cross keys, and the like may not be applied.

  Furthermore, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be appropriately combined. Note that the operation means includes not only a device that is operated by direct contact but also a device that cannot be directly contacted but can be operated by holding a hand (for example, a non-contact type).

  Further, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the mode may be different depending on the operation means such as the vibration intensity, vibration time, stroke, and pitch. For example, the first operating means may be capable of executing the vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operating means may be capable of executing the vibration according to the second aspect.

  The notice effect may be one of a plurality of notice effects. The notice here may be a jackpot notice, a development notice to super reach, a pseudo consecutive start start notice, or a preliminary notice of the number of pseudo repeats. . Alternatively, one or more of the plurality of types of notice effects may be applied, and the other effects may not be applied. Furthermore, only one of the plurality of types of preview effects may be applied, and all other effects may not be applied.

  Further, the execution period of the preview effect, which is the first effect, may be from the start of display of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (fluctuation), or the determination of the decorative symbol. It may be up to the display. Alternatively, the moving means may start moving from the first position to the second position and then return to the first position, or may start moving to the first position. Is also good. Further, only one type of execution period among the plurality of types of execution periods exemplified here may be used, a plurality of types of execution periods may be applied, or all types of execution periods may be applied. May be. Further, specifically, when the first effect is a final judge effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in a combination of the big hit symbol mode from the start of the notification or the like performed for the first time after the button operation. Or until the result after the button operation (especially the result of successful operation) is displayed, may be the execution period of the first effect.

  Further, the second operating means vibrates in a state where the movable means is located at a second position (for example, a final arrival position) when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like. The vibration may be performed in a state in which an effect display or the like executed along with the movement of the movable unit is displayed, or the state in which the movable unit is located at the second position and the effect It may vibrate while the image is displayed. Further, only one of the plurality of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all kinds may be applied.

  Further, "the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operating means" may mean that the first effect is started only in response to the operation of the first operating means. Then, the first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation unit and other conditions (operation of another operation unit or the like) being satisfied. Further, the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or even if the first operation means is not operated, if other conditions are satisfied, The first effect may be started. For example, when a certain period of time has elapsed, the first operation may be started even if the first operation unit is not operated, or conversely, if there is no operation of the first operation unit, the certain period of time may be used. Even after the passage, the first effect may not be started.

  Further, the first effect may be configured to be started in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may be always started, may not be started, may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or only by the operation of the first operation means It may be started.

  Further, the first effect may be executed when the first operation means is operated in the first state. Here, the first state may be a state in which notification for prompting operation of the first operation unit is performed, or a state in which such notification is not performed.

  Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be executed. The satisfaction of the first condition here includes that the first operation means is operated.

  Further, “in the first effect” may or may not extend over the first effect.

  Further, "in the first effect, the second operating means vibrates" includes starting the vibration without permission, and also including starting the vibration when the condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second operation means may be one which does not vibrate unless operated continuously, may be one which continuously vibrates without being pressed, and is not continuous but intermittent. It may vibrate dynamically. Further, only one of the plurality of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all kinds may be applied.

  Further, even after the first effect is finished, the second operating means may be capable of vibrating. In this case, the second operating means may necessarily vibrate, It may not be performed, may execute other than the vibration, or may execute only the vibration.

  Furthermore, it may be one that continuously vibrates from the first effect, or one that temporarily stops and then restarts. Alternatively, conversely, the second operation means may not vibrate after the first effect is completed.

  Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of at least one of the plurality of effects. The second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of an effect that is performed at intervals among the plurality of effects, or the second operation means may be configured to vibrate in all of the plurality of effects. The second operating means may be configured to vibrate.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect. Furthermore, "the second operation means is configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect" means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. Regardless of whether or not to do so, it may be configured to be performed.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) or FIG. 18 (m)],
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
It is configured such that the second effect may be started in response to an operation of the second operation means (for example, a pressing operation shown in FIG. 16 (l) or FIG. 18 (l)),
Before the second effect is started, only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. j)-(k), 18 (j)-(k), etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the other effect may be such that the second movable means also moves, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to start vibration after the start of display of an image prompting an operation, or may be configured to start vibration after the start of an operation reception state. Is also good.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. It may be configured to vibrate even after the end of the second effect.

  Further, an effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is N (plural) effects of a plurality of types of effects. It may be configured so that the second operation means may vibrate before the second effect is started.

  Furthermore, everything that is performed by operating the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, all of a liquid crystal display, lighting or blinking of an LED, and the like. However, the second effect may be directed to only the effect performed on the liquid crystal display means.

  Further, the vibration of the second operating means performed in the first effect continues even if the second operating means is operated until a predetermined vibration time elapses, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may be terminated, may be terminated when the second operation means is operated, may be terminated at the same time when the first production is completed, or the first production may be completed. This may be continued until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (may end immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol or simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol).

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operating means performed before the second effect is started may be terminated when the second operating means is operated, or the second effect may be started. The process may be terminated at the same time. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration ending condition is determined depending on whether the vibration is performed in the first performance or before the second performance is started. Will be different.

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operating means performed before the start of the second effect continues even if the first operating means is operated until a predetermined vibration time elapses. Then, it may end after the vibration time elapses, may continue even after the first effect ends, and may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol). Alternatively, the process may end at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol.) In these cases, the vibration ending condition is the same between the case where the first effect is performed and the case where the second effect is performed before the second effect is started.

Also,
"A display means capable of displaying an image [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like] is provided.
The first effect is an effect by display of an image on the display means [for example, an effect display in a final judge effect as shown in FIGS.
The second effect is a display of an image on the display means [for example, an image different from the image in the first effect, such as a display of a character GC of a princess behind a sliding door in a judge effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. Display],
If the second operating means is operated in a state where the second operating means is vibrating during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this game console, during the execution of the first effect, there is a case where no effect is newly started even if the second operating means is operated while the second operating means is vibrating. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for outputting music from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

  Further, the second display means may always display an image.

  Further, the second operation means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.

Also,
"The second effect is an effect that is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started [for example, FIG. 16 (b)],
And
The term “before the second effect is started” refers to a time after the display of the change of the decorative symbol at which the second effect is started [for example, the display of the change of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 16B] is started. That is,
In the second effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The second operation means may be vibrating before the start of the second effect, and may be vibrated continuously in the second effect, or may be restarted after being interrupted once. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, vibration intensity, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operating means before the start of the second effect may be executed during a reception state period of the second operating means.

  Further, a game console including a first operation means and a second operation means, is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, one of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is , A first effect, one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, the second effect is a notice effect. Yes, the first effect is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operating means, in the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate In the second effect, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.

Also,
“The second operating means vibrates [for example, FIG. 16 (j) to FIG. 16 (j)], compared to the case where the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 14 (j) to FIG. FIG. (L) and the like] are configured to be more easily shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a later probable change state).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The “advantageous state for the player” refers to the gaming state of the big hit (small hit) and the loss, the state of the probable change between the probability change and the time saving, the 15R big hit and the 4R big hit. The gaming state of the 15R jackpot (the jackpot with the larger number of rounds) may be the gaming state, or the state where 100 out of 100 and 50 times of the electric support may be given.

  In addition, “to make it easier to shift” may mean that if the advantageous state is the big hit gaming state, the game always shifts to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit determination, or the second operation means may necessarily vibrate in the first effect.

In addition, a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a decorative design display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display is provided.
When the second operating means vibrates [for example, as shown in FIGS. 16 (j) to 16 (l)] than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIGS. (L) etc.] may be configured so that the result of the symbol variation display is more likely to be connected to the big hit, and furthermore, may be configured to be more easily connected to the big hit with the probability change.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 31 (m ′) to (q ′)),
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′) and the like],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  It should be noted that “an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect” may be an aspect that is at least partially different, may be entirely different, or is only partially different. You may. For example, the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the other effect may be such that the second movable means also moves, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  Also, the second operation means is vibrating before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes the vibration when the third effect ends. It may be something.

Also,
"The third effect is an effect that is configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that, during a period in which any one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed.

  Furthermore, it may be configured such that one of the first effect and the third effect is started in response to an operation of the first operation means.

Also,
"It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification for prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 23 (k) and FIG. 23 (l), FIG. 24 (k) and FIG. 24 (1), FIG. 25 (k). (L2), FIG. 26 (k) and FIG. 26 (l) each showing a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification].
The first effect is performed in a first period [for example, a period of FIGS. 23 (k) to (l), a period of FIGS. 24 (k) to (l), and FIGS. (L2) period, the period of FIG. 26 (m) to the period of FIG. 26 (l), etc.].
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.

Also,
"The second operation means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is performed [for example, the entire period in the examples of FIGS. (Q) in the same figure, it does not vibrate, so that it vibrates during a part of the time period, etc.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first operation means is means [for example, a cross key 181a] configured not to vibrate,
The second operating means is a means [for example, a chance button 136] configured to be vibrable.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, "vibration" means the direct vibration that the operating means itself vibrates, and does not include the indirect vibration when the other member vibrates indirectly by vibrating. However, in some cases, indirect vibration may be included.

  Note that even in a state in which the first effect is not executed [for example, a state in which the pseudo judge effect shown in FIGS. May be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to always vibrate.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63 and the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with a second operation means [for example, a button A (chance button 136) or the like]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, a cut-in notice of “hot fever” shown in FIGS. 39 (h) to (i) and FIG. 40 (i)). And
The fourth effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the second operation means,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a second notification,
The second notification is a notification that prompts an operation of the second operation unit (for example, an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, and the like).
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol [for example, 3 ↓ 3 displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 39 and 40]. ,
The fourth effect is an effect that is started when the second operation means is operated in a second period (for example, FIG. 39 (g), FIG. 40 (h), etc.),
The second notification is configured not to be performed in the second period,
The second period is a period that may start at the first time in the variable display (for example, the time in FIG. 39 (g)).
The second period is a period that may start at a second time in the variable display (for example, the time in FIG. 40H).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may always be executed, may not be executed, may be executed other than the plurality of types of effects, or only a plurality of types of effects may be executed. .

  Further, the fourth effect may be an effect that is always executed in the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
A third operation means [for example, a button B (second chance button 137) or the like]
The second period is a period that is started in association with the operation of the third operation means (for example, after the button B is operated, the cut-in notice by the display of the main character is started, or the like).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a fifth effect [for example, a cut-in notice or the like by displaying the main character's character display started from FIGS. 39 (f) and 40 (g)],
One of the plurality of types of notification is a third notification,
The third notification is a notification that prompts an operation of the third operation unit (for example, a button B display 137X of an operation promotion notification),
The fifth effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the third operation means,
In the fifth effect, the third operation means is provided in a third period [for example, the period in FIGS. 39 (d) to (e), the period in FIGS. 40 (d) to (f), and the like]. Is operated [for example, FIG. 39 (e), FIG. 40 (f), etc.].
The third notification is configured to be performed in the third period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  That is, the third period is a period during which the third notification is performed.

Also,
"The mode of the fifth effect is a mode different from the mode of the fourth effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect in a case where the fifth effect is performed in the variable display of a decorative symbol [for example, FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect that is not started unless the third operation means is operated in the third period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect that is started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started after the third period has elapsed, or may be an effect started after the third period has elapsed.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect that is not started unless the second operation means is operated in the second period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In this way, the fifth effect is clearly different from the effect that is started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period, and the operation means is changed. It will be possible to give the entangled production a width.

Also,
"The first time is a time after a lapse of a first time (for example, four frames) from the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 39B),
The second timing is a timing after a lapse of a second time (for example, five frames) from the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 40B).
The second time is a time different from the first time,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a fourth reserved icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b), a fourth reserved icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (B), and FIG. ), Etc.).
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a change icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c), a first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E '). , Mini icon mA shown in FIG. 43 (C), etc.]
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
After the display of the first display is started, it is configured such that the second display may be displayed,
The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon changes [for example, noteworthy FIGS. 42 (b), 42 (B), and 43 (B) each show. Display AT of matters etc.],
The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon changes [for example, FIG. 42 (c), FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′), FIG. 43 (C). Actual display etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  The display means may be means for always displaying the plurality of types of icons, may be means for displaying the icons, or may display other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed.

  Further, it may be configured such that after the display of the first display is started, the second display is always displayed.

Also,
“The second icon [eg, the change icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)] is a different type of icon from the first icon [eg, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b)]. is there,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
[Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying symbol variation display,
The first icon is a hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG.
The suspension icon is an icon representing the number of suspension of the start of the symbol variation display by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold,
The second icon is a fluctuating icon [for example, fluctuating icon c shown in FIG.
The change icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol change display when the hold represented by the hold icon is exhausted and the symbol change display is started.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The symbol display means may be means for always displaying the symbol change display, may be means for displaying the symbol change display, or may execute other than the symbol change display. Alternatively, only the symbol variation display may be executed.

Also,
“Symbol display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a decorative design display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first icon is a first hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (B)].
The second icon is a second holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E ′)],
The suspension icon is an icon representing the number of suspension of the start of the symbol variation display by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold,
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different icons when the hold was made,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mC of a look-ahead notice that suggests that a big hit is confirmed],
The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mA or the like for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is started once].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during execution of the reach effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second display is a display that is displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative pattern,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second display is a display displayed during execution of the reach effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"The second operation means [for example, the chance button 136 or the like]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, timer notice display means 209 ', etc.]
A gaming table with
The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a first notice display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like],
The third display is a display corresponding to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45E and 25:00 shown in FIG. ) And the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black characters and the image C1 of the cut-in notice in a special mode displayed in gray characters and the chance shown in FIG. Display
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  Note that the third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, whether the remaining time is less than or equal to the first remaining time, or whether it matches the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 50. No. or not, for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e), the non-display shown in FIG. 45 (A), the chance shown in FIG. The image C1 and the chance C shown in FIG. 50 (a) and the image C of the cut-in notice of the special mode displayed in gray letters] may be displayed.

  In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, may not display the display, may display other than the plurality of types of display, and may display a plurality of types of display. Only one of them may be displayed.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display [for example, a normal display 136N of operation promotion notification or the like] that prompts an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operation means is operated, the display of the third display is started [for example, in the case of an operation within the operation valid period] and when it is not started [for example, the operation valid period Before or after the expiration of the operation validity period, etc.]
The fourth display is a display that is not displayed in the second case until the display of the third display is started after the second operation unit is operated.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that the fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.

Also,
"The first notice display is a display of a timer notice,
The timer notice is a notice including a display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like] indicating a first remaining time [for example, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 or the like],
A notice effect after the first remaining time becomes zero [for example, a normal notice effect in which the display mode of the change icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) changes to the display mode of the face of the princess, or FIG. 46 (g). In which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 7 changes to the display mode of the lord's face, etc.] is started.
The “display according to the operation timing of the second operation means” described above is a display indicating the first remaining time.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that the first remaining time may be a remaining time until a notice effect is started.

Also,
"The notice effect is a notice about the symbol change display performed when the display of the third display is started [for example, the display mode of the change icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) is the display of the face of the princess. Normal notice that changes to the aspect]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  More specifically, as the notice effect, a so-called pseudo-sequence effect, a second reach effect developed from the first reach effect (for example, super reach effect, etc.), and an increase in expectation of a big hit in the reach effect are suggested. (For example, a change in the character color of a title or a line) or a cut-in effect (for example, a cut-in effect immediately before a symbol stops).

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display indicating the number of holds, by the number of the hold icons to be displayed,
The announcement effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the look-ahead notice [For example, the look-ahead display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. Notice production etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, the display means may always display a display indicating the number of holds, may not display the number, may display other than the number of holds, or may display only the number of holds. May be used.

Also,
"If the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the hold icons among the hold icons representing the number of holds before the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice. [For example, a change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 46 (h)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  When a plurality of the holding icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of holding icons”) are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one or more of the plurality of the holding icons are displayed. The display mode of the plurality of hold icons may change to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

Also,
"If the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the hold icons among the hold icons representing the number of holds after the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice. May change to
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, when a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the notice effect is started, one or more of the plurality of the hold icons are displayed. May change to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, a time display T1 shown in FIG. 48 and the like]
The sixth display includes a display including a display indicating a second remaining time that is different from a display indicating the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds in the timing of FIG. 48 (b) in the timing of FIG.
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that the third display may be a display that is always displayed together with the sixth display.

Also,
[It is provided with a counting means [for example, a counter timer 412 or the like]
The display indicating the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  It should be noted that symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, etc.) capable of executing symbol variation display, first control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.], (For example, a first sub-controller 400 and the like), wherein the second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, The first control means is a control means [for example, a control means for executing a special figure state update process or the like] capable of controlling the symbol display means, and the second control means controls the display means [for example, , Effect control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control unit may be a control unit including a plurality of control units [for example, the basic circuit 402, the VDP 434, the VRAM 436, and the like].

  The symbol display means may be means for always displaying the symbol change display, may be means for displaying the symbol change display, or may execute other than the symbol change display. Alternatively, only the symbol variation display may be executed. Further, the second control means may be a means that always executes control according to a command from the first control means, or may be a means that may be executed, The control other than the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed, or only the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed.

Also,
"The third display is a third display when the operation timing of the second operation means coincides with the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 50]. This is a display in which display is started in a display mode [for example, a special mode displayed with a chance and gray characters in FIG.
When the operation timing of the second operation means does not match the first timing, the third display is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a chance and black characters shown in FIG. 50 (B) are displayed. Cut-in notice image C1 etc.].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"Third operation means [for example, button B (operation button 137 ') shown in FIG.
The third display is a display that may be started even when the third operation means is operated [for example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. Display of the cut-in notice image C3 etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
A third display unit [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The display means [for example, the timer notice display means 209 'and the like] is a separate means from the third display means.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, the third display means may or may not always perform the variable display of the decorative symbol, and may perform other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, only the variable display of the decorative symbol may be executed.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with effect display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icon according to the number of holds,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol [for example, immediately before FIGS. 52 (b) to 52 (h)],
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One effect display of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in a first period of the fluctuation display [for example, a period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon]. Yes,
When the display of the first effect display is not started in the first period of the variable display, the second period of the variable display [for example, from the time immediately before FIG. 53 (a) to the time immediately before FIG. Period, a period immediately before FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d)], the first effect display is not started to be displayed.
The second period is a period after the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  The “effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change respectively” may be an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons all change at the same time, or an effect display in which the display modes change one by one. Or an effect display that changes a plurality at a time. It should be noted that any one of a plurality of examples of the effect display enumerated here may be applied, a plurality of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Is also good.

  Further, for example, when the number of holdings increases during the first period, the first effect display may be started to be displayed during the first period. Further, when the hold is increased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started to be displayed during the first period in the variable display that is started after the stop display of the decorative symbol. In some cases.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of hold icons, a means that may display the hold icons, or a means for displaying other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

Also,
“The first period is a period in which the beginning is the time of the start of the variable display [for example, the first half period including FIG. 52 (b)],
The second period is a period in which the end is the end of the variable display [for example, the second half of the period immediately before FIG. 52 (h)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  For example, when the display of the first effect display is not started when the display of the variable display is started, the display of the first effect display is not started during the display of the variable display. That is, the display of the first effect display is started only at the start of the change during the display of the change display.

Also,
"The end of the first period is the beginning of the second period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
`` The effect display means is means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative symbol,
The first effect display is an effect display in which display is started during the display of the stop display [for example, the case illustrated in FIG. 53 (e) or the case illustrated in FIG. 55 (f)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  For example, when the hold increases while the stop display is being displayed, the first effect display may be started while the stop display is being displayed. Further, even when the hold is increased during the display of the fluctuation display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display.

  Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol, a means that may display the stop display, or a display other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means or a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
"The first effect display is a case where the display is started after the variable display when the number of holdings increases during the display of the variable display [for example, the case shown in FIG. f) etc.] is an effect display.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“The first effect display is the first period in the variable display that is started next to the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as“ first variable display ”) in which the number of holds is increased [for example, FIG. (H) including the period of the first half).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that the first effect display may be an effect display that is always started to be displayed during the first period in the variable display that is started after the first variable display.

Also,
"The number of the plurality of hold icons, the display modes of which are respectively changed by the first effect display, is the number before the hold number increased during the display of the first variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. Example]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display,
The second effect display is a moving animation of the hold icon [for example, the animation shown in FIG. 52 (k)].
The moving animation is an animation whose display is completed before the second period starts.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also,
“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, a shining display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (B)],
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of “heat” of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60B).
Even if the hold icon of the first display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the first effect display is configured to be started to be displayed during the first period,
If at least one of the hold icons of the second display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the display of the first effect display is not started even during the first period. It is configured,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that the first display mode may be a display mode of a prefetch notice, and the second display mode may be a display mode of a prefetch notice, and the first display mode and the second display mode Is different from the jackpot reliability (expectation), and the second display mode may be a display mode in which the jackpot reliability (expectation) is higher than the first display mode, Conversely, the display mode may be low.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the first display mode, may be a means for displaying the hold icon, or may display the hold icon in the first display mode. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display mode.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the second display mode, or may be means for displaying the hold icon, or may display the hold icon in the second display mode. Means for displaying other than the display mode may be used, or means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display mode.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition,
"A gaming table provided with effect display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icon according to the number of holds,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One effect display of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in a first period [for example, a period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon or the like],
When the display of the first effect display is not started in the first period, the second period [for example, the period immediately before FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), FIGS. (During the period immediately before FIG. 9D), the first effect display is not started to be displayed.
The second period is a period after the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. "
Was also explained.

further,
"It is a gaming table equipped with effect display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icon according to the number of holds,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative symbol,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display.
The first effect display is an effect display that may not be displayed during the execution of the variable display.
A gaming table characterized by the following. "
Was also explained.

  Note that the first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during the execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display may be an effect display that does not always start displaying during the execution of the variable display.

further,
"The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display when the hold is increased during the execution of the stop display,
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display displayed next to the variable display, when the hold is increased during the execution of the variable display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. "
Was also explained.

  Note that the first effect display may be an effect display that is always started to be displayed during the execution of the stop display when the hold display is increased during the execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display is an effect display that is always started during execution of the stop display displayed next to the variable display, when the hold is increased during the execution of the variable display. Is also good.

In the above description,
“Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.]
Symbol display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display;
Notice means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of notices [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, and the like]. ,
A gaming table with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The suspension display is a display that is displayed in a suspension display area (for example, the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the suspension icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.) in the image display unit,
The suspension display is a display corresponding to the number of the operations of the symbol change display suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “suspension number”) [for example, the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 , The number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The symbol change display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , And an advance notice icon can be displayed in each area],
The notice means is means capable of executing, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon [for example, When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is exhausted, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,
In the period in which the symbol change display is performed once, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat or the like] of the plurality of notice icons is the first number [for example, two or more]. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit when digested with a second number [eg, three, etc.] greater than the first number than when digested.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the image display means. However, according to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect can be increased.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the display of the notice icon makes it easy to recognize that the notice icon has a change that may be consumed, so that the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase or digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not always execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be one that can be executed other than the plurality of kinds of notices. In addition, the notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices, or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  The image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display the plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than in the hold display area of the image display means.

  The hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be, for example, a character, a number, or a symbol.

  Also, the hold display may be one that displays only the number of holds, or one that displays other than the number of holds.

  Further, the symbol change display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol change display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in an area other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. The notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or a plurality of notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a notice of a type corresponding to the kind of noticed icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice other than the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may be executable. In addition, the notice means may be configured to always execute a notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change that is consumed, so that the player can play the game so as not to miss the notice display. You may be able to.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. Also, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed There may be.

In addition, the "notification means may provide a false notice [e.g., a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition effect, etc., which is a loss, etc.] in the same form as the mode of the advance notice [e.g., a pseudo consecutive production, a reach transition production, etc. that may be a big hit]. Actionable means,
When the notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of the digested notice icon is reduced. Means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to (for example, a pseudo consecutive notice or a reach transition effect to be out)
After the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can be nervous until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a false notice in the same mode as the notice mode, or may be capable of executing something other than the false notice in the same mode as the notice mode. You may. Further, the advance notice means may always execute a false announcement in the same mode as the advance mode, or may not execute a false announcement in the same mode as the advance mode.

  In addition, the notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of noticed icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a type other than a fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be executable. . The notice means may be such that, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a false notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon is necessarily executed. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display may be always out of place, or after the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display may be a big hit. There may be.

  After the fake notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that the possibility of displaying the big hit symbol on the symbol display means is high is executed.

In addition, during the period in which the one symbol change display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one or more]. A fourth number (eg, three, etc.) larger than the third number is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means (for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, effect holding lamp 286, etc.) capable of executing display according to the number of holdings” is provided,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the hold display and the display of the notice icon can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than the display corresponding to the number of holds. In addition, the hold display unit may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

Further, the “holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, the hold display may be clearly recognized in some cases.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted by only the light emitting means, or may be constituted by including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  Note that the light emitting means may include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be constituted by LEDs of a plurality of colors. For example, a light emitting means such as a full-color LED may include a plurality of LEDs in one package and may be a handy one. Further, the display device may be configured by a single-color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "read ahead notice means capable of executing look ahead notice [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 540, etc. ]
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may be displayed, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the big hit in some cases.

  Here, the prefetch notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetch notice, or may be capable of executing other than the prefetch notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice, or may not execute the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing the pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. A pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on the third hold to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2)], etc. ") ) Is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a fifth number (for example, three, etc.),
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “the first symbol variation display [for example, three of the prefetch targets shown in FIG. 82 (2)] In the period during which the symbol change is executed based on the hold held before the eye is held, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one or the like]. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, in FIG. 82 (4). During the period in which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the prefetch target shown is performed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed. Etc. are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special map 1],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of digestion of the notice icon is different between the case where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed and the case where the symbol variation display is executed before the symbol variation display to be the prefetch target. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol change display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. In the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed. In some cases, the notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  In addition, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed, or the first symbol variation display. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may be a message that always notifies that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol change display is executed, or the first symbol change display may be performed. During the period in which the variable display is being executed, the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended may not be notified.

In addition, there is a case where the display of the notice icon is started during a period in which the symbol change display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) is performed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the display of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes, and the increase display of the advance notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in one symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed, and thus the player may be able to have expectation until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the display of the notice icon may always start, or in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be displayed. Display may not be started in some cases. In addition, the notice icon may be started to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed. May be started to be displayed.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that a notice icon may not increase in the symbol change display which a notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”), the fourth symbol variation display is performed. May be started during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [for example, the notification icon I6 of the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be configured to be displayed, In a period other than the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed, the display of the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may be started. In addition, during the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed, During the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, there may be a case where the display of the notice icon which is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed is not started.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed.

Further, “the hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number (for example, four or eight, etc.),
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number (for example, six or the like),
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the displayable number of the hold display is different from the displayable number of the notice icon, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished in some cases.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  The notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number without fail, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the advance notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the reserved display of the special map 1, or at least may be the same, or may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the reserved display of the special map 2, or at least may be the same, or may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the total of the maximum displayable numbers of the reserved displays of the special map 1 and the special map 2, or at least may be the same or may be the same.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, production movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game frame lamps 542] Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) or FIG. 97 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)].
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to 57 (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to 57 (57). Directing etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background or the like],
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute the plurality of types of effects.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. In addition, the advance notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is performed, or may notify that the effect other than the first effect is performed. . In addition, the first notice may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not always notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is performed, or may notify that the effect other than the second effect is performed. . In addition, the second notice may always notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, it is configured that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always consumed [for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icon is all consumed, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is always executed when the notice icon is displayed, so that the expectation of the player may be improved in some cases.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, or the effect holding lamp 286];
A gaming table with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of kinds of notice displays [for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a freeze effect, a stop symbol notice, a stage change effect, a reach transition effect, a premium notice effect, a re-fluctuation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of pending symbol change display operations (hereinafter referred to as “reserved number”) in a suspended display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , A reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area 280, and a reserved display area of the production pending lamp 286 of the special figure 2]. [For example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 includes: The number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The symbol change display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not indicate the number of holds according to the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , And an advance notice icon can be displayed in each area],
The second display means is capable of displaying, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon. [For example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is exhausted, the reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During the period in which the symbol change display is performed once, the second number [for example, three, etc.] digestion larger than the first number is performed than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the image display means. However, according to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect can be increased.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the display of the notice icon makes it easy to recognize that the notice icon has a change that may be consumed, so that the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase or digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not always execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of notice icons, or may not display the plurality of notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in areas other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started when the hold is not exhausted. The symbol change display may be started whenever the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or a plurality of notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the noticed icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Also, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice display other than a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon can be displayed. Is also good. Further, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon may not be displayed.

Further, "the notice icon is configured such that a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display is likely to be displayed is displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285] Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change that is consumed, so that the game is performed so that the player does not miss the notice display. In some cases.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other than the above may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, the second display means may display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo-sequence production to reach a big hit, a reach transition effect, etc.] Transition effect, etc.].
The second display means, when one of the advance notice icons [for example, the advance notice icon I6 of a hat, the advance notice icon I9 of a thousand cars box, etc.] displayed in the advance notice icon display area is digested, the notice that has been digested. Display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, a pseudo consecutive notice or a reach transition effect to be out of place],
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can be nervous until the notice icon is exhausted and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display form, or may be other than a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form. May also be able to be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  Further, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Or if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a type other than a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. Further, the second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. May be present, or when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display may be always out of place, or after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display becomes a big hit. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the fake notice display is displayed, a notice display with a high possibility that the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means may be displayed.

In addition, during the period in which the one symbol change display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one or more]. A fourth number (eg, three, etc.) larger than the third number is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is an image display unit [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display units is a holding display unit [for example, a first special drawing holding lamp 218, a second special drawing holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.],
The suspension display unit is a display unit configured to include the suspension display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps corresponding to the number of holds, etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the hold display and the display of the notice icon can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured to include something other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are always configured, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the suspension display means may be configured to include only the suspension display area, or may be configured to include anything other than the suspension display area. Also, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in areas other than the hold display area. Is also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be one capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

Further, the “holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the hold display may be clearly recognized in some cases.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted by only the light emitting means, or may be constituted by including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  Note that the light emitting means may include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be constituted by LEDs of a plurality of colors. For example, a light emitting means such as a full-color LED may include a plurality of LEDs in one package and may be a handy one. Further, the display device may be configured by a single-color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, the “second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
According to the number of holds, a hold icon is displayed in the hold display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display of the change of the decorative symbol and the holding icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that the number of holdings can be easily confirmed while visually checking the display of the change of the decorative symbol.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be one capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "read ahead notice means capable of executing look ahead notice [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 540, etc. ]
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may be displayed, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the big hit in some cases.

  Here, the prefetch notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetch notice, or may be capable of executing other than the prefetch notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice, or may not execute the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing the pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. A pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on the third hold to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2)], etc. ") ) Is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a fifth number (for example, three, etc.),
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “the first symbol variation display [for example, three of the prefetch targets shown in FIG. 82 (2)] In the period during which the symbol change is executed based on the hold held before the eye is held, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one or the like]. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holdings is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, FIG. During the period in which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the second hold as the look-ahead target shown in (4) is executed, it corresponds to the second hold as the look-ahead target. A reserve icon h12 is displayed in a reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of digestion of the notice icon is different between the case where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed and the case where the symbol variation display is executed before the symbol variation display to be the prefetch target. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol change display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. In the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed. In some cases, the notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  Also, the display according to the number of holdings may be one that can notify only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed. During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of holdings may be a message that always notifies that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed, During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may not be notified.

In addition, there is a case where the display of the notice icon is started during a period in which the symbol change display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) is performed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the display of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes, and the increase display of the advance notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in one symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed, and thus the player may be able to have expectation until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the display of the notice icon may always start, or in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be displayed. Display may not be started in some cases. In addition, the notice icon may be started to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed. May be started to be displayed.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that a notice icon may not increase in the symbol change display which a notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”), the fourth symbol variation display is performed. May be started during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [for example, the notification icon I6 of the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be configured to be displayed, In a period other than the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed, the display of the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may be started. In addition, during the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed, During the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, there may be a case where the display of the notice icon which is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed is not started.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed.

Further, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number (for example, four or eight),
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number (for example, six or the like),
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations differs from the displayable number of advance icons, so that the display of advance icons may be clearly distinguished in some cases.

  Here, the hold display area may display the display corresponding to the number of holds up to the seventh number, or may not display the display corresponding to the hold number up to the seventh number. Good.

  The notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number without fail, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of reservations may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the display according to the number of suspensions in the special map 1, or at least may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the display corresponding to the number of suspensions in the special map 2, or at least may be the same.

  Also, the maximum displayable number of the preview icons may be larger than the total displayable maximum number of the displays according to the number of reservations in the special map 1 and the special map 2, or at least it may be the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, production movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game frame lamps 542] Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a first advance notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and FIG. 97 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to 57 (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to 57 (57). Directing etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background or the like],
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display that informs that the first effect is performed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is to be executed. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute the plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first advance notice display and the second advance notice display, or may display advance notice displays other than the first advance notice display and the second advance notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display in some cases. Is also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice display may indicate that only the first effect is to be executed, or may indicate that an effect other than the first effect is to be executed. Good. Further, the first notice display may always notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  In addition, the second announcement display may indicate that only the second effect is to be performed, or may indicate that an effect other than the second effect is to be performed. Good. In addition, the second notice display may always notify that the second effect is to be executed, or may not always notify that the second effect is to be executed.

In addition, it is configured that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always consumed [for example, FIG. 82 (1) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icon is all consumed, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is always executed when the notice icon is displayed, so that the expectation of the player may be improved in some cases.

Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that, in the embodiment described above, the advance notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even during the execution of the special background mode for prefetching. Is also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed in the case where the other notification icons (B, C, D) have been consumed, and is not displayed even if the other notification icons (B, C, D) are consumed. It may be configured such that the "symbol variation display on which the notice display a is displayed" is performed more easily than the "variation display" is performed, so that the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. The notice display b is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. It is a display, and it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol when the "symbol change display with the notice display b" is executed than when the "symbol change display with the notice display c" is executed. May be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed. The notice display d is a notice display that is not displayed even when the other notice icons (A, B, and D) are consumed. When the digestion is completed, any of the advance display b, the advance display c, and the advance display d is displayed. When the "symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is consumed" is executed, the big hit symbol is definitely displayed rather than the "symbol change display in which the notice icon C is consumed". You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the "symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is performed, the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy to confirm and display.

In the above description,
"First display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of performing symbol variation display,
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, or the effect holding lamp 286];
A gaming table with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of kinds of notice displays [for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a freeze effect, a stop symbol notice, a stage change effect, a reach transition effect, a premium notice effect, a re-fluctuation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of pending symbol change display operations (hereinafter referred to as “reserved number”) in a suspended display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , A reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area 280, and a reserved display area of the production pending lamp 286 of the special figure 2]. [For example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 includes: The number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.
The symbol change display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds according to the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Notice icons can be displayed in each area],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon [for example, When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed.] ,
In a period during which the symbol change display is performed once, a second number [ For example, three, etc.] is configured to be more likely to be a big hit when digested,
The second display means displays the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, based on a third hold that is a prefetch target shown in FIG. 82 (2)]. Display means for displaying the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area as a pre-reading advance notice display before the symbol variation display etc. is started.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

In addition, it is configured such that the number of the notice icons is displayed according to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285] Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, the second display means may display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo-sequence production or a hit transition production such as a jackpot] Transition effect, etc.].
The second display means, when one of the advance notice icons [for example, the advance notice icon I6 of a hat, the advance notice icon I9 of a thousand cars box, etc.] displayed in the advance notice icon display area is digested, the notice that has been digested. Display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, a pseudo consecutive notice or a reach transition effect to be out of place],
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, the second display means is constituted by a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the production holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, one of the plurality of display units is an image display unit [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display units is a holding display unit [for example, a first special drawing holding lamp 218, a second special drawing holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.],
The suspension display unit is a display unit configured to include the suspension display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps corresponding to the number of holds, etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to 83 (20), display of a notice icon as a prefetch notice Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, the “hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
According to the number of holds, a hold icon is displayed in the hold display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, during the period in which the “second design variation display [for example, the design variation display based on the third hold shown in FIG. Fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “the first symbol variation display [for example, three of the prefetch targets shown in FIG. 82 (2)] In the period during which the symbol change is executed based on the hold held before the eye is held, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one or the like]. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holdings is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, FIG. During the period in which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the second hold as the look-ahead target shown in (4) is executed, it corresponds to the second hold as the look-ahead target. A reserve icon h12 is displayed in a reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』
Was also explained.

Also, it is configured such that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always consumed until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 82 (1) As shown in FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. 94 (1) to FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icon is all digested until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, the display of the notice icon may be started during the period in which the notice change icon in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth sign change display”) is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the display of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes, and the increase display of the advance notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in one symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the period is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon may be started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (C) is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the “suspension display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number (for example, four or eight, etc.) according to the number of suspensions,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number (for example, six or the like),
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the effect means which can execute plural kinds of effects [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542] Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars shown in FIG. 85 (47) or FIG. 96 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on the ribbon shown in FIG. 92 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a first advance notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and FIG. 97 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is configured to be displayed,
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to 57 (57) and FIGS. 97 (50-1) to 57 (57). Directing etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background or the like],
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display that informs that the first effect is performed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is to be executed. 』
Was also explained.

Further, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.]
Effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control unit is a unit that can execute control of the first display unit (for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.),
The effect control unit is a unit that can execute control of the second display unit [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display based on a hold held before the third hold to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2)], the notice icon is displayed. In some cases, display of a first notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6 or the like] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. Displayed etc.],
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82 (9) to FIG. 83]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol change display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (14). ],
A symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol based on a third hold, which is a prefetch target shown in FIG. 82 (2)] 82) is configured such that the first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested [for example, FIG. 83) As shown in FIG. 83 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) changes the symbol variation display to be prefetched as shown in FIG. 83 (23). Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

In addition, "the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notification icon of the hat] The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested in the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 has been started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the display of the first notice icon may be started during the display of the first design change display as a pre-reading notice of the second design change display [see, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 83 (25), the symbol change which is the target of the prefetching is performed so that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (23). A notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, during the display of one symbol change display, a second number [for example, three or more] may be displayed as compared with a case where the first number [for example, one or more] of the first notice icons is consumed. ] Is likely to be a big hit when the first notice icon of the above is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I10 of a fan] can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a preview display [for example, a pseudo continuous production, a freeze production, a stop design preliminary announcement, a stage change production, a reach transition production, a premium preliminary production production, a re-fluctuation production, and the like]. ,
When the first notice icon [e.g., the notice icon I6 of the hat, etc.] is consumed, the first notice display [e.g., the pseudo-shown shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (31)] as the notice display is made. Continuous production etc.] may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that becomes a miss, etc.],
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 or the like] is exhausted, a first false notice table [for example, a pseudo continuous staging that becomes a failure] is displayed as the false notice display. May be
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The first false notice display is configured to be shifted in the displayed symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, an effect of a look-ahead mode that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG.
A third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on a ribbon] can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is consumed, the look-ahead effect display may be started. [For example, if one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, There is an effect that the background shifts to the prefetch mode, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the production holding lamp 286, etc.]" Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a decorative symbol variation display]. Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the "first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol change display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (9)] The notice icon I6 and the like of the hat whose display has been started during the symbol variation display are necessarily digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, a hold which is a target of pre-reading] The notice icon I6 of the hat is being digested during the design change display based on
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] on the display unit.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Notice icons can be displayed in each area],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 and the like],
The effect control unit is a unit that can execute control of the display unit [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.]
Symbol display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control unit is a unit that can execute control of the symbol display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B, a notice icon I21 of "house", and a notice icon I22 of "print". , A notice icon I31 of “princess”, a notice icon I32 of “princess”, a notice icon I33 of “grandfather”, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Big hit symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display to become a big hit based on the second hold shown in FIG. 104 (1)] which is a prefetch target, etc.] ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 105, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display ends, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. And a notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is a staging display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (23) to FIG. 84 (32), When the notice icon I6 of the is digested, a pseudo-run may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 85 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started],
The first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons (for example, a combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" shown in FIG. 104) changes one symbol. By being digested in the display, a first effect display (for example, an effect image displayed in a family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 105 (21)) is displayed as the effect display. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Further, according to the gaming table, it may be possible to keep expecting that the first effect display may be displayed until the notice icon of the first combination is consumed.

  Further, according to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons can be shown during the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display to be pre-read is started, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a big hit. May be possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  When the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. May be displayed other than the effect display corresponding to. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, a staging display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. May not be displayed.

  Also, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol change display, so that only the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Also, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol change display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol change display, so that the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by rendering the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol change display.

  Also, the first combination of the plurality of displayed preview icons may be configured to be displayed as the first effect display only by being digested in one symbol change display. Also, it is configured such that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display in addition to the fact that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol change display. May be done.

Also, “the first combination is a combination of a first number (for example, two or the like) of the notice icons,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this game console, the first effect display until the first number notice icon is consumed after the first number notice icon of the first combination of the first number notice icons is displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that may be displayed.

The “first combination” is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of “house”) and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of “crest”]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that the effect of the effect may be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or may be a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. You may. Further, the first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be the case.

Also, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is ended, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (19), the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. In the period from the time till the symbol change display ends, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been consumed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, it is configured such that, in one symbol change display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only a part of the notice icon of the first combination is digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 105 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" is digested, etc.] Stand. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol change display, so the first effect display May be able to give a sense of superiority to a player who has been able to see the game.

  Here, in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the advance notice icon of the first combination is digested, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variation display, the configuration may be such that only a part of the preview icon of the first combination is consumed, and no display other than the first effect display is displayed. Also, in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the advance notice icon of the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be configured to not always be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only a part of the preview icon of the first combination is consumed.

  Also, only in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the advance notice icon of the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed, Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, a configuration may be made such that only a part of the preview icon of the first combination is consumed or the first effect display is not displayed.

Also, as the third notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 83] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [eg, as shown in FIG. ), An effect display in which the character BC of the bancho displayed in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat pushes up the right symbol, etc.] is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect is increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the third notice icon may be digested to display only the third effect display, or the third notice icon may be digested to display the third notice icon. The display other than the effect display may be configured to be displayed. In addition, the third effect icon may be digested, so that the third effect display may be displayed without fail. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Also, the third effect display may be displayed only by the third notice icon being digested, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than by digesting the third notice icon. The third effect display may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Further, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a symbol variation display that causes a loss, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the suspension of a certain symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 104. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of symbols in which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, a first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.];
Second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, a second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, and the like];
A gaming table with
The first display means displays a notice related to a notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 109 (10) to FIG. 110 (13) is exhausted, or FIG. 110 (16) to FIG. ), The display of the character BC and the pseudo continuous production performed in response to the notice icon I6 of the hat, or the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to (c5). Etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means displays the notice icon (for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 109 (2) to 110 (13) and the notice icons shown in FIGS. 109 (5) to (9). Display of the notice icon I6 of the hat to be displayed, or the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 112 (c6), etc.] can be displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon illustrated in FIG. 81 may function as a prefetch notice display or the like],
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold shown in FIG. 112 (c1) that is the prefetching target, etc.]” ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c9), the notice icon is displayed during the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, a notice icon I6 of two hats and a notice icon I7 of one shuriken are displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Also, according to this gaming table, a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the player's line of sight looking at the display regarding the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, In some cases, the player can be entertained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display a notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display, or may be an icon that may not be displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Also, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension shown in FIG. 112 (c1) to be prefetched] shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. During the period from the suspension of the symbol change display to the end of the symbol change display, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been consumed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Also, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the notice icon that has been stocked.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display something other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Is also good.

In addition, "the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.] indicates that the notice icon is displayed. There is a case where a display for giving a notice is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. Is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a notice is given that a notice icon may be displayed.Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to make a player pay attention to the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon. is there.

  Here, on the first display means, there may be a case where only a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or on the first display means, a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where other displays are also performed. Further, in the first display means, a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is to be displayed may always be performed, or in the first display means, a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is to be displayed may be provided. It may not be performed.

  In addition, only in the first display means, there may be a case where a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or in a case where the notice icon is displayed on display means other than the first display means. May be displayed in advance.

In addition, "the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]" Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (4) and FIG. Etc. are displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a high-impact notice icon and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. The first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  The second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. The second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed on a display other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over an area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. May be displayed.

In addition, "the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]" Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon (for example, a plurality of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 81) displayed in a display mode according to the type,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 110 (16) to FIG. 18 (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged character BC2 of the number length is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display that is displayed over the second symbol 208B and the number character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol symbol. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a high-impact notice icon and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. The first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  The second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. The second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed over a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Is also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may not be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Further, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a symbol variation display that causes a loss, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the suspension of a certain symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of the symbols whose start of the symbol change display is held (hereinafter referred to as “number of holds”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 109. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that have been activated.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;
A first movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 115 (12), a crest actor 224B shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), etc.],
A gaming table with
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B, a notice icon I21 of "house", and a notice icon I22 of "print". , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Big hit symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third hold shown in FIG. ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and FIG. 115, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display ends. In the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 for two hats, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I31 for a drink, etc. are displayed, etc.
The first movable means performs a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from a default position to a projecting position as shown in FIGS. 115 (12) to (17)]. Actionable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, the drink notice icon I31 or the like] among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the movable means. However, according to this game console, a game console having features in the movable means can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming table, when the fourth notice icon is consumed on the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. There are cases.

  According to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  In addition, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is consumed, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed. Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured to be always executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is consumed.

  Also, only when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured to be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The first movable effect may be executed in a case other than when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 82 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is ended, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (2) to FIG. 86 (66) and FIG. In the period from the suspension of the design change display being the target to the end of the design change display, the notice icons I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 of the drink are digested, etc.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon (for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 or the notice icon I21 of “house” among the displayed notice icons) is digested, the first movable icon is displayed. The effect is configured not to be executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured so that only the first movable effect is not executed, or of the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is consumed, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured to not necessarily be executed, or the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons may be executed. When the five advance icons are consumed, the first movable effect may be executed.

  Also, only when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons has been consumed, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons may be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in a case other than when the five advance notice icons are consumed.

In addition, it is provided with an operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like] which can be operated by a player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operation means,
The first movable effect means that the mode of the operation means is changed from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 115 (12)] to the second mode [for example, shown in FIG. 115 (17)]. Protruding position etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a change of the operation means may be notified by a notice icon in some cases, and thus the operation means may be noticed in some cases.

  Here, the operation means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, it may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be such that only the operation means is movable, or may be anything other than the operation means. In addition, the first movable means may always move the operation means, or may not move the operation means.

In addition, “a second movable means [for example, a crest role object shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)] is provided.
The second movable means is means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest drop effect illustrated in FIG. 107 (d4-2)].
When the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of “house”) of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the variety of effects produced by the movable means may be increased, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, it may be configured such that only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon When the sixth advance notice icon is exhausted, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the displayed notice icon among the displayed notice icons may be used. The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

  Also, only when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The second movable effect may be executed in cases other than when the sixth notice icon is exhausted.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Further, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a symbol variation display that causes a loss, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the suspension of a certain symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 104. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

Also, the “notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. Is not an icon indicating the number of symbols in which the operation of the symbol variation display of Tokujin 1 is suspended]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Big hit symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold shown in FIG. ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) is started. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285, a notice icon I6 of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. ]
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display indicating that the display of the notice icon may be started.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that there is a possibility that the display of the notice icon is started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may be something other than that the display of the notice icon may be started. It may be suggestive. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the announcement icon I6 of the two hats, the announcement icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the announcement icon of the fan displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are consumed. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 117 (2) to FIG. Notice that the notice icon by the lord will be displayed over the symbol change display of
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed in some cases.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than the multiple symbol variation displays. May be used. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays.

In addition, it is configured such that, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display ends [for example, FIG. 117 (2) -As shown in FIG. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by the lord's effect is displayed is finished before the symbol change display to be prefetched is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol change display to be pre-read is started, so that it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol change to be pre-read.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, it may be configured such that only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended, or the second symbol variation is displayed. During the display of the symbol change display that is displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end. In addition, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end, or the second symbol variation display The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be ended during the display of the symbol change display displayed earlier than the above.

  Also, only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be ended even during the period other than the display of the symbol change display displayed before the display.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number (for example, three or more) of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), in the Amida production, the display of at least one of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is started. Etc.],
The third number is 2 or more;
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, at least one of the advance notice icons suggested in advance may be displayed, so that the player can know which notice icon may be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to entertain a symbol change in which a notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be one that may only suggest that at least one of the third number of advance notice icons may be displayed, or the third notice icon may be displayed. It may also indicate that at least one of the number advance notice icons may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be displayed. May not indicate that at least one of the displays may be started.

Also, the display of at least one of the third number of the advance notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 119 (a1-1) to 119 (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of advance icons suggested that the display may be started by the advance icon display suggestion display may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notification icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started in some cases. Further, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notification icons suggested that the display may be started by the notification icon display suggestion display always starts, There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display is not started.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Further, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a symbol variation display that causes a loss, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the suspension of a certain symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The suspension display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of suspended symbol change displays (hereinafter referred to as “suspended number”) [for example, the suspended icon shown in FIG. 117. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the “notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reserves according to the number displayed. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that have been activated.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,
Big hit symbol change display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol change display [eg, symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold shown in FIG. ") Is suspended, and then a symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 120 (4) to 120 (13)] "). May start,
In a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are displayed. Display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the symbol variation display which is started after the symbol variation display to be the big hit to be pre-read is suspended. From the start of the display until the symbol change display of the big hit which is the target of the prefetch ends, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which display is started next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Also, according to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display to be pre-read is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, the game starts after that. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the display of a preview icon as a prefetch notice display related to a second design change display to be prefetched from the displayed pattern change display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the first advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the first advance notice display.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. A symbol variation display other than the display may be started. Also, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display may be performed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  Further, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Only one symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, During the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may also be started. In addition, during the period from when the display of the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail, or the first symbol variation may be displayed. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), after the display of the symbol variation display, which is the target of the prefetch, is started after the symbol variation display of the big hit is suspended, the target of the prefetching is started. By the end of the symbol change display that becomes a big hit, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are exhausted, etc.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the use of the preview icon as a pre-reading advance display related to the second symbol variation display to be pre-read from the symbol variation display.

  Here, during the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a part other than the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted. In addition, during the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed, or the first symbol variation display may be performed. During the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Also, only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 120. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the “notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reserves according to the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that have been activated.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third reservation to be prefetched shown in FIG. The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 120 (2) or the like] is started.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol change display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second symbol display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol display may be performed in a case other than the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. In addition, the display of the second hold display may be started whenever the second symbol change display is held, or the display of the second hold display may be started when the second symbol change display is held. It does not have to be started.

Also, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is displayed in a second look-ahead display mode [for example, a look-ahead notice display mode (Sabohani display mode) or the like shown in FIG. 120 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, FIG. ), When the symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold, which is the target of the look-ahead, is held, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display manner (Sabohani display manner). Display etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the variation of the pre-read notice display is increased, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold notice may be displayed. A display mode other than the second prefetch display mode may be displayed. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be the second prefetch display It may not be displayed in an aspect.

  Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, In the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display In the symbol variation display displayed when is suspended, the second suspension display may not be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

  Also, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third pre-reading advance notice display [for example, effect display of pre-reading mode shown in FIGS. 121 (b2) to 121 (b3)],
The third prefetch notice display is a display that may be started after the second symbol change display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 121 (b1) to 121 (b3). Thus, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of prefetch is suspended, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, so that the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be a display that may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display may be started in some cases. In addition, the third look-ahead notice display may be always started to be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, the "losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, referred to as the" fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation which becomes a losing based on the third hold shown in FIG. After that, the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 120 (4) to 120 (13)])” is performed. ) May begin to appear,
In a period from when the display of the third symbol variation display is started to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 82 (4) to FIG. 86 (66), the display of the symbol variation display which is started after the symbol variation display which is the target of the readout is suspended is started after the display of the symbol variation display is started. By the end of the design change display which is a loss, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc. are displayed],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which display is started after the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Further, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. A symbol variation display other than the display may be started. Also, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display may be performed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  Also, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the fourth symbol variation display may be started other than after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  In addition, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, During the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may also be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation may be displayed. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started during a period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a symbol variation display that causes a loss, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed from the suspension of a certain symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 132].
The first display is a description display [for example, a display of "notice icon digestion ..." displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 132 or the like] in the display unit,
When the notice icon is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. And the notice icon I63 of chance up is displayed (stock) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area of the display means, or one that can be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Is also good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be something. The notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In addition, “the first display is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, No explanation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not always be displayed while the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed.

When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may be restarted [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. When all the notice icons are consumed, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of" hot heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d)],
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), “Turkish heat” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Character display is displayed],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a letter display of “notice icon digestion ...” in the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one that can be displayed. The second display may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Is also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

Also, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display units is a second display unit [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a change display of a decorative symbol shown in FIG. 129],
The third display means displays a display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. Or the like in which the icon I62 is stocked).
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means. [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has the third decoration. Etc. arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means There may be a case where at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not always display the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display in accordance with the display of the second display means, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display in accordance with the display of the second display means. May be something. Further, the third display means may always display a display in accordance with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display in accordance with the display of the second display means. Is also good.

  Further, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. May be obtained. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132],
The third display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “Castle Town Stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a display on the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" displayed, etc.]
The third display is a display displayed on a second display area [for example, a stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] of the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. The icon I65 of two pseudo consecutive notices is displayed (stock) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayable in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. You may. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. The notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. Further, the third display may not always be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. May be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, and the like]. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of reserved icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon (a princess notice icon I64, a pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I63 of the chance up, etc.) are not icons indicating the number for which the operation of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is suspended.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
A display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4, the stage name display section ST2, etc. shown in FIG. 132] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in a hold icon [for example, a hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 132].
The first display is a description display [for example, a display of "notice icon digestion ..." displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
When the first display is displayed, the first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 132 or the like] in the display unit,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 displays a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance increase. Notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Also, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the first display area in the display means when displayed. May also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. The notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. In the displayed state, no explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first notice may be displayed. The display other than the display may be prevented from being displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not always be displayed, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may be omitted. A display may be displayed.

  Also, only in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not be displayed, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. May be present. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  When the first display is, for example, a description of the first character, a tenth display, which is a description display different from the first display, may be displayed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of" hot heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d)],
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), “Turkish heat” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Character display is displayed],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a letter display of “notice icon digestion ...” in the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one that can be displayed. The second display may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Is also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, another notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of “hotter than red” in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. (A6), a character display of "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the balloon portion TT2, a character display of "when the panda enters" in the balloon portion TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display, when displayed, is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means [for example, a balloon TT2 or a balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different or entirely different from the display content of the first display.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the second display area in the display means when displayed. May also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be necessarily displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

Also, "the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the character display of "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and "Panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Display, a display other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. May be displayed in some cases.

  In addition, the introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. Further, a notice display and an explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132]
The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “Castle Town Stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a display on the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" displayed, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, a stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] of the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where a first number (for example, three, etc.) of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different or entirely different from the display content of the first display.

  The fourth display may be one that can be displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or one that can be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Is also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  The third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where the number of advance notice icons are displayed in the first display area, new notice icons may be displayed in display areas other than the third display area. In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may always be displayed in the third display area, or the first notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where a number of advance notice icons are displayed in the first display area, new notice icons may not be displayed in the third display area.

  Only in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area, or the first number of notice icons may be displayed. May be displayed only in the third display area even in a state other than the state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the first display area.

  Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. In addition, the fourth display may not always be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. May be done.

Also, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display units is a second display unit [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a change display of a decorative symbol shown in FIG. 129],
The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. 129 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman's notice icon I62 That can be displayed, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means. [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has the third decoration. Etc. arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means There may be a case where at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not always display the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display associated with the display of the second display means, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display associated with the display of the second display means. May be something. Further, the third display means may always display a display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display associated with the display of the second display means. Is also good.

  Further, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. May be obtained. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, and the like]. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

  Further, the second display area may be defined by a line, and the third display area may be defined by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of reserved icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I63 of the chance up, etc.) are not icons indicating the number for which the operation of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is suspended.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

  Note that the number of reservations and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

  Further, the maximum reserved number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 137]
The notice icon is configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a display mode of a swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in a notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display of an enlarged swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in a notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i). Aspects etc.]
In the second display mode, the size of the notice icon is larger than that in the first display mode [for example, from the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l). Also, the size of the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i) is larger, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, The swordsman notice icon I62 is enlarged and displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, the size of the notice icon may be necessarily larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode, or the size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode. There may not be.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. You may. The notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [For example, the icon I62 of the swordsman is the icon shown in FIG. ) Is displayed in a normal display manner as shown in FIG. 137 (l), etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. Thus, a display mode other than the first display mode may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode. May not be displayed in the display mode.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed after the display icon is displayed in the second display mode. In some cases, the information may be displayed in the first display mode. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode. May not be displayed in the display mode.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a decorative symbol variation display. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap with the decorative design change display in the first display form [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the normal display form displayed in the notice icon display area , The icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman do not overlap with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. In addition, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the notice icon may not be overlapped with the decorative pattern variation display only in the first display mode, or may not be overlapped with the decorative pattern variation display in display modes other than the first display mode. You may. In addition, the notice icon may not always overlap the decorative design variation display in the first display mode, or may overlap the decorative design variation display in the first display mode. .

In addition, the “decorative design change display is a display that does not overlap with the notice icon in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. The icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice in the normal display mode displayed in the display area and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman do not overlap, etc.],
The decorative design change display is a display that may overlap with the notice icon in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. The icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice in the enlarged display mode displayed on the icon display frame YF, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and the like are overlapped, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the decorative design variable display may not be overlapped only with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may be something other than the notice icon of the first display mode that does not overlap. . In addition, the decorative design change display may not always overlap the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap the notice icon of the first display mode.

  In addition, the decorative design change display may be such that it may overlap only with the notice icon in the second display mode, or may overlap in addition to the notice icon in the second display mode. There may be some. Further, the decorative design change display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that is displayed in the second display mode even when digested.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when digested, or may be displayed in the second display mode other than when digested. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when digested.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a reserved display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 137 (a)].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area. The icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman are displayed in a normal display mode, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the advance notice icon only in the suspension display area, or may be capable of displaying the advance notice icon in an area other than the suspension display area. In addition, the display means may always display the advance notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the advance notice icon in the hold display area.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in other than the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. May be displayed in the display mode of. Also, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when it is displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode even when it is not displayed in the hold display area. May be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the reserved display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. , When the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo consecutive notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the preview icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may always be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon may be newly stocked. In this case, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, the “second display mode is a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged. [For example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman of the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 137 (l) is an enlarged display of the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the preview icon of the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which something other than the notification icon of the first display mode is enlarged. Is also good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is always enlarged, or may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice displays [for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a freeze effect, a stop symbol effect, a stage change effect, a reach transition effect, a premium effect effect, a re-fluctuation effect, and the like]. Yes,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of the advance notice icons [for example, each advance notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each advance notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like]. And
When the notice icon is consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (25). In the case where the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo continuous effects shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (31) are displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display the plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Also, when the notice icon is digested, only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, A kind of notice display other than the kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be always displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. May not be displayed in advance.

  In addition, only when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or in a case other than when the notice icon is digested. A notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the holding icons corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" number of holdings ") [for example, FIG. In the reserved icon display area in the UI part UI1 shown in a), the number of reserved icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [For example, the notice icon (two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65) shown in FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of the symbol change display operation 1 that is suspended, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold. Good. In addition, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A gaming table equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]" And
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, a hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a)].
In the icon display frame, an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “icon”) related to the symbol variation display is configured to be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as “in-frame region”) [for example, As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the change icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a)].
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i)].
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded. [For example, the expanded display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. (A) the display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in FIG.
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b), and a second decoration in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. The reserved display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. so,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  In addition, according to this gaming table, the icon display frame displayed with priority is extended, and the player notices that the effect is being performed by performing an effect such as a notice or a pre-read notice in the expanded portion. In some cases. In recent gaming consoles, since a variety of effect displays are simultaneously performed, there is a tendency that it is complicated and difficult to visually recognize, but according to this gaming console, an icon related to a symbol variation display that a player is always paying attention to Is expanded, the icon display frame for displaying is displayed, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display and the second display. . In addition, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Further, the first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include something other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may always include the icon display frame, or may not include the icon display frame.

  Here, the “icon display frame” may be referred to as “suspended display frame”, “suspended frame”, “UI”, “suspended icon display area”, or the like. The “icon display frame” is a display that may overlap at least a part of the hold icon, the change icon, and the like. In addition, since the “icon display frame” is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative design display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect displays. In addition, the “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one change icon or a hold icon is displayed. Further, the “icon display frame” is a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be said to be a display frame that overlaps with at least a part of the reserved icon or the like. Further, the "icon display frame" is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like, and can be said to be a background display different from the background display of the decorative design.

  Also, here, the “icon display frame” is a portion that can be recognized by the player as a portion where an icon is displayed without being caught by the word “frame”, and the display of the frame image is It is an example, and is not limited to this.

  Further, among the icon display frames, only the icons may be displayed in the in-frame area, or the icon display frames may be configured to be able to display other than the icons in the in-frame area. In addition, the icon display frame may be configured so that the icon is always displayed in the frame area, or may be configured such that the icon display frame may not display the icon in the frame area. Good.

  Here, the area within the frame constitutes the icon display frame, and therefore has the concept included in the first display.

  The icon display frame may be one that can be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or one that can be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, the icon display frame may be one that can be displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, and may be a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be something. Further, the icon display frame may always display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Is also good.

  Further, the second display mode may be an expanded version of only the first display mode, or may be an expanded version of the first display mode.

  Here, the “display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

  In this case, “extended” can be said to be a display of “icon display frame” in a broad sense, and it can also be said that the area of an image or a region becomes large.

  Also, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not always be overlapped with the second display, or may be overlapped with the second display. There may be.

  Here, the “decorative symbol change display” may include a stop display of the decorative symbol or a display in a state where the symbol can be identified at the start of the change, for example, during a high-speed change, etc., during the stop display. Or a display in a state that is more difficult to identify than the display state at the start of fluctuation (for example, translucent display during high-speed fluctuation), or a decoration whose size is reduced during SP reach or the like A variation display of the symbol may be included.

Also, "one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display [for example, a ninja character NJ1 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l) throws a shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Effect display etc.]
A portion of the second display mode that has been extended from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as an “extended section [for example, an extended section in a suspended display frame FL1 of the extended display mode shown in FIG. ]].), The third display is configured to be overlapped and displayable [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the second hold icon h12 , The ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 in the effect display that changes the display mode of
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the second display [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the suspended display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is the Not overlapped with the first decorative design or the second decorative design, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this game console, the icon display frame is displayed in an expanded manner at least prior to the display of the change in the decorative pattern indicating whether or not the change is appropriate, and the effect display such as a notice or a pre-read notice is performed in the expanded portion. In some cases, the effect can be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. In addition, the display means may always display the third display, or may not display the third display.

  Here, the “effect display” includes an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes, or the like.

  Further, only the third display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed on the extended portion, or display other than the third display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed on the extended portion. In addition, the third display may be configured to always be displayed so as to overlap the extended portion, or the third display may be configured to be not overlapped and displayed in the extended portion. Good.

  Here, the “extended part” may be a difference from the part before the expansion, or may indicate the part itself when only a part of the icon display frame before the expansion is expanded (or enlarged). .

  Further, the extended portion may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be such that it does not overlap with displays other than the second display. Further, the extended portion may not be always overlapped with the second display, or may be sometimes overlapped with the second display.

Also, the “effect display is a display of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. From a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display that may overlap with the extended portion. [For example, as shown in FIG. Overlaps with the display frame FL1, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be such that it may overlap only with the extended portion, or may be that it may overlap with portions other than the extended portion. Further, the second display may be such that it always overlaps with the extended portion, or may be that which does not always overlap with the extended portion.

Also, "one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display of dialogue [for example, a dialogue display of the princess Chibi character CH1 in the balloon TT2 and a dialogue display of the grandfather character GY1 in the balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 140 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), the hold display of the default display mode The frame FL1 does not overlap with the balloon TT2 or the balloon TT3, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the suspended display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. Overlapped with the display of dialogue by Princess Chibi's character CH1],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. In addition, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Here, the “display of dialogue” may be referred to as “announcement of dialogue” or “announcement of conversation”, and may include, for example, advance notice of the change, advance notice, and tutorial display.

  Further, the fourth display may not be overlapped only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that do not. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be.

  Here, “the fourth display does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode” means that the display position does not overlap. This is a concept that also includes a configuration.

  Further, the fourth display may be such that it may overlap only with the extended portion, or may be such that it may overlap with portions other than the extended portion. Further, the fourth display may be such that it always overlaps with the extended portion, or may be that which does not overlap with the extended portion.

  In addition, the “display of dialogue” includes the display of the first dialogue and the display of the second dialogue, and the display of the first dialogue is a display that may be overlapped with an extended part. The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap with the extended portion.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6), and FIG. -1) to an effect display for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, etc. shown in FIG.
In the extended portion, the fifth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable [for example, the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6)). In the effect display in which the display mode is changed, or in the effect display in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4) is changed, the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. Overlaps with the extension of the hold icon display area FL1],
The third display and the fifth display are partially the same display [for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l)]. 147 (c-1) to FIG. 147 (c-1) to FIG. 147 (c-1) to FIG. 147 (c-1) to change the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX. The effect display that changes the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 shown in 4) also includes a ninja character NJ1 displayed in an extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, for example, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the change is appropriate in a decorative symbol, and by performing both the third display and the fifth display in the expanded icon display frame, the icon display frame is displayed. You may be able to see both displays without missing. In addition, if the third display and the fifth display are all different modes, it may be clear whether to expect the change or to expect the next and subsequent symbol change display. In some cases, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation until it becomes possible to recognize which of the expected symbol variation displays is possible by making the display of the fifth and the fifth display the same.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. In addition, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  In the extended portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayable, or in the extended portion, displays other than the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayable. May be done. Further, in the extended portion, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed so as to always overlap, or in the extended portion, the fifth display may not be displayed in an overlapped manner. May be configured.

  In addition, only in the extended portion, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner, or in portions other than the extended portion, the fifth display may be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be configured.

  Here, the “advance notice display” may be a change effect of a fluctuating icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-sequence symbol, or the like.

  Further, "the third display and the fifth display are partly the same display" is a concept including, for example, the same display up to the animation until the character appears.

In addition, "the area in the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter," the area in the first frame [for example, the area in the frame of the suspended display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 140 (a)] " Etc.]) is the first area,
The area in the frame in the second display mode (hereinafter, “the area in the second frame [eg, the area in the frame of the suspended display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i)]”). )) Is the second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The extended portion is a portion of a difference region between the second in-frame area and the first in-frame area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second in-frame area is an area configured to include the first in-frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the extended display mode of the suspended display frame FL1 The area within the frame is configured to include the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second in-frame area may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame area, or may be configured to include the entire first in-frame area. There may be.

In addition, the “display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” according to claim 1 means “the area of the region within the frame in the first display mode is increased. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the area of the area within the frame of the suspended display frame FL1 in the default display mode has increased in the extended display mode of the suspended display frame FL1. Display mode, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, it is configured that “the icon display frame can be displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold, and no symbol variation display is performed. Even when neither the change icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, the hold display frame FL1 is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayed only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. A display mode other than the first display mode may be configured to be displayable. Further, the icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

  The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in a region other than the icon display frame.

The icon that can be displayed in the in-frame area is a variable icon [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the icon that can be displayed in the in-frame area may be a hold icon.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, a first hold icon h11 to a fourth hold icon h14 displayed in a hold icon display area, etc.] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the reserved icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is suspended,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon as an icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold icon as an icon. In addition, the display means may be configured to always display the hold icon as an icon, or may not display the hold icon as an icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display, or the number of the icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended. The number of hold icons other than the number of hold icons may be displayed. In addition, the number of holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the number of the holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display may be held. May not be displayed.

Also, “the first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, FIG. 140 (f) to FIG. The display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in ()) is overlapped with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display mode, or may be a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. In addition, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily be overlapped with the second display mode, or may be overlapped with the second display mode. There may be cases.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
A display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4, the stage name display section ST2, etc. shown in FIG. 132] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in a hold icon [for example, a hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 132].
The first display is a description display [for example, a display of "notice icon digestion ..." displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.
When the first display is displayed, the first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 132 or the like] in the display unit,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 includes a notice icon I62 of a swordsman and a notice of chance up. Icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132].
The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “Castle Town Stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a display on the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" displayed, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display, when displayed, is a display displayed on a third display area of the display means [for example, the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where a first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon [here, the “notice icon” is, for example, 81 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc., and "the notice icon" of the "first number of notice icons". May be displayed in the third display area [for example, in a state where three notice icons are displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage. Displayed on the name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. In the displayed state, no explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of" hot heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d)],
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), “Turkish heat” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Character display is displayed],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a letter display of “notice icon digestion ...” in the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of “hotter than red” in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. (A6), a character display of "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the balloon portion TT2, a character display of "when the panda enters" in the balloon portion TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display, when displayed, is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means [for example, a balloon TT2 or a balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the character display of "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and "Panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display units is a second display unit [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a change display of a decorative symbol shown in FIG. 129],
The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. 129 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman's notice icon I62 That can be displayed, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means. [For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has the third decoration. Etc. arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, and the like]. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of reserved icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I63 of the chance up, etc.) are not icons indicating the number for which the operation of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is suspended.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display section TT4, the stage name display section ST2, the balloon section TT2, etc. shown in FIG. 155] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 155]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG. 155].
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 155],
The first display is a character display [for example, a display of “Castle Town Stage” displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 155 (a)],
The second display is a character display [for example, a display such as "notice of icon notice ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 155 (a)],
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, a stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 155 or the like] of the display means,
The second display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 155] of the display unit,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (f), an icon I65 of a pseudo consecutive notice is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, etc.],
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), a notice icon I62 of a swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (k3), two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed on the stage name display part ST2. etc],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having features in the display means can be realized.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-read notice display, or may be displayed as a display other than the pre-read notice display (for example, the change notice or the like). Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display and the second display. . In addition, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Also, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the first display area in the display means when displayed. May also be displayed. The first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the second display area of the display means when displayed. May also be displayed. The second display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the first display area and the second display area may or may not overlap. In the first display area and the second display area, the first display area may have a larger area, the second display area may have a larger area, or the same area. There may be. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different shapes or the same shape.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In addition, a notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or a notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, a notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or a notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, only a plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area, or something other than the plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area. Further, a plurality of advance notice icons may always be displayed in the first display area, or a plurality of advance notice icons may not be displayed in the first display area.

  Note that the character display displayed in the first display area may be a display indicating a selected one, such as a song title, a selected character, a selected character name, and a production mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, the appearance rate of a notice or an effect may be different for each mode, or the effect content may be different for each mode. In addition, as a character display displayed in the first display area, for example, the character display is given based on the number of stays indicating the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the specific effect mode is executed, the stage name, the number of consecutive rooms, the number of consecutive rooms Title, display of the level according to the number of winning prize balls, the number of reserves during the big hit and the consecutive play, points given as a result of the game, the title given corresponding to this level, displayed in the continuous hitting operation effect Display of continuous hit meter (or display of barometer until defeating the enemy) Number of pseudo continuous effects that occurred in one symbol change display, effects that are performed during probable changes or during electric support A display indicating the current situation, such as a display of an enemy character (defeated enemy character) that is guaranteed to be a big hit or a display of a defeated enemy character may be used.Further, as other character displays displayed in the first display area, a dialogue notice, a tutorial display, a function description (eg, a description of a volume changing method), a type of a reach being performed, a mini game, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) Countdown display until the performance is performed, display of the mini screen displayed during the period when the specific performance such as RTC performance is performed, display of the mission, display of right-hand or left-hand how to hit, aiming at the electric chew A display for instructing the player to hit the ball or an instruction for storing the game ball in a predetermined storage unit may be displayed. Also, all of the above-described character display examples may be displayed in the first display area, or some of the above-described character display examples may not be displayed in the first display area. Is also good.

  Further, the character display displayed in the second display area may be a display indicating a selected one, such as a song title, a selected character, a selected character name, and a production mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, the appearance rate of a notice or an effect may be different for each mode, or the effect content may be different for each mode. In addition, as a character display displayed in the second display area, for example, it is given based on the number of stays indicating the number of remaining symbol changes in which the specific effect mode is executed, the stage name, the number of consecutive rooms, the number of consecutive rooms. Title, display of the level according to the number of winning prize balls, the number of reserves during the big hit and the consecutive play, points given as a result of the game, the title given corresponding to this level, displayed in the continuous hitting operation effect Display of continuous hit meter (or display of barometer until defeating enemy) A display indicating the current situation, such as a display of an enemy character (defeated enemy character) that is guaranteed to be a big hit or a display of a defeated enemy character may be used.Other character displays displayed in the second display area include a dialogue notice, a tutorial display, a description of a function (eg, a description of a volume changing method), a type of reach being executed, a mini game, and an RTC (Real Time Clock). Countdown display until the performance is performed, display of the mini screen displayed during the period when the specific performance such as RTC performance is performed, display of the mission, display of right-hand or left-hand how to hit, aiming at the electric chew A display for instructing the player to hit the ball or an instruction for storing the game ball in a predetermined storage unit may be displayed. Also, all of the above-described examples of character display may be displayed in the second display area, or some of the above-described examples of character display may not be displayed in the second display area. Is also good.

In addition, there is a case where the display of the notice icon in the second display area is started in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, FIG. 157 (b1) to FIG. As shown in b2), the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT4 has been started while the two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. May be displayed in the second display area in addition to the display of the notice icon. Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In the state, the display of the notice icon in the second display area may not be started in some cases.

  Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the notice icon may be started only in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In the displayed state, the display of the notice icon may be started also in the display area other than the second display area, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The display of the notice icon may always be started in the second display area.

  Also, only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the displayed state, the display of the notice icon in the second display area may be started, or in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The display of the notice icon in the second display area may be started.

Further, it is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of icons (for example, each of the notice icons shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B, each of the notice icons shown in FIG. 135D) as the notice icons. And
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., a pseudo-announcement icon I65 or the like],
In a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may also be started in the second display area [for example, FIG. 155 (i)]. As shown in the figure, the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is displayed on the balloon TT2 while the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed as advance notice icons, or icons other than the plurality of types of icons may be displayed as advance notice icons. Further, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of types of icons are always displayed as advance notice icons, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of icons are not displayed as advance notice icons.

  Further, only the first icon may be displayed as the advance notice icon, or an icon other than the first icon may be displayed as the advance notice icon. In addition, the first icon may be configured to be always displayed as the advance notice icon, or the first icon may not be displayed as the advance notice icon.

  Further, in a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, only the display of the first icon may be started in the second display area, or the first display may be performed. In a state where the first icon is displayed in the area, display other than the display of the first icon may also be started in the second display area. Also, in a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may be started in the second display area without fail, or the first icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where the icon is displayed, the display of the first icon may not be started in the second display area in some cases.

  In the state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of only the first icon may be started in the second display area, or the first display area may be displayed. In the state where the first icon is displayed, the display of icons other than the first icon may also be started in the second display area, or the first display area may display the first icon. In a state where the icon is displayed, the display of the first icon may always be started in the second display area.

  Also, only in a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the first icon may also be started in the second display area, or the first display may be performed. Even in a state other than the state where the first icon is displayed in the area, the display of the first icon may also be started in the second display area, or the first display area may display the first icon. In a state where one icon is displayed, the display of the first icon may always start in the second display area.

When the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (f), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Otherwise, the first display may not be displayed. Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not always be displayed, or in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Alternatively, the first display may be displayed.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a2) to (a3), the second button notice icon When I11 is digested, the stage name display section ST2 resumes displaying the stage name, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display is resumed in addition to the display of the first display. There may be things. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Even when the icon I65 of the consecutive notice is displayed on the stage name display ST2, the character display of "notice the icon is displayed ..." is displayed on the tutorial display TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the second display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if the state is displayed, a display other than the second display may be displayed. Further, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be always displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. However, the second display may not be displayed.

  Also, the second display may be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. May be displayed in some cases.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. Is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, only the second display may not be displayed, or a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Then, it may be configured such that a display other than the second display is not displayed. Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display may not be necessarily displayed, or in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. , The second display may be displayed.

  Further, only when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display may be configured not to be displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. In such a state, the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area divided by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the stage name display section ST2 is rectangularly divided by a line, etc. ],
The second display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, and the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, first decorative symbol display device 208L, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, as shown in FIG. In the reserved icon display area, the number of reserved icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (for example, the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice) shown in FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of FIG. 1, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means [for example, effect button 136 etc.]
Display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A gaming table with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
A display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4, the stage name display section ST2, the balloon section TT2, etc. shown in FIG. 156] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 156]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon h11 shown in FIG.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG. 156],
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 156],
The first display is a character display [for example, a display of “shore stage” displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 156 (a3) or the like],
The second display is a character display [for example, a display of "notice icon digestion ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 156 (a1) or the like].
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, a stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 156 or the like] of the display unit,
The second display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 156 or the like] of the display unit,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), a notice icon I62 of a swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
As the notice icon, a plurality of types of icons (for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 81A and 81B and each notice icon shown in FIG. 135D) can be displayed.
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a second button notice icon I11 or the like],
The first icon is an icon related to the operation unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having features in the display means can be realized.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as a pre-read notice display, or may be displayed as a display other than the pre-read notice display (for example, the change notice display or the like). Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the first display and the second display. . In addition, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  Also, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the first display area in the display means when displayed. May also be displayed. The first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the second display area of the display means when displayed. May also be displayed. The second display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the first display area and the second display area may or may not overlap. In the first display area and the second display area, the first display area may have a larger area, the second display area may have a larger area, or the same area. There may be. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different shapes or the same shape.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In addition, a notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or a notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or something other than the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, a notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or a notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, only a plurality of types of icons may be configured to be displayed as advance notice icons, or an icon other than the plurality of types of icons may be configured to be displayable as advance notice icons. Further, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of types of icons are always displayed as advance notice icons, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of icons are not displayed as advance notice icons.

  Further, only the first icon may be displayed as the advance notice icon, or an icon other than the first icon may be displayed as the advance notice icon. In addition, the first icon may be configured to be always displayed as the advance notice icon, or the first icon may not be displayed as the advance notice icon.

In addition, there is a case where the display of the notice icon in the second display area is started in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, FIG. 157 (b1) to FIG. As shown in b2), the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT4 has been started while the two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. May be displayed in the second display area in addition to the display of the notice icon. Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In the state, the display of the notice icon in the second display area may not be started in some cases.

  Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the notice icon may be started only in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In the displayed state, the display of the notice icon may be started also in the display area other than the second display area, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The display of the notice icon may always be started in the second display area.

  Also, only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the displayed state, the display of the notice icon in the second display area may be started, or in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The display of the notice icon in the second display area may be started.

In addition, ““ the icon relating to the operation means ”means“ an icon that gives notice of occurrence of button effect ”[for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a1) to (a3), the second button The notice icon I11 gives notice of the occurrence of the button effect, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the icon related to the operation means may be an icon for notifying only the occurrence of the button effect, or may be an icon for notifying the occurrence other than the occurrence of the button effect. Further, the icon related to the operation means may be an icon that always notifies the occurrence of the button effect, or may be an icon that does not always notify the occurrence of the button effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, an icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice shown in FIG. 155 (f)],
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the first icon and the second icon may be configured to be able to be displayed as the advance notice icon, or an icon other than the first icon and the second icon may be configured to be able to be displayed as the advance notice icon. Good. Further, the first icon and the second icon may be configured to be always displayed as a preview icon, or the first icon and the second icon may not be displayed as the preview icon. Is also good.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In the displayed state, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Otherwise, the first display may not be displayed. Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not always be displayed, or in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Alternatively, the first display may be displayed.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 156 (a2) to (a3), the second button notice icon When I11 is digested, the stage name display section ST2 resumes displaying the stage name, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display is resumed in addition to the display of the first display. There may be things. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), Even when the button notice icon I11 of No. 2 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, the text display of "notice icon digestion ..." is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the second display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if the state is displayed, a display other than the second display may be displayed. Further, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the second display may be always displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. However, the second display may not be displayed.

  Also, the second display may be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. May be displayed in some cases.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 157 (b2), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. Is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, only the second display may not be displayed, or a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Then, it may be configured such that a display other than the second display is not displayed. Further, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display may not be necessarily displayed, or in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. , The second display may be displayed.

  Further, only when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the second display may be configured not to be displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. In such a state, the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area divided by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the stage name display unit ST2 is divided into a square by a line, etc. ],
The second display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, and the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, first decorative symbol display device 208L, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, as shown in FIG. 156 (a1). In the reserved icon display area, the number of reserved icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (for example, the icon I65 of the pseudo consecutive notice) shown in FIG. It is not an icon indicating the number of pending operations of the symbol variation display of FIG. 1, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,
“First operation means [for example, the transmission unit 191, the operation means B in the description of FIG.
Second operation means [for example, the chance button 136, the operation means A in the description of FIG. 13, and the like];
Third operation means [for example, operation key unit 181 (cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c), etc.];
A gaming table with
In the state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate [for example, while the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may vibrate. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (p), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (r1), and FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (r2). May not always vibrate]
The second operation means is an operation means capable of changing the position of the operation surface [for example, FIGS. 16 (i) to (j), FIGS. 17 (i) to (j), etc.],
The third operation means is an operation means including a plurality of operation units,
It is possible to perform multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, the final effects shown in FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), FIGS. 25 (m) to (q), and FIGS. 26 (m) to (q). Judge production etc.)
The first effect is a judge effect on a jackpot [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 13 (a), a final judge effect shown below FIG. 13 (d), FIGS. 23 (m) to 23 (q). 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), etc.)
The first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first effect, the second operating means vibrates [for example, A vibration shown in FIG. 13A, vibration of the operating means A shown in the lower part of FIG. 13D, FIGS. (Q), (m) to (q), (m) to (q), (m) to (q) of FIG.
In the first effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
The first effect is not a notice effect relating to the second operation means [for example, an operation notice effect including a notification prompting the operation of the chance button 136 or a notification regarding the operation result of the chance button 136],
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 31 (m ′) to (q ′)),
The first production mode and the third production mode are different modes,
There is a case where the third effect is started according to the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′),
In the third effect, the second operation means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′) and the like],
In the third effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.
Furthermore, in the above description,
“First operation means [for example, the transmission unit 191, the operation means B in the description of FIG.
Second operation means [for example, the chance button 136, the operation means A in the description of FIG. 13, and the like];
Third operation means [for example, operation key unit 181 (cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c), etc.];
A gaming table with
In the state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate [for example, while the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may vibrate. 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (p), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (r1), and FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (r2). May not always vibrate]
The second operation means is an operation means capable of changing the position of the operation surface [for example, FIGS. 16 (i) to (j), FIGS. 17 (i) to (j), etc.],
The third operation means is an operation means including a plurality of operation units,
It is possible to perform multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, FIGS. 23 (m) to (q), FIGS. 24 (m) to (q), FIGS. 25 (m) to (q), and FIG. (M) to the final judge effect shown in FIG.
The first effect is a judge effect on a jackpot [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 13 (a), a final judge effect shown below FIG. 13 (d), FIGS. 23 (m) to 23 (q). 24 (m) to FIG. 24 (q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. 25 (q), FIG. 26 (m) to FIG. 26 (q), etc.)
The first effect is an effect operation of a movable means [for example, a family crest role object 247 shown in FIGS. 23 (m) to (o) or a pair of united role objects 248 shown in FIG. 23 (m) and the union operation of the pair of union objects 248 shown in FIG. 23 (n)].
The first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In a certain state where the effect operation in the first effect is being performed , the second operation means [for example , FIGS. 23 (m) to 23 (p )] vibrate,
In the first effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
The first effect is not a notice effect relating to the second operation means [for example, an operation notice effect including a notification prompting the operation of the chance button 136 or a notification regarding the operation result of the chance button 136],
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 31 (m ′) to (q ′)),
The first production mode and the third production mode are different modes,
There is a case where the third effect is started according to the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′),
In the third effect, the second operation means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 31 (m ′) to FIG. 31 (q ′) and the like],
In the third effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
If both the third effect and the first effect is performed in one variation rather name
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects evolves into a fourth effect [for example, super reach shown in FIGS. 14 (f) to (g) and FIGS. 21 (f) to (g). Judgment of whether or not]
The fourth effect is an effect including an effect operation of the movable means [for example, a drop operation of the crest role object 247 shown in FIG. 14 (f) or FIG. 21 (f)].
The fourth effect may be started according to the operation of the second operation means [for example, FIG. 14 (e) or FIG. 21 (e)] [for example, FIG. 14 (f) or FIG. f)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.
Further, the “first effect is an effect that is executed when the first operating means is operated at a first timing [for example, a timing when the remaining period meter display 191c remains 以上 or more]. Yes,
The third effect is executed when the first operation means is operated at a timing different from the first timing [for example, at a timing when the remaining period meter display 191c has less than 1/2 remaining]. Production
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.
Also, "the first effect is one effect of a notice effect on the first operation means,
The third effect is a different effect from the first effect of the notice effects related to the first operation means,
The “announcement effect regarding the first operating means” means that “the first operating means is operated in a state in which a display prompting the operation of the first operating means [for example, the transmission unit display 191X or the like] is displayed. Then, [for example, an effect that is started in FIG. 23 (l) and the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 17 (m) or FIG. 18 (m)],
The first production mode and the second production mode are different modes,
The mode of the third production and the mode of the second production are different modes,
The second effect starts in response to an operation of the second operation means [for example, a pressing operation shown in FIG. 16 (l) or FIG. 18 (l)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, “the first effect is an effect that is not started by the operation of the second operation means [for example, FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "the first effect is an effect in which a display for prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, a transmission portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification or the like] is not performed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, "the first effect is not an effect that is started when the second operating means is operated in a state where a display prompting the operation of the second operating means is made,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, “the third effect is an effect that is not performed simultaneously with the first effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, "It is possible to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification for prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 23 (k) and FIG. 23 (l), FIG. 24 (k) and FIG. 24 (1), FIG. 25 (k). (L2), FIG. 26 (k) and FIG. 26 (l) each showing a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification].
The first effect is performed during a first period [for example, the period from FIG. 23 (k) to FIG.
k)-(l), FIG. 25 (k)-(12), FIG. 26 (m)-(l), etc.], the first operation means is operated. It is a production that starts when
The first notification is a notification performed in the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition, "the second operation means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is being performed [for example, the entire period in the examples of FIGS. in the example is an operation means for vibrating the since no vibration part of period in FIG (q),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, ““ judgment production for a big hit ”is“ a performance in which a judge result indicating a big hit [for example, a result that is determined to be a big hit, etc.] is notified ”.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In the following, it will be additionally described including what has been described.

(Appendix 1)
A first operation means;
Second operating means;
A gaming table with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is configured to be able to start according to the operation of the first operation means,
The second operation means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of states in which the first effect is being performed (hereinafter, referred to as “first state”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that the first effect may be a notice effect. Further, the second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a smaller operating means.

(Appendix 2)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 1,
The first state is a state during the entire period in which the first effect is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
When the second effect is started when the second operating means is operated within a second period, and when the second effect is not started even when the second operating means is operated. Is configured to have
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  The second operating means may be an operating means that always vibrates when the second operating means is operated during the second period.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 3,
In at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as a “second state”), the second operation means is configured to vibrate,
The first state is a state in which the second effect is not performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 1 to 4,
When the first effect is started when the first operating means is operated within a first period, and when the first effect is not started even when the first operating means is operated. Is configured to have
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the first period.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  That is, even when the first effect is not executed, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to always vibrate.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 5, wherein
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification that prompts an operation of the first operation unit,
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated in a state where the first notification is being executed, or may be a vibration means. It may be an operating means for performing the operation.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
According to the operation of the first operation means, is configured to be able to start any one of the first effect and the third effect,
In the state where the third effect is being executed, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even in a state where the first operation means is not operated,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 11)
A first operation means;
Second operating means;
A gaming table with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect,
The first effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the first effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate,
In a state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate,
The first effect is not a notice effect on the second operation means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 11, wherein
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is a notice effect,
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
It is configured such that the second effect may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means,
Before the second effect is started, only the second operation means of the first operation means and the second operation means is configured to vibrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 12, wherein
Display means capable of displaying an image,
The first effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display unit,
The second effect is an effect by displaying an image on the display means,
If the second operating means is operated in a state where the second operating means is vibrating during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 14)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 12 or 13,
The second effect is an effect that is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started,
The state before the second effect is started is a state after the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the second effect is started is started,
In the second effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 11 to 14, wherein
It is configured such that the case where the second operation means vibrates is more easily shifted to a state advantageous to the player than the case where the second operation means does not vibrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 11 to 15, wherein
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect,
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,
The third effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 16, wherein
The third effect is an effect configured not to be performed simultaneously with the first effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 11 to 17, wherein
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification that prompts an operation of the first operation unit,
The first effect is an effect that is started when the first operation unit is operated in a first period,
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 11 to 18, wherein
The second operation unit is a unit configured to vibrate during at least a part of a period during which the first effect is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 11 to 19,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 11 to 19,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a1)
Image display means,
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
Notice means that can execute multiple kinds of notices,
A gaming table with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The suspension display is a display displayed in a suspension display area in the image display means,
The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol change display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “number of holds”),
The symbol change display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area of the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or more notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period during which the symbol change display is performed once, the first notice icon out of the plurality of kinds of notice icons is larger than the first number than when the first notice icon is digested to the first number. It is configured so that if it is digested by two, it will be easier to hit a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a2)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a3)
The gaming table according to Supplementary note a1 or a2,
The notice means is means capable of executing a fake notice in the same mode as the notice mode,
The notice means is means capable of executing, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon. ,
After the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a4)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a3,
In the period in which the one symbol change display is being executed, the number of the preview icons to be started to be displayed in the preview icon display area is a fourth number larger than the third number and larger than the third number. Is configured to be a big hit
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a5)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a4,
A hold display unit capable of executing a display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a6)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a5,
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a7)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a6,
Pre-reading notice means that can execute pre-reading notice is provided,
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a8)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a7,
During the period in which the symbol variation display to be pre-read (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) is being performed, the notice icon may be digested in a fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) is executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is changed to a sixth symbol. May be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a9)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a8,
During the period in which the symbol change display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) is performed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a10)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a9,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation is performed. The notice icon which is consumed during the period when the display is being executed may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a11)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a10,
The hold display area is an area where the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by the following.

(Appendix a12)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a11,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a13)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a14)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a1 to a13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a15)
A game console having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol change display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”), the first symbol variation not displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a16)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a17)
The gaming table according to appendix a15 or a16,
As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol change display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol change display is being displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a18)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a17,
During the display of one symbol change display, a larger hit is obtained when the second number of the first notice icons is digested than when the first number of the first notice icons is digested. It is easy to become
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a19)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a18,
A second notice icon is configured to be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a20)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a21)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a20,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, a first false notice display may be displayed as the false notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The first false notice display is configured to be shifted in the displayed symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a22)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a look-ahead effect display,
A third notice icon is configured to be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a23)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a22,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a24)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative design change display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a25)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be completely consumed by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a26)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area of the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a27)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a26,
With effect control means,
The effect control means is means capable of executing the control of the display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a28)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a27,
Main control means;
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control unit is a unit that can execute control of the symbol display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a29)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a15 to a28,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a30)
First display means capable of performing symbol variation display,
Second display means,
A gaming table with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, in a hold display area, a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol change display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”),
The symbol change display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds according to the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon,
In the period in which the symbol change display is performed once, the case where the notice number is digested by the second number larger than the first number is larger than the case where the notice number is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easily
Prior to the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched, the second display means may be displayed in the announcement icon display area as a prefetch announcement display. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a31)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a32)
The gaming table according to appendix a30 or a31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode,
The second display means can display, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon. Display means
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a33)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a32,
The second display unit is a display unit configured by a plurality of display units,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a34)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a33,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is an image display unit,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The suspension display unit is a display unit configured to include the suspension display area,
The suspension display unit is a display unit capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of suspensions in the suspension display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a35)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a34,
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a36)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
According to the number of holds, a hold icon is displayed in the hold display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a37)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a36,
In the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed, the notice icon may be digested in a fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) is executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is changed to a sixth symbol. May be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display corresponding to the number of holds is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a38)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed before the end of the symbol variation display to be pre-read,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a39)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a38,
During the period in which the symbol change display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) is performed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a40)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a39,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon which is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed May start to be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a41)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a40,
The hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the number of holds up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a42)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a41,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, a first notice icon is configured to be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon is configured to be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of notice displays is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is configured to be displayed,
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display that informs that the first effect is performed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is to be executed.

(Appendix a43)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a42,
Main control means;
Effect control means,
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control unit is a unit that can execute control of the first display unit,
The effect control means is means capable of executing the control of the second display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a44)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a30 to a43,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a45)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be pre-read is held, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Until the end, a plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the time when the first symbol variation display is started and the time when the second symbol variation display is completed. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a staging display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In one symbol change display, a first effect display is displayed as the effect display by digesting a first number of the advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first number advance icons”). It is configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon,
The gaming table, wherein the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming table, a gaming table having a characteristic display can be realized.

  Also, according to this game console, there is a possibility that the first effect display will be displayed after one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have expectations for something.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the number of the notice icons is made to look like a symbol change before the reservation to be prefetched, so that a sense of expectation to the big hit can be given.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons, or three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the effect display A is displayed. A corresponding effect display B may be performed, or an effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. May be performed.

  Alternatively, only one of the first and second notice icons may be used, or only one of the first and second notice icons may be newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix a46)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a45,
In one symbol change display, the first effect display is not displayed even if a second number of the advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “second number advance icons”) are consumed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icons of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon in one symbol change display. Since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who has been able to see the first effect display.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons have been consumed.

  Further, a part of the first effect display may be displayed or the entire first effect display may be displayed even if the second number of notice icons are consumed.

  In addition, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of noticed icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  When a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may always be used.

  Also, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested, and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured so that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not deleted.

(Appendix a47)
The gaming table according to appendix a45 or a46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is configured to be displayed as the effect display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect variation can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix a48)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a45 to a47,
In the case where the lost symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. There is a case where the plurality of notice icons are digested before the end.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, in the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the target of the prefetching is a big hit and the case of a loss, it is consumed from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the target of the prefetching. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the target for prefetching is a big hit and the case of a loss, the process is performed from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the target for prefetching. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, one symbol performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) The maximum number of notice icons consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) depends on whether the result of the symbol variable display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss. They may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, one symbol performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) The minimum number of notice icons to be consumed in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is determined when the result of the symbol variation display to be pre-read is a big hit or a loss. They may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, the maximum number of the notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different when the result is a big hit and a loss.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, the minimum number of notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different when the result is a big hit and a loss.

(Appendix a49)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a48,
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed after the third symbol variation display is started until the fourth symbol variation display ends. May be
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a lower jackpot, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix a50)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a45 to a49,
Equipped with a hold display means,
The suspension display unit is a unit capable of displaying a number of suspension displays corresponding to the number of suspensions of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “the suspension number”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that the hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix a51)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a50,
By the number of which the notice icon is displayed, it is configured not to display the reserved number,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix a52)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a45 to a51,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a53)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a45 to a51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a54)
A game console having a plurality of display means,
One display unit of the plurality of display units is a first display unit,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to a notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be pre-read is held, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Until the end, a plurality of the advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the time when the first symbol variation display is started and the time when the second symbol variation display is completed. May be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that the display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be such that a pattern appears when a light guide plate is cut with a lens and illuminated by a light source from the side. , An LED or the like, or a 7-segment.

  The display related to the notice icon may be a display indicating that the notice icon is stocked, a display indicating that the notice icon is consumed, or a notice indicating the stock of the notice icon. It may be a display, or an effect display executed when the notice icon is exhausted.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix a55)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 54,
In the second display unit, the plurality of notice icons are configured to be newly displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Also, an effect may be performed in which the notice icon is consumed on the second display means.

(Appendix a56)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In addition, you may make it perform "the display which suggests that the notice icon may be displayed" in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which a preview icon is displayed, or the preview icon is displayed. May be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix a57)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a54 to a56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a58)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a54 to a56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a59)
Display means;
Movable means,
A gaming table with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be pre-read is held, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Until the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the time when the first symbol variation display is started and the time when the second symbol variation display is completed. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as “notice icon digestion effect”) is performed, and
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but may also be performed for another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means on which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix a60)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a59,
When the twenty-first notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  It should be noted that the first movable means effect may not be performed even if the twenty-first notice icon is digested, or the first movable means may be necessarily rendered when the twenty-first notice icon is digested. A means effect may be performed.

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is consumed, another effect (an effect having a different operation) from the first movable means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be performed by another movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon may be digested. Then, the effect by the first movable means may be always performed.

(Appendix a61)
The gaming table according to appendix a59 or a60,
When the twenty-two notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that the first movable means effect may be performed even if the twenty-second notice icon is digested, or another effect (or effect display) when the twenty-second notice icon is exhausted. May be performed.

(Appendix a62)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a59 to a61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operating means changes from the first mode to the second mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, “change” means a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix a63)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a59 to a62,
Comprising a second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the announcement icon digestion effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a64)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
In the case where the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be pre-read is held, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Until the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the time when the first symbol variation display is started and the time when the second symbol variation display is completed. May be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed whenever the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  Also, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only by one symbol change display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol change display.

  The notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix a65)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  The change in which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be a second symbol change display. By doing so, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed to the end.

(Appendix a66)
The gaming table according to appendix a64 or a65,
One of the eleventh number of the advance notice icons suggested by the advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the advance notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display does not have to increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a gasp that does not increase the notice icon.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two notice icons may be increased.

  Further, a notice icon other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix a67)
The gaming table according to appendix a64 or a65,
A twelfth number of the notice icons out of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon in some cases. Stand.

(Appendix a68)
Display means;
Hold display means;
A gaming table with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter, referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”) to be prefetched is displayed, the first Between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed after the first symbol variation display is started and before the second symbol variation display ends. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a69)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode,
In the symbol change display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the look-ahead display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a70)
The gaming table according to appendix a68 or a69,
In the case where the display of the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth suspension display”), the third symbol is displayed. Between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a71)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when displayed,
The notice icon, when displayed, is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

  The second display may be a display indicating the current situation, such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode names of selectable effect modes. Here, the effect mode includes, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a change in the frequency of occurrence of the one-notice effect. There is a mode for making it work.

  Further, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearance animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be set to be shorter than the display position of the animation in the middle. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notification icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only a part of the plurality of notice icons, or may be all of the plurality of notice icons. Notice icon may be used. In addition, the “announcement icon” may be only the announcement icon displayed first among the plurality of announcement icons, or may be a part including the announcement icon displayed first among the plurality of announcement icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not be overlapped.

  In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed in the display period of the first display. In addition, a notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily need to be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the gaze guidance of the notice icon may be performed. In some cases. In addition, the size may be different between the first display area and the second display area, and the roles may be different between the first display area and the second display area. For example, the advance display may not be performed in the first display area, but the advance display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix a72)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a73)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a71 or a72,
The first display is a display of a change icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is canceled.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  According to this game console, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the notice icon related to the relevant and subsequent symbol change display is displayed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, a new expectation may be given to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display is consumed.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed when the overlap with the first portion is resolved.

  Further, during the period in which the change icon is displayed, the change icon may be one that can at least suggest a sense of expectation to a big hit in the symbol change display.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-read notice display, or may be displayed in a symbol change display to be pre-read.

  Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display which is the subject of prefetching.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed singly, or may be configured to be able to be displayed in plurals. Here, when displaying a plurality of advance notice icons, the advance notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the advance notice icons may be displayed without limitation without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix a74)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a71 to a73,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a75)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a71 to a73,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix a76)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a71 to a75,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
A game console, wherein when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix a77)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a71 to a76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by a line,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a78)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a71 to a77,
"The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when it is displayed," as described in Supplementary Note a71. Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed. "
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a79)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a71 to a78,
The symbol variation display that is a big hit has a larger number of the notice icons digested than the symbol variation display that is a loss,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a80)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is different from the hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of description display is a first description display,
The first description display is a description display related to the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The number of the jackpot fluctuations that the notice icon is digested is larger than the loss fluctuation,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a81)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display area”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a82)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a83)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a80 to a82,
One of the plurality of types of description display is a second description display,
The second description display is a display showing the current stage of the production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display area”).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a84)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a83,
Even in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a85)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a80 to a84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of types of advance icons”) as the advance notice icons,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a86)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display unit,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a87)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a86,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a88)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may restart.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a89)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a86 to a88,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a90)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a86 to a89,
The display unit is a unit configured by a plurality of display units,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a91)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a86 to a90,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The game console, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix a92)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a91,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the hit jackpot degree of reach.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Appendix a93)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as a “first notice icon”) of the plurality of notice icons,
The second display is a display including a display of the first notice icon in a large size,
After the second display is made, the first display may be made,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix a94)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note a93,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of the decorative pattern,
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a95)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a93 or a94,
The third display is a display that does not overlap with the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a96)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a93 to a95,
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a97)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a93 to a96,
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is obtained,
(Appendix a98)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a97,
The second display is a display also performed when the first notice icon is digested,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix 99)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the notice icon already acquired is displayed in an enlarged manner.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a100)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a display of a decorative pattern,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a101)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a100,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In a portion of the second display extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as an “extended portion”), the fourth display is configured to be displayable;
The extension portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a102)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a103)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a101 or Supplementary Note a102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayed,
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a104)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a100 to a103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a dialogue notice,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a105)
A game console having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying icons related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design change display,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a106)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a105,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In a portion of the second display extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as an “extended portion”), the fourth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable,
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a107)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a106,
The effect display is a display of advance notice.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a108)
The gaming table according to supplementary note a106 or supplementary note a107,
The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a109)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a106 to a108,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a110)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a106 to a109,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of dialogue,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a111)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a106 to a110,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable,
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a112)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a105 to a111,
The icon is a hold icon;
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a113)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a112,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the reserved icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is suspended,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a114)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a105 to a114,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a115)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display,
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a third display area of the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a116)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a115,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a117)
The gaming table described in Supplementary Note a116,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a118)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a117,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note a119)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a118,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a120)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note a119,
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a121)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a120,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a122)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a121,
The display unit is a unit configured by a plurality of display units,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in cooperation with the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a123)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a122,
The first display area is a display area partitioned by a line,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a124)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a123,
Equipped with a hold display means,
The suspension display unit is a unit capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of which the start of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspensions”),
The notice icon is an icon that does not indicate the number of holds according to the number displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix a125)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes a115 to a124,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix b1)
A game console with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a character display (hereinafter, referred to as a "first display").
One of the plurality of types of display is a character display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display”).
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The second display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area,
A plurality of notice icons may be displayed in the first display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix b2)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note b1,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the notice icon may be started in the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix b3)
The gaming table according to appendix b1 or b2,
It is configured to display multiple types of icons as notice icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
In a state where the first icon is displayed in the first display area, display of the first icon may be started in the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix b4)
Operating means;
Display means;
A gaming table with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a character display (hereinafter, referred to as a "first display").
One of the plurality of types of display is a character display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display”).
The first display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The second display, when displayed, is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the first display area,
A notice icon may be displayed in the second display area,
It is configured to display multiple types of icons as notice icons,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the operation unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix b5)
The gaming table according to Supplementary Note b4,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the display of the notice icon may be started in the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Appendix b6)
The gaming table according to appendix b4 or b5,
The first icon is an icon for announcing the occurrence of the button effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that the term “announcement icon” described so far is simply named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif), and when the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, the notice may be referred to as a notice skill, and when the notice icon is box-shaped, the notice icon may be referred to as a notice box. , Notice medal). Also, the term "notice" in the notice icon is named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that the item is to be stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 is described as an example. However, for example, a game ball is sealed in the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and the sealed ball is circulated and used in the pachinko machine body. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko-type pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use the enclosed ball as a shooting ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is a component contained only in each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and supplementary notes, the component may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and supplementary notes.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance button (first chance button) / effect button 136X Initial position display 137 Second chance button 138 Chance button lamp 181 Operation key unit 190 Transmission unit 191 Transmission unit 191X Transmission unit display 208 Decorative pattern Display device 209 ′ Timer notice display means 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 224 Rendering movable body 246 Shielding device 247 Family crest role object 248 Combined position material 281 Reserved icon display area of special figure 1 285 Notice icon display Area 286 Production holding lamp h1 to h8 Hold icon c Change icon T Timer notice display T1 Time display e4, e5 Effect display 300 Main controller 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 first sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
412 Counter timer 418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Lamp for game board 542 Lamp for game frame 600 Payout controller 1000 Slot machine

Claims (8)

A first operation means;
Second operating means;
A third operating means,
A gaming table with
In a state where the second operating means is vibrating, the first operating means may not vibrate,
The second operation means is an operation means capable of changing the position of the operation surface,
The third operation means is an operation means including a plurality of operation units,
It is possible to perform multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is a notice effect,
The first production is a judge production about a jackpot,
The first effect is an effect including an effect operation of the movable means,
The first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In a certain state where the effect operation in the first effect is being performed , the second operating means vibrates,
In the first effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
The first effect is not a notice effect on the second operation means,
One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is a notice effect,
The first production mode and the third production mode are different modes,
The third effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means,
In the third effect, the second operation means does not vibrate,
In the third effect, the third operation means does not vibrate,
If both the third effect and the first effect is performed in one variation rather name
One of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect including an effect operation of the movable means,
The fourth effect may be started in response to the operation of the second operation means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
The first effect is an effect that is executed when the first operation means is operated at a first timing,
The third effect is an effect that is executed when the first operation means is operated at a timing different from the first timing,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
The first effect is one of the announcement effects related to the first operation means,
The third effect is a different effect from the first effect of the notice effects related to the first operation means,
The "announcement effect regarding the first operation means" means "an effect that is started when the first operation means is operated in a state where a display for prompting the operation of the first operation means is made". Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The first effect is an effect that does not start with the operation of the second operation means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first effect is an effect in which a display for prompting operation of the first operation unit is not performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first effect is not an effect that is started when the second operation unit is operated in a state where a display prompting the operation of the second operation unit is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The second operation unit is an operation unit that vibrates in at least a part of a period during which the first effect is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The “judgment effect on the jackpot” according to claim 1 is “an effect in which a judge result indicating a jackpot is notified”.
A gaming table characterized by the following.